CNC GUIDE

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (OPERATION)

A-42148-00359EN/06
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• The appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan's “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law". The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the
country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.Should you wish to
export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.

In this manual, we endeavor to include all pertinent matters.

There are, however, a very large number of operations that must not or cannot be
performed, and if the manual contained them all, it would be enormous in volume.
It is, therefore, requested to assume that any operations that are not explicitly described as
being possible are "not possible".

This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by  or  in the main body.
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing
damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into WARNING and CAUTION
according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as
a NOTE. Read the WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE thoroughly before attempting
to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there
is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being
damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than
Warning and Caution.

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

-3-
TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ························ 3

I. CNC GUIDE CNC Simulation Function ········································ 11
1 INTRODUCTION ································································ 12
2 OVERVIEW ········································································ 13
2.1 SPECIFICATION OF ACADEMIC PACKAGE ·················································· 21

3 STARTING AND EXITING ···················································· 22

4 BASIC OPERATIONS ·························································· 26
4.1 COMPONENT NAMES ················································································ 27
4.2 OPERATION······························································································ 31
4.2.1 Mode Selection········································································································ 31
4.3 OPERATIONS USING MDI KEYS ································································· 32
4.4 OPERATIONS USING SOFT KEYS ······························································· 37
4.5 OPERATIONS USING THE MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL···························· 38
4.6 OPERATIONS USING THE OPERATOR'S PANEL ··········································· 42
4.7 OPERATIONS USING THE KEYBOARD OF THE PERSONAL COMPUTER ········ 45
4.7.1 Starting and Exiting ································································································ 47
4.7.2 Setting ·················································································································· 48
4.8 SCREEN DISPLAY ····················································································· 51
4.9 EDITING A PROGRAM················································································ 57
4.9.1 Creating Programs ·································································································· 57
4.9.2 Editing Programs ···································································································· 57
4.9.3 Program Operation·································································································· 58
4.9.4 Program Select ······································································································· 59
4.9.5 Program Delete ······································································································· 60
4.9.6 Sample Program ····································································································· 62
4.9.7 Remedy when Program is not Correctly Executed ························································ 65
4.10 MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY······································································ 66

5 I / O CNC DATA ·································································· 67

6 MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL ························ 68
6.1 MACHINE DATA ························································································ 70
6.2 STARTING OF TOOL ·················································································· 71
6.3 CREATING MACHINE COMPOSITION SETTING DATA FROM FOLDER ··········· 76
6.3.1 Creating the machine composition folder ···································································· 77
6.3.2 Creating from command line ····················································································· 78

7 SETTINGS ········································································· 79
7.1 SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE ··································································· 80
7.2 MDI KEY SETTINGS ·················································································· 84
7.2.1 Changing the MDI Key Type ····················································································· 86
7.3 CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE CNC DISPLAY··············································· 89
7.3.1 CNC Display Size and Personal Computer Display Resolution ······································· 92

-4-
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.4 SWITCHING THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE ······················································ 93

7.5 FULL-SCREEN DISPLAY MODE ·································································· 94
7.5.1 Full Screen Display Mode at 19 Inch ·········································································· 96
7.6 SIMPLE OPERATOR’S PANEL ····································································· 98
7.7 CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL ············································· 100
7.7.1 Starting and Exiting ······························································································ 100
7.7.2 Common Setting Screen ························································································· 102
7.7.3 Individual Setting Screen ······················································································· 103
7.7.4 Menu··················································································································· 109
7.7.5 Deletion of Setting································································································· 109

8 CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS ··················································· 110

8.1 OPTION SETTING ···················································································· 111
8.1.1 Starting and Exiting ······························································································ 111
8.1.2 Procedure ············································································································ 115
8.2 MACHINE COMPOSITION SETTINGS ························································ 132
8.2.1 Overview ············································································································· 132
8.2.2 Starting and Exiting ······························································································ 134
8.2.3 Selecting Machine Composition when CNC GUIDE Starts ·········································· 135
8.2.4 Select between Default Machine Compositions ·························································· 135
8.2.5 Creating New Machine Compositions ······································································· 136
8.2.6 Editing Machine Compositions ················································································ 145
8.2.7 Copying Machine Compositions ··············································································· 146
8.2.8 Deleting Machine Compositions ·············································································· 146
8.2.9 PMC I / O Data Screen ··························································································· 147
8.2.10 Import of Old series machine composition setting data ··············································· 150
8.3 G CODE SKIP FUNCTION ········································································· 153
8.3.1 Outline ················································································································ 153
8.3.2 Description··········································································································· 153
8.3.3 Setting ················································································································ 158

9 C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION ··········· 160

9.1 SUMMARY ······························································································ 161
9.2 INTRODUCTION ····················································································· 163
9.2.1 How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC ··················································· 165
9.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ······································································· 167
9.4 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN CNC AND CNC GUIDE ······································· 168
9.4.1 Procedure of Making C Language Executor Application ·············································· 168
9.4.2 Modification of Source Code ···················································································· 171
9.4.3 Machine Composition ···························································································· 172
9.4.4 Custom Soft Capacity Option ·················································································· 172
9.4.5 Read and Write to Memory Card ············································································· 172
9.4.6 Operation of FROM Function ·················································································· 173
9.4.7 SRAM File ··········································································································· 173
9.4.8 Changing C Language Executor Configuration for CNC ·············································· 173
9.4.9 Saving Sramver Variables ······················································································ 174
9.5 SUPPORTING FUNCTION LIST ································································· 177
9.5.1 ANSI C Standard Library······················································································· 177
9.5.2 MS-C Extended C Standard Library ········································································ 183
9.5.3 Graphic Library ( MS-C Compatible Graphic Functions ) ············································ 190
9.5.4 Graphic Library ( Original Graphic Functions ) ························································· 194
9.5.5 CNC Window Library ···························································································· 196
9.5.6 CNC Window Library ( for Laser / Punch ) ································································ 207
9.5.7 PMC Window Library ···························································································· 210
9.5.8 MDI Operation Library ·························································································· 212
9.5.9 CRT Operation Library ·························································································· 213

-5-
TABLE OF CONTENTS

9.5.10 File Operation Library ··························································································· 217

9.5.11 Serial Communication Library ················································································ 218
9.5.12 Task Control Library ····························································································· 219
9.5.13 FCA Library ········································································································· 221
9.5.14 F-ROM Library ····································································································· 222
9.5.15 Touch-panel Library ······························································································ 224
9.5.16 FTP Transfer Library ···························································································· 225
9.5.17 High Level / Middle Level Task Control Library························································· 226
9.6 EXECUTE THE C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR APPLICATION ···························· 227
9.6.1 Necessary Option, Parameter and How to Set ··························································· 227
9.6.2 Start of the C Executor Application ·········································································· 229
9.7 COMPILING AND DEBUGGING OF THE C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
APPLICATION··································································································· 233
9.7.1 Preparation ·········································································································· 234
9.7.2 Making and Execution of C Language Executor ························································· 237
9.7.3 Debugging Execution Example ················································································ 240
9.8 COMPILE ENVIRONMENT ······································································· 247
9.8.1 Relation between C Language Executor Task and Visual C++ Project ··························· 247
9.8.2 Debug Build and Release Build ··············································································· 249
9.9 ADDITIONAL PROCEDURE OF EXISTING SOURCE CODE ··························· 250
9.9.1 Copy of Source Code ······························································································ 250
9.9.2 Addition of Source Code to Project ··········································································· 250
9.9.3 Modification of Source Code ···················································································· 251
9.10 REFERENCE1 : THE USAGES OF VISUAL C++ 2010 EXPRESS EDITION ········ 252
9.10.1 How to Install Visual C++ 2010 Express Edition ························································ 252
9.11 REFERENCE2 : THE USAGES OF VISUAL C++ 2005 EXPRESS EDITION ········ 259
9.11.1 How to Install Visual C++ 2005 Express Edition ························································ 259
9.11.2 How to Install Platform SDK ·················································································· 263
9.11.3 How to Set to Use Platform SDK in Visual C++ 2005 Express Edition ··························· 267
9.12 REFERENCE3 : CONVERTING VISUAL C++ 2005 PROJECT INTO VISUAL C++
2010 PROJECT ·································································································· 271

10 MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION ···················· 276

10.1 OUTLINE ······························································································· 277
10.2 INTRODUCTIONS···················································································· 278
10.2.1 How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC ··················································· 279
10.3 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ··································································· 279
10.4 SETTING OF CNC GUIDE ········································································· 279
10.4.1 Option ················································································································· 279
10.4.2 Machine Settings ·································································································· 280
10.4.3 Loading of P-CODE File ························································································· 280
10.4.4 Custom Software Size ···························································································· 280
10.4.5 Reading and Writing to Memory Card ······································································ 280
10.5 AVAILABLE FUNCTION ··········································································· 281
10.5.1 List of G Code ······································································································· 281
10.5.2 List of Control Variables························································································· 282
10.6 EXECUTION OF THE SAMPLE P-CODE FILE ············································· 287
10.6.1 Setting of the Option and the CNC Parameter ··························································· 287
10.6.2 Exexutuion of P-CODE File ···················································································· 289

11 FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION ············································· 290

11.1 HOW TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN CNC GUIDE AND CNC ··························· 290

12 FOCAS2 FUNCTION ·························································· 291

-6-
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

12.1 HOW TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN CNC GUIDE AND CNC ··························· 291

13 CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function ······························ 293

13.1 OVERVIEW ····························································································· 294
13.2 FEATURE OF MANUAL GUIDE I FUNCTION ·············································· 295
13.2.1 EDITING OF EDIT MODE····················································································· 295
13.2.2 AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF MEM MODE···························································· 295
13.2.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF MDI MODE ····························································· 295
13.2.4 EXECUTION OF MACHINING SIMULATION ························································· 295
13.2.5 EXECUTION OF CNC PROGRAM CONVERSION ···················································· 295
13.2.6 EDIT OF CNC PARAMETER·················································································· 295
13.2.7 DISPLAY OF CNC SCREEN ·················································································· 295
13.2.8 I / O MANUAL GUIDE i DATA ··············································································· 295
13.3 OPERATION OF MANUAL GUIDE I FUNCTION ·········································· 296
13.3.1 AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF MEM MODE···························································· 296
13.3.2 OPERATIONS USING THE KEYBOARD OF PERSONAL COMPUTER ······················· 297
13.3.3 DISPLAY OF CNC SCREEN ·················································································· 297
13.3.4 EDIT OF CNC PARAMETERS ················································································ 298
13.3.5 I / O MANUAL GUIDE i DATAS·············································································· 298
13.3.6 VERSION INFORMATION ···················································································· 299
13.3.6.1 Version confirmation of MANUAL GUIDE i ····················································· 299
13.3.6.2 Version Confirmation of CNC Simulation Function ··········································· 299
13.3.7 SETTING OF MACHINE COMPOSITION ······························································· 300
13.3.7.1 Setting of Machine Composition to Use MANUAL GUIDE i Function ·················· 300
13.3.7.2 Option Setting to Use MANUAL GUIDE i Function ·········································· 302
13.3.7.3 Selecting Machine Composition ······································································ 303
13.3.7.4 Select Machine Composition at Start······························································· 304
13.3.8 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTION·········································································· 304
13.3.8.1 Setting of MULTI-PATH Lathe Function ························································· 304
13.3.8.2 PATH Selection Change ················································································ 306
13.4 ERROR MESSAGE ··················································································· 307

14 TURN MATE i Function······················································· 308

14.1 OVERVIEW ····························································································· 309
14.2 TURN MATE I FUNCTION ········································································ 310
14.2.1 SETTING OF MACHINE COMPOSITION ······························································· 310
14.2.1.1 Setting of Machine Composition to Use TURN MATE i Function························· 310
14.2.1.2 Option Setting to Use TURN MATE i Function················································· 312
14.2.1.3 Selecting Machine Composition ······································································ 313
14.2.1.4 Select Machine Composition at Start······························································· 313

15 CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function ···························· 314

15.1 OVERVIEW ····························································································· 315
15.2 OPERATION OF MANUAL GUIDE 0I SIMULATION FUNCTION ···················· 316
15.2.1 SETTING OF MACHINE COMPOSITION ······························································· 316
15.2.1.1 Setting of Machine Composition to Use MANUAL GUIDE i Function ·················· 316
15.2.1.2 Option Setting to Use MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function········································· 317
15.2.1.3 Selecting Machine Composition ······································································ 319
15.2.1.4 Select Machine Composition at Start······························································· 319

16 iHMI Function ··································································· 320

16.1 USE OF IHMI ·························································································· 321
16.1.1 SETTING OF MACHINE COMPOSITION ······························································· 321
16.1.2 SETTING OF OPTION ·························································································· 321
16.2 SETTING FILES ······················································································ 323

-7-
TABLE OF CONTENTS

16.2.1 STORAGE FOLDER ······························································································ 323

16.2.2 SETTINGS··········································································································· 323
16.3 RESTRICTION························································································· 326

II. CNC GUIDE PMC Simulation Function ····································· 328

1 INTRODUCTION ······························································· 329
1.1 FEATURES OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ··········································· 330
1.1.1 Features ·············································································································· 330
1.1.2 Difference between actual PMC and PMC Simulation Function ··································· 330
1.2 HOW TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN CNC GUIDE AND CNC ··························· 335

2 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ············································· 336

3 SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION337
3.1 OPERATION MODE OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ······························· 338
3.2 PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ································································· 339
3.2.1 Display Mode········································································································ 339
3.2.2 Operation in Picture Mode······················································································ 340
3.2.3 Window Mode ······································································································· 341
3.2.4 Title Window ········································································································ 342
3.2.5 Ladder Execution Status Window ············································································ 343
3.3 ADDING DIVIDED LADDER PROGRAM······················································ 345
3.3.1 Outline ················································································································ 345
3.3.2 Starting PMC I/O Data Screen ················································································ 345
3.3.3 Loading Divided Ladder Program ············································································ 346

4 Dual Check Safety function ·················································· 347

4.1 OUTLINE ······························································································· 348
4.2 DCSPMC OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ··············································· 349
4.2.1 Specification ········································································································· 349
4.2.2 Difference between actual DCSPMC and one of PMC Simulation function ····················· 349
4.3 SAFETY FUNCTION ················································································ 350
4.4 I/O SIGNALS ··························································································· 351

5 I/O OPERATION PANEL ····················································· 352

5.1 OUTLINE ······························································································· 353
5.2 SETTING PROCEDURE ON I/O OPERATION PANEL ···································· 354
5.3 CONTENTS OF I/O OPERATION PANEL SETTING DIALOG ·························· 357
5.4 I/O OPERATION PANEL SETTING DIALOG ················································· 359
5.5 I/O OPERATION PANEL WINDOW ····························································· 362
5.6 WRITING/READING FUNCTION OF I/O OPERATION PANEL SETTING ·········· 366
5.6.1 Outline ················································································································ 366
5.6.2 Write Setting File ·································································································· 366
5.6.3 Read Setting File ·································································································· 368
5.7 AUTO-SETTING FUNCTION OF I/O OPERATION PANEL ······························ 370
5.7.1 Outline ················································································································ 370
5.7.2 Operation············································································································· 371
5.7.3 I/O Operation Panel Set Automatically ····································································· 375

6 STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW ········· 378

6.1 OUTLINE ······························································································· 379

-8-
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.2 CONFIGURATION OF STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL ··············· 380

6.3 FUNCTION OF STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL ························ 383
6.4 OPERATION OF STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL ······················· 385
6.4.1 Operation of Main Panel ························································································ 385
6.4.2 Operation of Sub Panel ·························································································· 387

7 SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION ··························· 388

7.1 OUTLINE ······························································································· 389
7.2 SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY SCREEN ····················································· 390
7.3 FILE OPERATION ···················································································· 393
7.4 SIGNAL OPERATION FILE FORMAT ·························································· 394
7.5 CONVERTING TRACED SIGNALS ····························································· 397
7.5.1 Procedure to Convert ····························································································· 397

8 MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION ······················ 398

8.1 OUTLINE ······························································································· 399
8.2 MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATOR ······························································· 402
8.2.1 Outline ················································································································ 402
8.2.2 Notes from Installation to Starting Application·························································· 412
8.2.3 Start and Exit of Machine Signal Simulator ······························································ 414
8.2.4 Machine Signal Simulator Screen ············································································ 415
8.2.5 Procedure of Machine Simulation with Machine Signal Simulator ································ 417
8.2.6 PMC Alarm Message List ······················································································· 429
8.2.7 Reference of CNC Information ················································································ 429
8.3 MACHINE SIGNAL API FUNCTION ··························································· 430
8.3.1 Outline ················································································································ 430
8.3.2 List of Library Function ························································································· 431
8.3.3 CNC/PMC Window Function··················································································· 432
8.3.4 Sample Application································································································ 432

9 VARIOUS SETTINGS ·························································· 433

9.1 PMC OPTION SETTINGS ·········································································· 434

10 INPUT/OUTPUT AND BACKUP OF PMC DATA ····················· 435

10.1 I/O OPERATION IN PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ····································· 436

11 COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC LADDER-III ····················· 437

11.1 OUTLINE ······························································································· 438
11.2 ETHERNET SETTING IN PC ····································································· 439
11.3 PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION SETTING ··················································· 440
11.4 CONNECT TO PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ON SAME PC ························· 441
11.5 CONNECT TO PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ON DIFFERENT PC ················ 443

Appendix ·················································································· 444

A LIST OF OPTION ······························································· 445
A.1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS OF CNC GUIDE························································ 446
31i-MODEL A ·················································································································· 446
0i MODEL D···················································································································· 450
0i MODEL F ···················································································································· 453
0i-MODEL F Plus ············································································································· 457
30i-MODEL B ·················································································································· 463

-9-
TABLE OF CONTENTS

31i-MODEL B ·················································································································· 463

31i-MODEL B5 ················································································································ 463
32i-MODEL B ·················································································································· 463
30i-MODEL B 32AX ········································································································· 472
30i-MODEL B 48AX ········································································································· 472
30i-MODEL B Plus ··········································································································· 478
31i-MODEL B Plus ··········································································································· 478
31i-MODEL B5 Plus ········································································································· 478
32i-MODEL B Plus ··········································································································· 478
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX ·································································································· 492
35i-MODEL B ·················································································································· 499
35i-MODEL B 16AX ········································································································· 499
0i-LF Plus ····················································································································· 503
30i-LB ····················································································································· 507
30i-LB Plus ····················································································································· 511
31i-LB ····················································································································· 516
31i-PB ····················································································································· 521
31i-WB ····················································································································· 523
PMi-MODEL A················································································································· 524
A.2 ACADEMIC PACKAGE ·············································································· 528
31i-MODEL A ·················································································································· 528
0i MODEL D···················································································································· 531
0i MODEL F ···················································································································· 533
0i-MODEL F Plus ············································································································· 538
30i-MODEL B ·················································································································· 544
31i-MODEL B ·················································································································· 544
31i-MODEL B5 ················································································································ 544
32i-MODEL B ·················································································································· 544
30i-MODEL B Plus ··········································································································· 550
31i-MODEL B Plus ··········································································································· 550
31i-MODEL B5 Plus ········································································································· 550
32i-MODEL B Plus ··········································································································· 550
35i-MODEL B ·················································································································· 558
35i-MODEL B 16AX ········································································································· 558
0i-LF Plus ····················································································································· 561
30i-LB ····················································································································· 565
30i-LB Plus ····················································································································· 569
31i-LB ····················································································································· 574
31i-PB ····················································································································· 576
PMi-MODEL A················································································································· 577

Version history ·········································································· 579

- 10 -
I. CNC GUIDE CNC Simulation Function

- 11 -
1.INTRODUCTION

1 INTRODUCTION
About this operator's manual
This manual describes how to operate the CNC simulator "CNC GUIDE" (normal
version/academic package) for a personal computer.
For information on how to operate the CNC, refer to the operator's manual supplied
with the CNC.

Differences from the CNC in operation

The CNC program operation functions of CNC GUIDE differ from the actual CNC.
Note also that CNC GUIDE cannot execute all of the functions related to CNC
program operation.
The main differences of CNC GUIDE from the CNC are as follows:

• The following functions are not supported.

 Data server
 Serial communication
 Ethernet communication
 Servo / spindle control
 Laser oscillator control (0i-LF Plus, 30i-LB, 30i-LB Plus, 31i-LB)
 Functions requiring the hardware of the CNC or related to it
• The supported feed commands are only positioning (G00), linear interpolation
(G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03).
Other interpolation commands are replaced G00, G01, G02 or G03.
• The machining time of machining program operation does not take into account
the execution time of auxiliary functions and the feedback of motors and
machines.
• Option board functions such as those of customers' boards and C language boards
cannot be used.
• The regular maintenance screen, maintenance information screen, and power
saving monitor screen cannot be displayed.

- 12 -
 2.OVERVIEW

2 OVERVIEW
CNC GUIDE is an application for learning how to operate the CNC that runs on a
personal computer.
It can be used without the need for dedicated additional hardware.
The following two packages are provided.
• Normal version
• Academic package

It has features such as:

• Enables you to display and operate the basic screens of CNC.
• Enables you to edit machining programs.
• Enables you to set tool offsets and so on.
• Enables you to perform a part program format checks through program operation.
• The application of the MACRO EXECUTOR can be executed.
• The application of the C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR can be executed.
• The FOCAS2 function can be used.
• The FANUC PICTURE functions can be executed.
• The ladder program of the PMC function can be executed and be edited.
• The application of iHMI can be executed.

If you want to operate the CNC GUIDE with the same feeling as an actual CNC, you
can use the "MOP simulator" sold separately.
Please see FANUC MOP Simulator manual (A-97238-00001EN) about the MOP
simulator.

NOTE
The MOP simulator cannot be used when the following languages
are selected in the Windows keyboard layout.
・Italian
・Russian
・Bulgarian
・Hindi

- 13 -
2.OVERVIEW

Support Models
CNC GUIDE support models and its description in this manual are as follows.

Table2 (a) : CNC GUIDE support models

CNC GUIDE support models Description in this manual
Series 31i-MODEL A CNC GUIDE ( 31iA version )
Series 0i-MODEL D CNC GUIDE ( 0iD version )
Series 0i-MODEL F CNC GUIDE ( 0iF version )
Series 0i-MODEL F Plus CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus version )
Series 0i-LF Plus CNC GUIDE ( 0iLF Plus version )
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB version )
Series 30i-MODEL B CNC GUIDE ( 30iB 32AXversion )
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB 48AXversion )
Series 30i-LB CNC GUIDE ( 30iLB version )
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB Plus version )
Series 30i-MODEL B Plus
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB Plus 72AX version )
Series 30i-LB Plus CNC GUIDE ( 30iLB Plus version )
Series 31i-MODEL B
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB version )
Series 31i-MODEL B iHMI
Series 31i-MODEL B Plus CNC GUIDE ( 31iB Plus version )
Series 31i-LB CNC GUIDE ( 31iLB version )
Series 31i-PB CNC GUIDE ( 31iPB version )
Series 31i-WB CNC GUIDE ( 31iWB version )
Series 31i-MODEL B5 CNC GUIDE ( 31iB5 version )
Series 31i- MODEL B5 Plus CNC GUIDE ( 31iB5 Plus version )
Series 32i-MODEL B CNC GUIDE ( 32iB version )
Series 32i- MODEL B Plus CNC GUIDE ( 32iB Plus version )
CNC GUIDE ( 35iB version )
Series 35i-MODEL B
CNC GUIDE ( 35iB 16AX version )
Power Motion i-MODEL A CNC GUIDE ( PMiA version )

- 14 -
 2.OVERVIEW

CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus iHMI version ) and CNC GUIDE ( 30iB iHMI version ) are
deleted CNC GUIDE Ver 19.20 or later, they can be used CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus
version ) and CNC GUIDE ( 30iB version ) respectively.

Table.2 (b) Change of CNC GUIDE(iHMI version)

Ver 19.10 or older Ver 19.20 or later
CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus iHMI version ) CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus version )
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB iHMI version ) CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus version )

When CNC GUIDE Ver 19.20 or later has been installed,its model can be started by
double-clicking the machine composition setting data of CNC GUIDE ( iHMI
version ) Ver 19.10 or older.
Storage folder of machine composition setting data is changed the following folder.

Table.2 (c) Storage folder of CNC GUIDE(iHMI version) machine composition setting data
Old series machine name Ver 19.10 or older Ver 19.20 or later
CNC GUIDE C:\ProgramData\FANUC\ C:\ProgramData\FANUC\
( 0iF Plus iHMI version ) NCGuide FS0i-F Plus iHMI\MachineSetting NCGuide FS0i-F Plus\MachineSetting
CNC GUIDE C:\ProgramData\FANUC\ C:\ProgramData\FANUC\
( 30iB iHMI version ) NCGuide FS30i-B iHMI\MachineSetting NCGuide FS30i-B\MachineSetting

If you use import function, you can copy easily machine composition setting data to
its. Please refer to the following chapter.
-8.2.10 Import of Old series machine composition setting data

- 15 -
2.OVERVIEW

Series/Version

CNC series and version corresponding to each model are as follows.

Table 2 (d) : Series / Version of CNC function

CNC
Models Remarks
Series Version
CNC GUIDE ( 31iA version ) G11D 28.0
CNC GUIDE ( 0iD version ) D4F1/D6F1 30.0 D4F1:Type M, D6F1:Type T
CNC GUIDE ( 0iF version ) D4G2/D6G2 49.0 D4G2:Type M, D6G2:Type T
CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus version ) D4G3/D6G3 30.0 D4G3:Type M, D6G3:Type T
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB version ) G313
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB version ) G413
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB5 version ) G433
CNC GUIDE ( 32iB version ) G503 55.0
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB 32AXversion ) G323
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB 48AXversion ) G333
CNC GUIDE ( 35iB 16AX version ) G613
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB Plus version ) G317
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB Plus version ) G417
19.0
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB5 Plus version ) G437
CNC GUIDE ( 32iB Plus version ) G507
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB Plus 72AX version ) G3GD 12.0
CNC GUIDE ( 35iB version ) G601 12.0
CNC GUIDE ( 0iLF Plus version ) DCG3 9.0
CNC GUIDE ( 30iLB version ) G3D5 21.0
CNC GUIDE ( 30iLB Plus version ) G3D7 5.0
CNC GUIDE ( 31iLB version ) G4C3 14.0
CNC GUIDE ( 31iPB version ) G4E1 36.0
CNC GUIDE ( 31iWB version ) G4A1 27.0
CNC GUIDE ( PMiA version ) 88H0 26.0

- 16 -
 2.OVERVIEW

The series name displayed in CNC GUIDE has been changed in version 19.0 as
follows.

Table 2 (e) : Series of CNC GUIDE

Series
Models Same as CNC Guide Remarks
CNC Original(OLD)
CNC GUIDE ( 31iA version ) G11D G11Z
CNC GUIDE ( 0iD version ) D4F1/D6F1 D4F1:Type M,D6F1:Type T
CNC GUIDE ( 0iF version ) D4G2/D6G2 ---- D4G2:Type M,D6G2:Type T
CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus version ) D4G3/D6G3 D4G3:Type M,D6G3:Type T
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB version ) G313 G31Z
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB version ) G413 G41Z
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB5 version ) G433 G43Z
CNC GUIDE ( 32iB version ) G503 G50Z
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB 32AXversion ) G323 G32Z
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB 48AXversion ) G333 G33Z
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB Plus version ) G317
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB Plus 72AX version ) G3GD
Regardless of Series/Version Setting,
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB Plus version ) G417
Same as left the same Series and version as CNC is
CNC GUIDE ( 31iB5 Plus version ) G437
displayed.
CNC GUIDE ( 32iB Plus version ) G507
CNC GUIDE ( 35iB 16AX version ) G613
CNC GUIDE ( 35iB version ) G601 G60Z
CNC GUIDE ( 0iLF Plus version ) DCG3
CNC GUIDE ( 30iLB version ) G3D5 Same as left
CNC GUIDE ( 30iLB Plus version ) G3D7
CNC GUIDE ( 31iLB version ) G4C3 G4CZ
CNC GUIDE ( 31iPB version ) G4E1 G4EZ
CNC GUIDE ( 31iWB version ) G4A1 G4AZ
CNC GUIDE ( PMiA version ) 88H0 88HZ

The above series names are gotten on the next screen or function..

* CNC display
- BOOT display
- System information display
* Customize function
- C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION (cnc_sysinfo)
- MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION (window function)
- FOCAS2 function (cnc_sysinfo)
- FP function of FANUC PICTURE (sysinfo)
- PMC (window function)

- 17 -
2.OVERVIEW

It’s also possible to display or get conventional Series name. Please refer to the
following chapter.
-7.7 CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL

- 18 -
 2.OVERVIEW

Description of each model

There are differences in specification between each model.
The part where the specification is different is described as follows.

31i-MODEL A
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 31iA version ) specification.

0i-MODEL D
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 0iD version ) specification.

0i-MODEL F
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 0iF version ) specification.

0i-MODEL F Plus
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus version ) specification.

0i-LF Plus
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 0iLF Plus version ) specification.

30i-MODEL B
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 30iB version ) specification.

30i-LB
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 30iLB version ) specification.

30i-MODEL B 32AX
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 30iB 32AXversion ) specification.

30i-MODEL B 48AX
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 30iB 48AXversion ) specification.

30i-MODEL B Plus
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 30iB Plus version ) specification.

30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX

Case of CNC GUIDE ( 30iB Plus 72AX version ) specification.

30i-LB Plus
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 30iLB Plus version ) specification.

31i-MODEL B
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 31iB version ) specification.

31i-MODEL B Plus

- 19 -
2.OVERVIEW

Case of CNC GUIDE ( 31iB Plus version ) specification.

35i-MODEL B
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 35iB version ) specification.

35i-MODEL B 16AX
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 35iB 16AX version ) specification.

31i-LB
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 31iLB version ) specification.

31i-PB
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 31iPB version ) specification.

31i-WB
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 31iWB version ) specification.

31i- MODEL B5
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 31iB5version ) specification.

31i-MODEL B5 Plus
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 31iB5 Plus version ) specification.

32i-MODEL B
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 32iB version ) specification.

32i-MODEL B Plus
Case of CNC GUIDE ( 32iB Plus version ) specification.

PMi- MODEL A
Case of CNC GUIDE ( PMiA version ) specification.

- 20 -
 2.OVERVIEW

2.1 SPECIFICATION OF ACADEMIC PACKAGE

The following shows settable machine compositions and executable CNC programs
for the academic package.

Table 2.1 (a) Settable machine compositions

Maximum number of controllable axes 4 axes
Maximum number of paths 1 path
Maximum program storage size 32 Kbytes
Maximum number of programs 64

- 21 -
3.STARTING AND EXITING

3 STARTING AND EXITING

Starting CNC GUIDE

Click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(Model name) ] - [ CNC GUIDE(Model name) ] On the

start menu, CNC GUIDE starts.

Fig. 3 (a) Start menu [ CNC GUIDE ]

When it has started, the window shown below appears.

Fig. 3 (b) Start window to appear

- 22 -
 3.STARTING AND EXITING

Machine composition that uses iHMI, the window shown below appears.

Fig. 3 (c) Start window to appear (iHMI)

NOTE
Only one user can use the CNC GUIDE for one computer at a time.

Start from machine composition setting data

CNC GUIDE can be started by double-clicking the machine composition setting
data.

NOTE
Only one user can use the CNC GUIDE for one computer at a time.

It does according to the following procedures.

(1) The folder where the machine composition setting data is stored is opened.
(Refer to “CNC GUIDE OPERATOR’S MANUAL (SETUP)” Chapter 4.1
for the default value of the storage folder.)
(2) Double-click the machine composition setting data of CNC GUIDE that you
want to start.
The extension that can be started is as follows:
***.fdat
***.mdat
***.pdat
***.sdat
(3) CNC GUIDE starts.

- 23 -
3.STARTING AND EXITING

Start from command line

The CNC GUIDE can be started from the command line.

It does according to the following procedures.

(1) Command prompt screen is displayed.

(2) The following command is executed on the displayed command prompt screen.

NCGuide.exe /C Machine composition setting data /R Root Folder

About the arguments

/C
Please specify machine composition setting data with full path.

/R
The root folder of the CNC GUIDE is specified, and the CNC GUIDE that
exists in
the root folder is started.

/?
Help (use and format) is displayed.

Ex) C:\Program Files (x86)\FANUC\NCGuide>NCGuide.exe /C

"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide
FS30i-B\MachineSetting\1path-3axis-M.mdat" /R "C:\Program Files
(x86)\FANUC"

NOTE
1. Enclose machine composition setting data and root folder
with a double quotation respectively.
2. ”Root folder” indicates the parents in which each model of
CNC GUIDE is installed.
3. Root folder can be omitted.
In that case, It makes it to the parents folder in which CNC
GUIDE is installed.

Exiting CNC GUIDE

To exit CNC GUIDE, click the exit button located at the lower left corner of the CNC
GUIDE screen, or right-click the mouse and select Exit from the popup menu
displayed.

- 24 -
 3.STARTING AND EXITING

Fig. 3 (d) Exit button (left) and Exit menu item (right)

- 25 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4 BASIC OPERATIONS
This chapter explains how to perform the basic CNC operations using the CNC
GUIDE.

The following methods are available for performing CNC operations using the CNC
GUIDE:

- Using MDI keys

- Using soft keys
- Using the machine operator's panel
- Using the operator's panel
- Using the keyboard of the personal computer

If you want to operate the CNC GUIDE with the same feeling as an actual CNC, you
can use the "MOP simulator" sold separately.
Please see FANUC MOP Simulator manual (A-97238-00001EN) about the MOP
simulator.

NOTE
The MOP simulator cannot be used when the following languages
are selected in the Windows keyboard layout.
・Italian
・Russian
・Bulgarian
・Hindi

- 26 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.1 COMPONENT NAMES

The names of the components of CNC GUIDE screen are given below, together with
a general description.

CNC display

Vertical soft key

Horizontal soft key

Machine operator's
panel

MDI keys Special key

Fig.4.1 (a) Component names of operation screen ( CNC GUIDE ( 10.4inch ) )

CNC display:
CNC screen is displayed.
Horizontal / Vertical soft keys:
Clicking them allows you to perform their corresponding horizontal /
vertical soft key operations. ( CNC GUIDE ( 30iB version ) )
Clicking them allows you to perform their corresponding horizontal /
vertical soft key operations. ( CNC GUIDE ( 0iD version ) )
MDI keys:
Clicking them allows you to perform corresponding MDI operations.
Machine operator's panel keys:
Clicking them allows you to perform the functions associated to the
individual keys.
Special key:

- 27 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

This key is used when operating two keys at the same time.
Ex) Alarm cleared by operating “CAN” and “RESET”.

Machine composition that uses iHMI, the window shown below appears.

iHMI Display
Machine operation’s panel

Fig.4.1 (b) Component names of operation screen (CNC GUIDE (10.4inch)

- 28 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F

CNC display

Horizontal soft key

Machine operator’s
panel

Special key MDI keys

Fig.4.1 (c) Component names of operation screen (CNC GUIDE (8.4inch)

- 29 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus

CNC display

Horizontal soft key

Machine operator’s
panel

Special key MDI keys

Fig.4.1 (d) Component names of operation screen (CNC GUIDE (10.4inch)

- 30 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.2 OPERATION

4.2.1 Mode Selection

The content of the work of CNC is decided by selecting the mode.
The following 2 modes can be selected on CNC GUIDE.

(1) Program Editing mode ( EDIT )

Following program editing operations are possible.
1. Creating new programs
2. Editing programs
3. Deleting programs

(2) Automatic operation

Editing programs can be executed.
Automatic operation includes the following 2 modes.
- Memory Operation mode ( MEM )
Program registered in the CNC memory can be executed.
- MDI Operation mode ( MDI )
Multiple blocks can be input and executed on MDI keys.

The mode can be selected with operator’s panel on the CNC GUIDE.
For detailed, refer to Chapter 4.6 OPERATIONS USING THE OPERATOR'S
PANEL.

The mode under the selection is displayed on the lower right of the CNC screen.

Fig4.2.1 (a) Mode is displayed

- 31 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.3 OPERATIONS USING MDI KEYS

The MDI keys can be manipulated in the same way as those on the actual CNC.

fig.4.3 (a) MDI KEY (QWERTY)

- 32 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

ADDRESS NUMBER KEY

RESET KEY KEY

EDIT KEY

HELP KEY

SHIFT KEY INPUT KEY

SPECIAL KEY

FUNCTION
PAGE KEY CURSOR KEY KEY

fig.4.3 (b) MDI KEY (ONG TYPE-T)

EXPLAIN OF MDI UNIT

Detail of MDI UNIT is explained

Part A

Part B

Part C

- 33 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

Part A

Part B

NUMBER
Number can
be input.

INPUT KEY
Data can be input to
CANCEL KEY CNC.
The key input
content can be
canceled.

- 34 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

Part C

SPECIAL KEY
The special key is used for operations that require simultaneous clicking of two keys
( referred to as combined-key operations in the remainder of this manual ).

Combined-key operation:
Through mouse manipulation on the personal computer, you cannot click two
keys at the same time.
Consequently, a combined-key operation requires the use of the Special key.

The procedure is as follows:

- Click the Special key.

- Then, click the keys to be clicked simultaneously in succession.
- You may click the keys in either order.
- As soon as you click the second key, the corresponding function will be
executed.

- 35 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

The usable key operations are as follows:

• CAN + RESET ( Remove Parameter write enable alarm )

• SHIFT+ PAGE ( Select Next Path screen )
• SHIFT+ HELP ( Select loader Path screen )
• SHIFT+ → or SHIFT+ ← ( Select editing program in background editor )

NOTE
• The Special key does not exist on the actual CNC.
• If the clicked two keys are not those of any valid combined-key
operation, no operation will be performed.

- 36 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.4 OPERATIONS USING SOFT KEYS

This section explains how to perform soft key operations.

Soft key operations

Clicking the horizontal / vertical soft keys allows you to perform the corresponding
soft key operations.
The soft keys can be manipulated in the same way as those on the actual CNC.

Click the softkeys

Fig.4.4 (a) Soft key operations

NOTE
CNC GUIDE (0iD version) can be operated horizontal softkey only.

- 37 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.5 OPERATIONS USING THE MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL

Machine operator’s panel composed main panel and sub panel. Each panel is provided
with the operation keys necessary for CNC GUIDE, such as the CNC mode switching
and emergency stop.
Clicking the operation keys allows you to perform the mode switching, emergency
stop, and other corresponding operations.

The following explains the functions of the individual operation keys

Main panel

Fig.4.5 (a) Main panel

(1) AUTO key

Switch the CNC to Memory operation (MEM) mode.

(2) EDIT key

Switch the CNC to Memory edit (EDIT) mode.

(3) MDI key

Switch the CNC to Manual data input (MDI) mode.

(4) REMOTE key

Switch the CNC to DNC operation (RMT) mode.

- 38 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

(5) REF key

Switch the CNC to Manual reference position return mode.

(6) JOG key

Switch the CNC to jog feed mode.

(7) INC key

Switch the CNC to incremental feed mode.

(8) SINGLE BLOCK key

Switch the single block operation to enable or disable.

When the single block is enabled, the automatic operation
stops after executing each block in the program.

(9) BLOCK SKIP key

Switch the block skip to enable or disable.

When the block skip is enabled, the block which specified the
slash (/) at the head is ignored.

(10) OPT STOP key

Switch the optional stop to enable and disable.

When the optional stop is enabled, the automatic operation
stops after M01 is exeuted.

(11) MC LOCK key

Switch the machine lock enable or disable.

When the machine lock is enabled, the machine do not move.
( Machine cordinate is not update. )

- 39 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

(12) DRY RUN key

Switch enabl and disable of dry run.

When the dry run is enable, the tool is moved with the dry run
feedrate instead of the feedrate specified in the program.

(13) CYCLE STOP key

Stop a CNC program.

(14) CYCLE START key

Execute a created program on the CNC.

Sub panel

Fig.4.5 (b) Sub panel

(1) Emergency stop switch

You can use the emagency stop.
Click this switch and the emergency stop is enabled. And state of switch is
changed as follows.

- 40 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

(2) Feedrate override switch

Feedrate which specified by CNC program can be changed

at the rate of 0% to 120%.

(3) Spindle override switch

Spindle speed can be changed at the rate of 50% to 120%.

(4) Protection key

Switch the protect to enable or disable.
When the protection is enabled, By setting the protection, the editting or
changing of the parameter or CNC program can be disabled.
State of protection key is changed as follows according to the enable / disable of
protection.

(5) Power ON swithch

This key has not function; it is merely placed for appearance

reasons.

(6) Power OFF switch

Exit CNC GUIDE.

In addition, the function of each key on the machine operator’s panel can be change
by editting the PMC ladder.

- 41 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.6 OPERATIONS USING THE OPERATOR'S PANEL

When you set the machine operator’s panel invalid at the machine composition
settings, the operator’s panel as follows is displayed instead of the the machine
operator’s panel.

Operator’s panel

Fig.4.6 (a) Operation screen

Operator’s panel

Fig.4.6 (b) Operation screen

- 42 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

The operation keys necessary for CNC GUIDE, such as the CNC mode switching and
path switching keys are provided on the operator's panel.

The following explains the functions of the individual operation keys.

Operator’s panel

Fig.4.6 (c) Operator's panel

Fig.4.6 (d) Operator's panel CNC GUIDE (0iD version)

<1> AUTO key

Switch the CNC to MEM mode.

<2> EDIT key

Switch the CNC to EDIT mode.

<3> MDI key

Switch the CNC to MDI mode.

- 43 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

<4> PATH SELECT key

Switch between paths.

This key is disabled, because maximum number of paths is 1
in Academic package.

<5> CYCLE START key

Execute a created program on the CNC.

<6> CYCLE STOP key

Stop a CNC program.

<7> SINGLE BLOCK key

Switch the single block operation to enable or disable.

When the single block is enabled, the automatic operation
stops after executing each block in the program.

<8> BLOCK SKIP key

Switch the block skip to enable or disable.

When the block skip is enabled, the block which specified the
slash (/) at the head is ignored.

<9> Power OFF key

Exit the CNC GUIDE.

<10> Power ON key

This key has not function; it is merely placed for appearance

reasons.

NOTE
MEM, EDIT, and MDI modes can only be selected. JOG, REF,
HANDLE, and other modes can not be selected.

- 44 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.7 OPERATIONS USING THE KEYBOARD OF THE PERSONAL

COMPUTER

In addition to the operations using MDI keys, soft keys, and the operator's panel
through mouse manipulation, which have been explained thus far, you can use the
keyboard of the personal computer to operate CNC GUIDE.

“A” to “Z”,”a” to “z”, “0” to “9”, and the following symbols can be entered.

Table.4.7 (a) Symbols can be entered

symbol remarks

"

&

'

- Hyphen.

<

>

_ Underscore.

- 45 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

~
"
{ These symbols can be entered on a screen other than
| UTILITY - MAINTENANCE DISPLAY in iHMI Mode.
}

Moreover, the operation of CNC GUIDE can be set to the PC key.

You set the PC key settings with a dedicated application which separates from CNC
GUIDE.

NOTE
1 In Machine composition that uses iHMI, the following operations
will be performed
like an actual CNC Software, even if another application other
than CNC GUIDE is selected.
- Numeric keypad 1 : An information center screen is
indicated.
- Numeric keypad 9 : A home screen is indicated.
2 In Machine composition that uses iHMI, you can enter
characters, when iHMI application has focus window.

- 46 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.7.1 Starting and Exiting

On the start menu, click[ FANUC CNC GUIDE(Model name) ] - [ Key Arrangemet ],
and the Key Arrangemet Tool starts.

Fig4.7.1 (a) Start Menu - Key Arrangement

When it has started, the window shown below appears.

To exit Key Arrangemet Tool, click the Exit button.

Fig4.7.1 (b) CNC operations Setting to PC key.

- 47 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.7.2 Setting

The key arrangement can be set according to the following procedures.

1. Select the classification of the operation from the category.

2. Select the function from the function list of the selected category.
3. Select the combination of Shift, Ctrl, Alt, and the key by the key setting.
Numeric keypad can’t be allocated.
4. Click Save button, and Save key arrange data.

Details of the category are as follows.

MDIKeyOperation
The MDI key is allocated to the PC key.

This setting is ignored in Machine composition that uses iHMI. If you want to
manipulate each function, put the following PC key.

Table 4.7.2 (a) MDIkey Operation (iHMI)

Function PC key

RESET ESC

HELP Numeric keypad -

COORDINATE Numeric keypad 1

PROGRAM Numeric keypad 2

OFFSET Numeric keypad 3

MESSAGE Numeric keypad 5

GRAPHIC Numeric keypad 6

CUSTOM Numeric keypad 7

SYSTEM Numeric keypad 4

TAB Tab

CALC Numeric keypad *

INSERT Insert

DELETE Del

CANCEL BackSpace

INPUT Enter

Alter Numeric keypad +

Up Up

Down Down

Right Right

Left Left

- 48 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

PageUp PageUp

PageDown PageDown

Mode
The change operation of the mode is allocated to the PC key.

This setting is not available in Machine composition that uses iHMI.

Path
The change operation of the path is allocated to the PC key.

This setting is not available in Machine composition that uses iHMI.

CNC ProgramExecution
The execution operation of the program is allocated to the PC key.

This setting is not available in Machine composition that uses iHMI.

Softkey
The soft key operation is allocated to the PC key.
VSoftkeys are disabled other than MAINTENANCE DISPLAY in iHMI Mode.

.If you want to manipulate each function, put the following PC key.

Table4.7.2 (b) Soft key manipulation (iHMI)

Function PC key

Softkey1 F1

Softkey2 F2

Softkey3 F3

Softkey4 F4

Softkey5 F5

Softkey6 F6

Softkey7 F7

Softkey8 F8

Softkey9 F9

Softkey10 F10

SoftkeySwitch F11

SoftkeyNext F12

VSoftkey1 Ctrl+F1

- 49 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

VSoftkey2 Ctrl+F2

VSoftkey3 Ctrl+F3

VSoftkey4 Ctrl+F4

VSoftkey5 Ctrl+F5

VSoftkey6 Ctrl+F6

VSoftkey7 Ctrl+F7

VSoftkey8 Ctrl+F8

VSoftkeySwitch Ctrl+F9

Window Operation

The execution operation of the Window Operation is allocated to the PC key.

Custom
The input of G signal is allocated to the PC key.

- 50 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.8 SCREEN DISPLAY

The following contents are displayed on the screen of CNC.
Machine composition that uses iHMI, the following contents are displayed on the
screen of CNC with pressing "MAINTENANCE DISPLAY".

SCREEN CONTENTS
POSITION SCREEN Travel distance from machine zero point
and travel distance in program execution
are displayed.
PROGRAM SCREEN Program can be both input and edited.
Moreover, the content confirmation and
the coordinate value in program
execution are displayed.
OFFSET / SETTING SCREEN The tool offset, the workpiece coordinate
system and macro variables can be set
and display language can be switched.
SYSTEM SCREEN Parameter, diagnose and system
(PARAMETER SCREEN) configuration are displayed.
(DIAGNOSE SCREEN)
MESSAGE SCREEN Content of alarms are displayed.
(ALARM SCREEN)
HELP SCREEN Detail information about alarms and how
to operate the CNC are displayed.
GRAPHIC SCREEN The tool path of a program during
machining can be drawn.

POSITION SCREEN
Current position of each axis is displayed.
The following positions are displayed : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece
coordinate system, relative coordinate system, machine coordinate system and
distance to go.
The content of each coordinates is as follows.
- Relative Coordinate
Travel distance from tool position is displayed. (Incremental value is displayed.)
This coordinate is used for measuring the program origin and the tool length.

- Workpiece Coordinate
Travel distance from program origin is displayed. (Absolute value is displayed.)
This coordinate is used for workpiece coordinate system setting (G50, G92) or
workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59).

- Machine Coordinate
Travel distance from reference point (machine zero point)

- 51 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

- Distance to Go
The distance remaining is displayed in the MEM or MDI mode.
The distance remaining by 1 block command is displayed.

Fig.4.8 (a) Position screen (CNC GUIDE (31i version))

PROGRAM SCREEN
Program is displayed. And program can be both input and edited.

Fig.4.8 (b) Program screen (CNC GUIDE (31i version))

- 52 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

Fig.4.8 (c) Program check screen (CNC GUIDE (31i version))

OFFSET / SETTING SCREEN

Tool offset or work offset are displayed and can be set.

Fig.4.8 (d) Offset / setting screen (CNC GUIDE (31i version))

- 53 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

PARAMETER SCREEN
The specification or enables / disables etc. of the function of CNC are set.

Fig.4.8 (e) Parameter screen (CNC GUIDE (31i version))

MESSAGE SCREEN
The alarm message and the operator message are displayed.

Fig.4.8 (f) Message screen (CNC GUIDE (31i version))

- 54 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

GRAPHIC SCREEN
The tool path of a program during machining can be drawn.

Fig.4.8 (g) Graphic screen (CNC GUIDE (31i version))

About iHMI
Machine composition that uses iHMI, the following contents are displayed and
executed on the screen of CNC.

Fig.4.8 (h) iHMI Screen

ICONS APPLICATIONS
PLANNING－ Allows you to use an application on a
PC OPERATION PC remotely connected by using
Windows Remote Desktop.
PLANNING－ Tool manager application is executed.
TOOL MANAGER Tool information is displayed.

- 55 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

ICONS APPLICATIONS
PLANNING－ Calendar application is executed.
CALENDAR
MACHINING－ New CNC display is displayed.
CNC OPERATION
IMPROVEMENT－ Data Logger application is executed.
DATA LOGGER
IMPROVEMENT－ CNC system maintenance screen is
MAINTENANCE MANAGER displayed.
IMPROVEMENT－ Observes information, such as the
SERVO Viewer position, speed, or torque of the feed
axis or spindle, and displays it in
waveform.
This Currently does not start.
UTILITY－ Manual (pdf files) is displayed.
MANUAL
UTILITY－ White board tool is executed.
MEMO
UTILITY－ You can browse web pages on the CNC
BROWSER screen.
UTILITY－ You can make settings related to the
SETTING whole application of iHMI.
UTILITY－ Convential CNC screen is displayed.
MAINTENANCE DISPLAY
UTILITY－ Explorer is executed.
FILE MANAGER

- 56 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.9 EDITING A PROGRAM

4.9.1 Creating Programs

When you create new program, register the program number at first.
For example, the procedure for registering program number O1234 is as follows.

(1) Select the EDIT mode.

(2) Press key.

O
(3) Press address key.
(4) Press 1, 2, 3, 4 (number) keys

(5) Press key.

(6) Press the EOB (end of block) key.

(7) Press key.

(8) “O1234;” is displayed in CNC GUIDE screen (“%” is inserted automatically)

4.9.2 Editing Programs

Insertion, modification, and deletion of words can be operated.

ALTERING A WORD
The procedure for altering a word is as follows.

(1) Select the EDIT mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Move the cursor to the word with the cursor key.
(4) Key in the word to be altered.

(5) Press key.

INSERTING A WORD
The procedure for inserting a word is as follows.

(1) Select the EDIT mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Move the cursor to the word with the cursor key.
(4) Key in the word to be altered.

(5) Press key.

- 57 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

DELETING A WORD
The procedure for deleting a word is as follows.

(1) Select the EDIT mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Move the cursor to the word with the cursor key.

(4) Press key.

4.9.3 Program Operation

Program is operated and program operation can be checked by graphic function.

PROGRAM OPERATION
You can start the program operation as the following procedure.

(1) Select the MEM mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Check that cursor position is the top of program at program screen.
(4) Press CYCLE START key.

If cursor position is not the top of program, the cursor can be jumped to the top of
program by following procedure.

(1) Press the soft key [(OPRT)].

(2) Press the soft key [REWIND].

PROGRAM OPERATION CHECK

You can check the program operation by the graphics function as follows.

(1) Select the MEM mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Check that cursor position is the top of program at program screen.

(4) Press key.

(5) Press the soft key [GRAPH].
(6) Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. (Unnecessary in CNC GUIDE (0i version))
(7) Press the soft key [START]. (Unnecessary in CNC GUIDE (0i version))
(8) Press CYCLE START key.

When you press SINGLE BLOCK key, each 1 block of a program operation can be
checked.

- 58 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

In this case, the program operation should begin pressing the CYCLE START key
every time it stops because the program operation stops whenever the 1 block is
operated.
Press SINGLE BLOCK key again, and operation is changed to continuous operation.

4.9.4 Program Select

Other programs that have already been registered in the memory can be selected by
the following two methods.
1. Selection from program list. (Improper in CNC GUIDE (0i version))
2. Selection by program call operation.

Selection from program list

The procedure for selecting other programs from the program list is as follows.

(1) Select the EDIT or MEM mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Press the soft key [FOLDER].
(4) Move the cursor to the program with the cursor key.
(5) Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
(6) Press the soft key [MAIN PROGRAM].

Selection by program call operation

The procedure for selecting other programs by program call operation is as follows.

(1) Select the EDIT or MEM mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Key in the program number to call.

(4) Press the cursor key .

(5) If program is registered, program is changed.
If program is not registered, the following warning blinks at the lower-right of
the CNC screen.

- 59 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.9.5 Program Delete

Program deleting method is as follows.

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
PMi-MODEL A
Program is selected from program list and delete.
The procedure is as follows.

(1) Select the EDIT mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Press the soft key [FOLDER].
(4) Move the cursor to the program with the cursor key.
(5) Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
(6) Press the soft key [DELETE].
(7) Following message is displayed.

(8) Press the soft key [EXEC].

0i-MODEL D
Program is selected by naming and delete.
The procedure is as follows.

(1) Select the EDIT mode.

(2) Press key.

(3) Press the soft key [DIR].

- 60 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

(4) Key in the program number to call.

For example O0001 is deleted, key in “O0001” or “O1”.

(5) Press key.

(6) Following message is displayed.

(7) Press the soft key [EXEC].

- 61 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.9.6 Sample Program

Sample programs are registered in CNC GUIDE for academic package.
An easy explanation of each program is as follows.

LATHE
The content of each program registered in “Lathe” is as follows.
PROGRAM NO. CONTENT TOOL PATH
O0001 Liner
interpolation

O0002 Threading

O0003 Chamfering
/ corner R

- 62 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

PROGRAM NO. CONTENT TOOL PATH

O0004 Stock Removal
in Turning

O0005 Stock Removal

in Facing

O0006 Pattern
Repeating

- 63 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

MACHINING
The content of each program registered in “Machining” is as follows.
PROGRAM NO. CONTENT TOOL PATH
O0001 Liner interpolation

O0002 Liner interpolation

And
Circular
interpolation

O0003 Tool Offset

- 64 -
 4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.9.7 Remedy when Program is not Correctly Executed

Alarm about the program operation occurs

If alarm about the program operations occurs, press reset key.
The cause of the alarm has the possibility that the next block of the execution block
end is wrong. Please confirm the content and the operating procedure of the program
again.

[Example of programming lathe system]

O0001;
N1 G50 X10.0 Z20.0;
N2 G00 W50.0; When N2 block executed, an alarm occurs.
N3 G91 U100.0; G91 is not used except for G-code system A
N4 M30; for lathe system.

NOTE
The next block is always pre-read in CNC. The alarm is detected,
when the next block is pre-read. The cursor is displayed in the block
pre-read immediately before, when the program is displayed in the
EDIT mode. Please confirm the block where the alarm is generated.

Mistake of the program input

(1) Press the cancel key when the mistake is noticed before the insert key is pressed.
(2) When the mistake is noticed after the insert key is pressed, move the cursor to
the mistake word, input a correct word, and press the alter key.
Press the delete key when the mistake word is deleted.

- 65 -
4.BASIC OPERATIONS

4.10 MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY

Language of the CNC display can be changed according to the following procedures.

Procedure
Display language is switched at the language screen.
The procedure is as follows.

(1) Press key

(2) Press the continuous menu key several times.
(3) Press the soft key [LANGUAGE] to display the language screen.

(4) Press page key or , then press cursor keys , to

move the cursor to a desired display language.
(5) Press operation soft key [APPLY]. The display language is switched to the
select language. The language specified on this screen continues to be used if
the power is turned off then back on.

Fig.4.10 (a) Language screen

- 66 -
 5.I / O CNC DATA

5 I / O CNC DATA
CNC GUIDE enables you to input / output CNC data in the same way as the actual
CNC.

The folder to input / output by CNC GUIDE is the following folder.

"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS0i-D\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS0i-F\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS0i-F Plus\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS0i-LF Plus\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B 32AX\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B 48AX\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B Plus\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B Plus 72AX\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-LB\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-LB Plus\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-A\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B Plus\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-LB\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-PB\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-WB\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS35i-B\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS35i-B 16AX\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B5\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B5 Plus\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS32i-B\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS32i-B Plus\MEMCARD"
"C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide PMi-A\MEMCARD"

You can make a copy of this file and use it with CNC GUIDE installed in another
personal computer.

NOTE
1 Set parameter No. 20 (output device number) to 4 when specifying
a memory card.
2 USB memory cannot be used. If you input / output by setting
parameter No. 20 to 17(USB), error occurs.

- 67 -
6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

6 MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

The machine composition setting data can be made based on the setting data (machine
data and description at the following) output from the machine.

When creating from the command line, use the setting data output from the
machine(machine data).
For more detail, please refer to the following chapter.-6.3.2 Creating from command
line.

Machine composition setting data of CNC GUIDE created from the machine data of
Series of CNC Software is as follows.

Table. 6 (a) Series of CNC Software and Created Model of CNC

Series of CNC Software Model of CNC
All series of Series 0i-MODEL F Series 0i-MODEL F ( TYPE1 )
All series of Series 0i-MODEL F Plus Series 0i-MODEL F Plus ( TYPE1 )
DCG3 Series 0i-LF Plus
G300, G303, G360, G301, G30L, G30A,
G302, G361, G313, G362, G310, G370,
Series 30i-MODEL B
G31L, G311, G31A, G312, G371, G372,
G315
G320, G323, G380, G32L, G321, G32A,
G353, G322, G35L, G381, G382, G350, Series 30i-MODEL B 32AX
G3A0, G351, G35A, G352, G3A1, G3A2
G330, G333, G390, G33U, G331, G33L,
G33A, G332, G3G3, G391, G392, G3H3, Series 30i-MODEL B 48AX
G33T, G39T, G3G1, G3H1
G3C1, G3C2, G3C3, G3C4, G3C5, G3D1,
Series 30i-LB
G3D2, G3D3, G3D4, G3D5
All series of Series 31i-MODEL B Series 31i-MODEL B
All series of Series 31i-MODEL B5 Series 31i-MODEL B5
All series of Series 32i-MODEL B Series 32i-MODEL B
All series of Series 30i-MODEL B Plus Series 30i-MODEL B Plus
All series of Series 31i-MODEL B Plus Series 31i-MODEL B Plus
All series of Series 31i-MODEL B5 Plus Series 31i-MODEL B5 Plus
All series of Series 32i-MODEL B Plus Series 32i-MODEL B Plus
G3C7, G3C8, G3CD, G3CE, G3CU, G3D7,
Series 30i-LB Plus
G3D8, G3DD, G3DE
G603, G613 Series 35i-MODEL B 16AX
G547 Series 32i-MODEL B Plus Line

If either number of controllable axes, paths, spindle axis or machine group bigger than
maximum of model of CNC GUIDE to be created, machine composition data is failed
to create.

- 68 -
 6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

The maximum number of paths / maximum total number of axes / maximum number
of axes in the path / maximum total number of spindles is as follows.

Table 6 (b) Models / maximum number of paths / maximum total number of axes /
maximum number of axes in the path / maximum total number of spindles
maximum Maximum total Maximum Maximum
Models number number number of axes total number
of paths of axes in the path of spindles
Series 0i-MODEL F 2 10 7 6
Series 0i-MODEL F Plus 2 10 7 6
Series 0i-LF Plus 2 7 5 -
Series 30i-MODEL B 4 20 16 6
Series 30i-MODEL B 32AX 10 32 24 8
Series 30i-MODEL B 48AX 10 48 24 16
Series 30i-LB 4 32 24 -
Series 31i-MODEL B 4 20 12 6
Series 31i-MODEL B5 4 20 12 6
Series 32i-MODEL B 2 10 8 6
Series 30i-MODEL B Plus 4 20 16 6
Series 31i-MODEL B Plus 4 20 12 6
Series 31i-MODEL B5 Plus 4 20 12 6
Series 32i-MODEL B Plus 2 10 8 6
Series 30i-LB Plus 4 32 24 -
Series 35i-MODEL B 16AX 4 16 16 4
Series 32i-MODEL B Plus Line 2 12 8 4

・ Operation condition
Equal to the operating environment of CNC GUIDE.

・ Use conditions
Use conditions of this tool are as follows:
・ The CNC GUIDE(Standard) must be installed.

NOTE
1 This tool cannnot be used by CNC GUIDE(Academic package).
2 When you create the machine composition of CNC GUIDE (Function
for transfer line), install CNC GUIDE (Function for transfer line) to
the same folder as other CNC GUIDE.
3 The machine composition setting data without iHMI will be created
even if the machine data includes iHMI function.
4 In Series 0i-MODEL F Plus, Series 0i-LF Plus, TYPE 1 machine
composition setting data is created.
5 Don't put PC into sleep or hibernate while using this tool.

- 69 -
6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

6.1 MACHINE DATA

The getting data from a machine that is the source of the machine composition setting
data is as follows.

No. Getting data from a machine

1 Option data
2 Parameter
3 Tool offset
4 Program
5 Custom macro variable
6 Workpiece origin offset value
7 Rotary table dynamic fixture offset
8 Tool geometry size data
9 3D interference check data
10 5-Axis machine composition selection function
11 Macro executor application data

- 70 -
 6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

6.2 STARTING OF TOOL

From the start menu, click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(TOOLs) ] - [Machine

Composition Creation Tool ].

The screen of this tool is displayed.

Fig.6.2 (a) Machine composition creating tool screen

Menu
There is the following menus.
Large item Middle item Small item
File Exit －
Edit Add machine data －
Delete machine data －
Preferences Language English
Japanese
Option Output －
Overwrite Confirmation
Overwrite
Skip
Help About －

［Exit］
The machine composition creating tool is ended.

- 71 -
6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

［Add machine data］

The folder selection dialog is displayed. Select the Machine Data folder you want to
add. For more detail, please refer to the following chapter. -6.3 Creating machine
composition setting data from folder.

［Delete machine data］

The machine data of [processing object] is checked is deleted from the list.

［English］
The display language of the machine composition creating tool is switched to
English.

［Japanese］
The display language of the machine composition creating tool is switched to
Japanese.

［Output］
Specify the output destination of the created machine composition setting data.
The selected output destination is displayed on the main screen.

［Confirmation］
When the machine composition setting data creation and the file of
this name exists at the specified output destination, the
superscription confirmation screen is displayed.

［Overwrite］
When the machine composition setting data creation and the file of
this name exists at the specified output destination, it overwrites without displaying
the confirmation screen.

［Skip］
It moves to creating the following machine composition setting data
without overwriting when the machine composition setting data creation
and the file of this name exists at the specified output destination.

［About］
Version information on the machine composition cerating tool is displayed.

- 72 -
 6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

List

Fig.6.2 (b) List screen

In the list displayed on the machine composition creating tool screen, there is
the following items.
Item Name Explanation
processing object It uses it to select the machine data that wants to be
(Check box) processed.
The function of the object is [Execute], and [Delete
machine data].
Folder Name The specified folder name is displayed. Click folder
name, the selected folder by exploer displayed.
Series The model name is displayed.
Message The state of the specified folder is displayed.
“Success”
It succeeded in create data.
”Success(some files not imported)”
It succeeded in create data, but some files not
imported.
”Failed”
It failed in create data.

Detailed information
When the message is”Failed” or ”Success(some files not imported)”, the link is clickd,
detaild information is displayed.
The log of execution result is output in
[C:\ProgramData\FANUC\CreateMachine\log].

Fig.6.2 (c) Detailed information screen

- 73 -
6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

Execution

Fig.6.2 (d)：Screen after adding machine data

When the [execution] button is pushed, the machine data sequentially checked is
processed from the top of the list.
When creation is completed, the machine composition setting data is output to the
output destination path.

If the saving method is set to "Overwrite confirmation" and a file with the same name
exists in the output folder, confirm overwrite saving.

Fig.6.2 (e) Superscription confirmation screen

［Yes］
The superscription preservation is done.

［No］
The superscription preservation is not done, and the created machine composition
data is annulled.
The creating processing of the machine composition setting data continues.

［Cancel］
The superscription preservation is not done, and the created machine composition

- 74 -
 6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

data is annulled.
The creating processing of the machine composition setting data is discontinued.

Discontinuance
The making processing of the machine composition setting data is discontinued. The
machine composition setting data under making is deleted.

Fig.6.2 (f) Discontinuance screen

［Yes］
The making processing of the machine composition setting data is discontinued.
The machine composition setting data under creating is deleted.

［No］
The creating processing of the machine composition setting data is continued.

About the created file

When creating is completed, the folder is created at the output destination, and the
following files are stored.
・ xxxx.fdat
・ xxxx.mdat
・ xxxx.pdat
・ xxxx.sdat
・ Macro executor application data
"xxxx" is a folder name where the machine data that is the origin is stored.
Please refer to "6.1 MACHINE DATA" CNC data for Macro executor application
data.

- 75 -
6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

6.3 Creating machine composition setting data from folder

Specify the machine composition folder.
For details on the machine composition folder, refer to Chapter.-6.3.1 Creating the
machine composition folder.
Select [Edit]-[Add Machine Data] from the menu to display the "Browse For Folder"
dialog.

Fig.6.3 (a) Folder setting screen

Click the OK button to add the folder to the list on the machine composition creation
tool screen.Click the Cancel button to suspend the addition of folders.

Fig.6.3 (b) Screen after adding a folder

- 76 -
 6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

6.3.1 Creating the machine composition folder

Store the machine data in a folder and create the machine composition folder.
CNC data
CNC data is data output from the machine, and has as follows:

No. CNC Data File Name Remarks

1 Tool offset TOOLOFST.TXT
2 Parameter CNC-PARA.TXT
3 Program ALL-FLDR.TXT
4 Custom macro variable MACRO.TXT
5 Workpiece origin offset value EXT_WKZ.TXT
Rotary table dynamic fixture
6 FIXTURE.TXT
offset
7 Tool geometry size data TOOLSIZE.TXT
8 3D interference check data 3D-INTER.TXT
5-Axis machine composition
9 MACHCON.TXT
selection function
n : PCODE
10 Macro executor application data PDnnxxxx.000 number
xxxx : Data size

Please refer to each CNC Series Common to Lathe System / Machining Center
System OPERATOR'S MANUAL "CNC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION" for the
method of outputting CNC data.

Option data
The creating procedure is as follows:
(1) Please do the following procedures to output CNCIDNUM.TXT from the
machine.
a) Press the <SYSTEM> key.
b) The USB memory or the memory card is connected.
c) Press the soft key [ALL I/O] - [ALL DATA].
d) Switch to the EDIT mode.
e) All data output screen is displayed, and a soft key is pressed in the
following order. [OPRT] - [OUTPUT] - [EXEC]

(2) Save as OPTIONDATA.TXT.

OPTIONDATA.TXT is a converted file of CNCIDNUM.TXT.
For more information, please contact our sales representative.

NOTE
Parameter (CNC-PARA.TXT) and option data (OPTIONDATA.TXT) are
required to create the machine composition setting data.

- 77 -
6.MACHINE COMPOSITION CREATION TOOL

6.3.2 Creating from command line

When creating machine composition setting data from a folder, it is also possible to
create it using the command line.
This command is used from the batch or the script, and there are the following
advantages:
Ex) The same creation processing can be executed repeatedly and automatically.
Ex) Multiple machine composition setting data can be created easily.

It does according to the following procedures.

(1) The command prompt is displayed.

(2) The following command is executed on the displayed command prompt screen.

CreateMachine.exe /C /I Machine data Folder [/O OutputFolder] [/F | /S]

(Arguments in [] can be omitted. | Select one)

About the argument

/C
Specify how to run this tool. This will act as a command line.

/I Machine data folder

Specify the folder to store the machine data to be processed.
Please enclose the specified character string of Path with double quotation
mark.

/O Output folder
Specify the folder to output the created machine composition setting data.
It stores it in [C:\ProgramData\FANUC\CreateMachine\MachineSetting]
when omitting it.
Please enclose the specified character string of Path with double quotation
mark (“”).

/F | /S
Specify the operation when the machine composition setting data of the same
name exists in the output folder. /F will be overwritten. Specify /S or exit
without overwriting if omitted.
Please specify either of /F or /S. If both are specified, it becomes an error.

/?
Help (use and format) is displayed.

- 78 -
 7.SETTINGS

7 SETTINGS
This chapter explains how to make settings to make CNC GUIDE easier to use and
use it according to your environment.
CNC GUIDE allows you to set the following items:

- Display mode
- MDI Key Type
- CNC Display Size
- Display Language
- Full Screen mode
- Simple operator’s panel

NOTE
[ Full Screen Mode ] is a valid configuration item only in [ Window Mode ].
[ Simple operator’s panel ] is a valid configuration item only in [ Window
Mode ].
If there is a check on the [Use Additional Functin] in the MachinSetting you
will not be able to set Simple operator’s panel.

Setting method
CNC GUIDE can be set up by means of the following two methods.
・Setting by means of menu or pop-up menu which appears by right-click, while CNC
GUIDE is executing. (Setting by menu of CNC GUIDE)
・Setting by means of CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool.

Once CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool is used, the menu can not be used for
the setting after that. Please use CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool.

- 79 -
7.SETTINGS

7.1 Setting the Display Mode

There are the following two display modes in CNC GUIDE.

A) Picture mode – Vertical

In the picture mode – Vertical, the display part and the MDI unit are displayed
in same screen.

Fig.7.1 (a) Picture mode – Vertical display

B) Picture mode – Horizontal

In the picture mode – Horizontal, the display part and the MDI unit are
displayed in same screen.

Fig.7.1 (b) Picture mode – Horizontal display

- 80 -
 7.SETTINGS

C) Window mode
In the window mode, the display part and the MDI unit are displayed in separate
windows.

Fig.7.1 (c) Window mode display

When display mode is Window mode and display size is 19inch at 0i-F Plus, FS30i-B,
FS30i-B 32AX, FS30i-B 48AX, FS30i-B Plus, FS30i-B Plus 72AX, FS31i-B,
FS31i-B Plus, FS31i-B5, FS31i-B5 Plus, FS32i-B, FS32i-B Plus, 0i-LF Plus,
FS30i-LB, FS30i-LB Plus customize screen region is displayed above CNC screen
region.

D) iHMI mode

- 81 -
7.SETTINGS

Both iHMI screen and CNC GUIDE are displayed in Machine composition that
uses iHMI.

Fig.7.1 (d) iHMI mode

Procedure for switching display modes.

Select the mode you want to switch from the menu
When "Picture mode – Vertical" or "Picture mode – Horizontal" is selected,
Immediately, the display mode changes.
When "Window mode" is selected, it switches from the next startup.

Fig.7.1 (e) Display mode menu(Picture mode)

Fig.7.1 (f) Display mode menu(Window mode)

- 82 -
 7.SETTINGS

Fig.7.1 (g) Display mode menu(iHMI mode)

- 83 -
7.SETTINGS

7.2 MDI KEY SETTINGS

This section explains how to make various MDI key settings.

You can select MDI key types below.

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-PB
31i-WB
31i-MODEL B5
32i-MODEL B
PMi-MODEL A
- Standard MDI unit (QWERTY keys)
- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys) For Lathe
- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys) For Machining center

0i-MODEL D
- Small MDI unit (ONG keys) For Lathe
- Small MDI unit (ONG keys) For Machining center
- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys) For Lathe
- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys) For Machining center

0i-MODEL F
- Standard MDI unit (QWERTY keys)
(This unit can be selected, when CNC display size is 10.4 inch or 15 inch.)
- Small MDI unit (ONG keys) For Lathe
(This unit can be selected, when CNC display size is only 8.4 inch.)
- Small MDI unit (ONG keys) For Machining center
(This unit can be selected, when CNC display size is only 8.4 inch.)
- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys) For Lathe
(This unit can be selected, when CNC display size is 10.4 inch or 15 inch.)
- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys) For Machining center
(This unit can be selected, when CNC display size is 10.4 inch or 15 inch.)

0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
- Standard MDI unit (QWERTY keys)
(This unit can be selected, when display mode is Window mode.)
- ONG keys - Vertical
- ONG keys - Horizontal

- 84 -
 7.SETTINGS

35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
- Standard MDI unit (QWERTY keys)
- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys) For Machining center

30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B Plus

- Standard MDI unit ONG Keys TYPE M - Vertical

- Standard MDI unit ONG Keys TYPE M - Horizontal
- Standard MDI unit ONG Keys TYPE T - Vertical
- Standard MDI unit ONG Keys TYPE T – Horizontal
- Standard MDI unit (QWERTY keys)

NOTE
MDI key is not displayed in Machine composition that uses iHMI.
Please use PC key or iHMI screen keyboard for key input.
Please refer to “16.2 Setting File” for more information about
iHMI Screen keyboard.

- 85 -
7.SETTINGS

7.2.1 Changing the MDI Key Type

0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
31i-MODEL B5
32i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
PMi-MODEL A
Right-click the mouse and a popup menu appears. Position the cursor on [MDI key],
and the available MDI key types appear. Click the MDI key type you want to use.
The MDI key display will be changed immediately.

Fig.7.2.1. (a) Popup menu: " MDI Key Type"

0i-MODEL D

Right-click the mouse, and a popup menu appears. Position the cursor on [MDI key
(M)], and the MDI key types appear with reference.

Fig.7.2 (b) Popup menu: "MDI Key Type"

- 86 -
 7.SETTINGS

NOTE
The kind of the MDI key is decided by the selection of display
size and machining center system / lathe system , and is not
changed .

0i-MODEL F
Right-click the mouse, and a popup menu appears. Position the cursor on [MDI key],
and the MDI key types appear with reference.

Fig.7.2 (c) Popup menu: "MDI Key Type"

NOTE
If the lathe system has been selected,the second choice will
be ” MDI Key ( ONG Type-T ) ”.
If CNC display size is 8.4 inch, MDI key type is ”small MDI key”.
the QWERTY can not be selected.

- 87 -
7.SETTINGS

0i-MODEL F Plus
Right-click the mouse, and a popup menu appears. Position the cursor on [MDI key],
and the MDI key types appear with reference.

Fig.7.2 (d) Popup menu: "MDI Key Type"

30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B Plus
Right-click the mouse and a popup menu appears.
Position the cursor on [MDI key], and the MDI key types appear with reference.

Fig.7.2 (e) Popup menu: " MDI Key Type "

NOTE
MDI key is not displayed in Machine composition that uses
iHMI.Please use PC key or iHMI screen keyboard for key input.
Please refer to “16.2 Setting File” for more information about
iHMI Screen keyboard.

- 88 -
 7.SETTINGS

7.3 CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE CNC DISPLAY

This section explains how to change the size of the CNC display.
You can select between the following CNC display sizes:

30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B5
32i-MODEL B
- 8.4 inch
- 10.4 inch
- 15 inch
- 19 inch

NOTE
The following settings are necessary to use 19 inch.
- CNC Screen Display for 19”LCD (R624)
- Parameter P19 (No.13114#1)=1

0i-MODEL F
31i-MODEL A
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
35i-MODEL B
PMi-MODEL A
- 8.4 inch
- 10.4 inch
- 15 inch

- 89 -
7.SETTINGS

0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B Plus
- 10.4 inch
- 15 inch
- 19 inch

NOTE
The following settings are necessary to use 19 inch.
- CNC Screen Display for 19”LCD (R624)
- Parameter P19 (No.13114#1)=1

0i-MODEL D
- 8.4 inch
- 10.4 inch

Right-click the mouse, and a popup menu appears. Position the cursor on [CNC
Display Size (S)], and the available CNC display sizes appear. Click the desired size.
Then, a message appears. Click OK.
The next time the CNC GUIDE starts, the selected CNC display size will take effect.

Fig7.3 (a) Popup menu: "Change CNC Display Size"

(CNC GUIDE (30i version, 31i version))

- 90 -
 7.SETTINGS

Fig.7.3 (b) Popup menu: "Change CNC Display Size"

(CNC GUIDE (0iD version))

Fig. 7.3 (c) Message that appears after you change the setting

NOTE
For the CNC display size change to take effect, you must restart
CNC GUIDE.
Please refer to “16.2 Setting File” for iHMI display size.

- 91 -
7.SETTINGS

7.3.1 CNC Display Size and Personal Computer Display Resolution

As the CNC Display Size becomes larger, CNC GUIDE size also becomes larger.
Thus, depending on the resolution of the display, CNC GUIDE may not fit in the
display in its entirety.
We recommend that you set the display resolution according to the CNC display size,
as given in the table below.

Table. 7.3.1 (a) Correspondence between CNC display size and

display resolution
CNC display size Optimum display size
8.4 inch 1280*1024 ( SXGA )
15 inch 1920*1080 ( FULL HD )
19 inch

If CNC GUIDE does not fit in the screen in its entirety due to low display resolution,
scroll bars are displayed; you can use the scroll bars while using CNC GUIDE.

- 92 -
 7.SETTINGS

7.4 SWITCHING THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE

CNC GUIDE allows you to switch the display language between English and
Japanese.
This section explains how to switch between display languages.

Right-click the mouse, and a popup menu appears. Position the cursor on [Language
(L)], and the available language names appear. Click the item you want to use.
The display language will be changed immediately.

Fig.7.4 (a) Popup menu: "Switch Language"

NOTE
This display language setting is applied to CNC GUIDE.
The display language of the CNC will not be changed.

- 93 -
7.SETTINGS

7.5 FULL-SCREEN DISPLAY MODE

CNC GUIDE can be displayed in the personal computer display on full screens.
Full-screen can be displayed only at the window mode.

(1) CNC GUIDE is started in the window mode.

(2) Click "View" of the menu.
(3) Select " Full Screen" from the menu.

Fig.7.5 (a) Full screen menu

(4) The screen changes into full screen display when "Full Screen" is selected.

Fig.7.5 (b) Full screen display

Note
Full Screen display mode is not supported
at CNC GUIDE in Machine composition that uses iHMI.

- 94 -
 7.SETTINGS

(5) Mouse is right-clicks when returning to the normal screen display.

Fig.7.5 (c) Normal screen menu

(6) Click "Nomal Screen" from the menu.

- 95 -
7.SETTINGS

7.5.1 Full Screen Display Mode at 19 Inch

・Display
CNC Screen and MDI Keyboard and operators' panel are displayed on desktop at
FS0i-F Plus / FS30i-B / FS30i-B 32AX / FS30i-B 48AX / FS30i-B Plus / FS30i-B
Plus 72AX / FS31i-B / FS31i-B Plus / FS31i-B5 / FS31i-B5 Plus / FS32i-B / FS32i-B
Plus / FS0i-LF Plus / FS30i-LB / FS30i-LB Plus 19inch display mode.

Fig.7.5 (d) : Full screen display at FS30i-B / FS31i-B / FS31i-B5 / FS32i-B

19inch

・Menu
To switch Full Screen mode at FS0i-F Plus / FS30i-B / FS30i-B 32AX / FS30i-B
48AX / FS30i-B Plus / FS30i-B Plus 72AX / FS31i-B / FS31i-B Plus / FS31i-B5 /
FS31i-B5 Plus / FS32i-B / FS32i-B Plus / FS0i-LF Plus / FS30i-LB / FS30i-LB Plus
window mode, select menu [View] - [Window Size] - [Full Screen Display]. And
restart CNC GUIDE. After selected menu [Full Screen Display], message prompting
to restart CNC GUIDE is shown.

Fig.7.5 (e) : Selection Full Screen

- 96 -
 7.SETTINGS

Fig.7.5 (f) : Message prompting to restart CNC GUIDE

To switch from Full screen mode to normal mode, select menu [Window Size] -
[normal display]. And restart CNC GUIDE. After selected menu [normal display],
message prompting to restart CNC GUIDE is shown.

Fig.7.5 (g) : Selection Normal Screen

Fig.7.5 (h) : Message prompting to restart CNC GUIDE

- 97 -
7.SETTINGS

7.6 SIMPLE OPERATOR’S PANEL

CNC GUIDE you can switch between Display and Non-Display.of the Simple
operator’s panel
In window mode you can switch the Simple operator’s panel

(1) CNC GUIDE is started in the window mode.

(2) Click "View" of the menu.
(3) Select " Simple operator’s panel " from the menu.
(4) Click "NoDisp" of the menu.
"NoDisp" check : It displays the Simple operator’s panel
"NoDisp" No check : It dos not displays the Simple operator’s panel
Display is immediately.

Fig.7.6 (a) : Selection Simple operator’s panel

NOTE
If there is a check on the [Use Additional Functin] in the MachinSetting
you will not be able to set Simple operator’s panel.

- 98 -
 7.SETTINGS

Fig.7.6 (b) : Simple operator’s panel : Select display

Fig.7.6 (c) : Simple operator’s panel : Select NON-display

- 99 -
7.SETTINGS

7.7 CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL

So far the following items of CNC GUIDE had been set for each model.
However, by using CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool, you can make individual
setting for each machine composition even in the same model.

Setting items
・ Display language
・ CNC display size
・ Display mode
・ Full screen mode
・ MDI panel (Display, Non-display)
・ MDI key type
・ Simple operator’s panel
・ Machine operator’s panel
・ Selection of machine composition
・ Standard machine composition
・ Memory card folder
・ Protect key signal

The following items of CNC GUIDE can be set for all models.

Setting items
・ Series/Version Mode

7.7.1 Starting and Exiting

In Start menu, click [FANUC CNC GUIDE(TOOLs) ] – [Setting Management Tool],

then CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool starts.
Even if CNC GUIDE isn’t executing, CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool is
available.

- 100 -
 7.SETTINGS

Fig.7.7.1 (a) Start menu [Setting Management Tool]

When CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool has started, the following screen is
displayed.

Setting properties
Model / machine
composition tree

Fig.7.7.2 (b) CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool

・Model / machine composition tree

The available model and the created machine composition setting are displayed in the
form of tree.

- 101 -
7.SETTINGS

・Setting properties
The setting of model or machine composition selected in model/machine composition
tree is displayed, and the setting can be changed.

To exit, click the Close(C) button or [File(F)] – [Exit(X)] in the menu.

7.7.2 Common Setting Screen

Common setting screen is below.

Fig.7.7.2 Common Setting Screen

Change setting
In setting properties, the following items can be set.

Selectable settings in each items are as follows.

・Series/Version Mode
Items Remarks
Same as CNC Initial setting
CNC Guide Original (OLD)

NOTE
In spite of Series/Version Mode setting, the same series/version
as CNC is displayed at the following series:
FS30i-B Plus/ FS30i-B Plus 72AX/ FS31i-B Plus/ FS31i-B5 Plus/
FS32i-B Plus/ FS35i-B 16AX

- 102 -
 7.SETTINGS

Save setting
Changed settings are saved.
To save the settings, click the Save(S) button of setting properties or [File(F)] –
[Save(S)] in the menu.

7.7.3 Individual Setting Screen

Individual setting screen is below.

Click series name, then the following screen is displayed.

Fig.7.7 3 Individual Setting Screen

Change setting

In setting properties, the following items can be set.

Comment
The comment concerning the model or the machine composition selected in model /
machine composition tree can be input.

Composition at start

- 103 -
7.SETTINGS

You can select the machine composition that is used by CNC GUIDE.
You can also select it at start of CNC GUIDE.
“Composition at start” is available when the model has been selected.

Use setting
When using common setting concerning plural machine composition setting, select
the [use series setting].
For example, when you select the [use series setting] of each machine composition
setting, by setting for the model including the machine composition setting, the setting
is applied to all machine composition settings.

When you create the individual setting to the selected machine composition, select the
[Use following setting].

Setting items
The following items can be set.
・Language
・CNC Display Size
・Display Mode
・Full Screen Mode
・MDI Panel (No Disp, Show）
・MDI Key
・Simple operator’s panel
・Machine Operator’s Panel
・Memory card folder
・Protect key signal

Selectable settings in each items are as follows.

・Language
Items Remarks
English
Japanese

When the language of OS is Japanese, the initial language is Japanese. When the
language of OS is other than Japanese, the initial language is English.

NOTE
This display language setting is applied to each menu and
message in CNC GUIDE only.
The language in CNC screen is not changed by the above setting.

- 104 -
 7.SETTINGS

・CNC Display Size

 CNC GUIDE for 0iD
Items Remarks
8.4 inch
10.4 inch Initial setting

 CNC GUIDE for 30iB, 30iB 32AX, 30iB 48AX, 31iB, 31iB5, 32iB,
35iB 16AX
Items Remarks
8.4 inch
10.4 inch Initial setting
15 inch
19 inch

 CNC GUIDE for 0iF Plus, 30iB Plus, 30iB Plus 72AX, 31iB Plus, 31iB5
Plus, 32iB Plus, 0iLF Plus, 30iLB, 30iLB Plus
Items Remarks
10.4 inch Initial setting
15 inch
19 inch

 CNC GUIDE for 0iF, 031iA, 31iLB, 31iPB, 31iWB, 35iB, PMiA
Items Remarks
8.4 inch
10.4 inch Initial setting
15 inch

NOTE
[ CNC Display Size ] is ignored in Machine composition that uses
iHMI. It depends on iHMI setting file.

・Display Mode
Items Remarks
Window Mode
Picture Mode – Vertical Initial setting(Except for iHMI
Series)
Picture Mode – Horizontal

- 105 -
7.SETTINGS

・Full Screen Mode

Items Remarks
Nomal Screen Initial setting
Full Screen

NOTE
[ Full Screen Mode ] is a valid configuration item only in [ Window
Mode ].
[ Full Screen Mode ] is ignored in Machine composition that uses
iHMI..

・MDI Panel ( No Disp, Show)

Items Remarks
No Disp Initial setting
Show

NOTE
[ MDI Panel ] is a valid configuration item only in [ Window
Mode ].
[ MDI Panel ( No Disp, Show) ] is ignored in Machine composition
that uses iHMI..

・Simple operator’s panel ( No Disp, Show )

Items Remarks
No Disp Initial setting
Show

NOTE
[ Simple operator’s panel ] is a valid configuration item only in
[ Window Mode ].

- 106 -
 7.SETTINGS

・Machine Operator’s Panel

Items Remarks
No Disp Initial setting
Main Panel＋Sub Panel A
Main Panel＋Sub Panel D
Main Panel

・MDI Key
 CNC GUIDE for 0iF
Items Remarks
QWERTY Key Initial setting
ONG Key
At CNC GUIDE for 0iF, In the case of been selected [8.4 inch] at [CNC
Display size], [MDI Key] will be changed to [ONG Key] automatically and
fixed. In the case of been selected [10.4 inch] or [15 inch] at [CNC Display
size], [MDI Key] will be available set.

 CNC GUIDE for 0iF Plus, 0iLF Plus

Items Remarks
ONG keys - Vertical Initial setting
ONG keys - Horizontal
QWERTY Key
In case of CNC GUIDE for 0iF Plus, if [Picture mode - Vertical] was selected
in [Display mode], [MDI Key] is fixed to [ONG Key - Vertical]
automatically.
If [Picture mode - Horizontal] was selected in [Display mode], [MDI Key] is
fixed to [ONG Key - Horizontal] automatically.
If [Window mode] was selected in [Display mode], [MDI Key] can be set.

 CNC GUIDE for 30iB Plus, 30iB Plus 72AX, 31iB Plus, 31iB5 Plus,
32iB Plus
Items Remarks
QWERTY Key Initial setting
ONG keys TYPE M – Vertical
ONG keys TYPE M – Horizontal
ONG keys TYPE T – Vertical
ONG keys TYPE T – Horizontal

 CNC GUIDE for 30iB, 30iB 32AX, 30iB 48AX, 31iA, 31iB, 31iPB,
31iWB, 31iB5, 32iB, PMiA
Items Remarks
QWERTY Key Initial setting
ONG M Key
ONG T Key

- 107 -
7.SETTINGS

 CNC GUIDE for 35iB, 35iB 16AX, 30iLB, 30iLB Plus, 31iLB
Items Remarks
QWERTY Key Initial setting
ONG M Key

NOTE
The MDI key can not be selected in CNC GUIDE ( 0iD ). In this
case, The MDI key is determined by CNC display size and sysem
( Machining center / Lathe ).
[ MDI Key ] is ignored in Machine composition that uses iHMI..

・Memory card folder

The input / output folder for CNC GUIDE can be changed.
When the folder is not specified, the memory card folder is used.
Please refer to Chapter 5 [ I / O CNC Data ] for the memory card folder.

NOTE
Refer to it as a subprogram preservation folder in a machining
time prediction.

・Protect key signal (Disable, Enable )

Items Remarks
Disable Initial setting
Enable

Save setting
Changed settings are saved.
To save the settings, click the Save(S) button of setting properties or [File(F)] –
[Save(S)] in the menu.

- 108 -
 7.SETTINGS

7.7.4 Menu
The menu is as follows.

Major item Second item Third item

File(F) Save(S) Ctrl+S －
Exit(X) Alt+F4 －
Setting(E) Language(L) English(E)
Japanese(J)

[Save(S)]
The Save(S) button of setting screen is the same operation as the license
authentication screen.

[Exit(X)]
The [Exit(X)] is the same operation as the Close(C) button.

[Language(L)]
The display language of CNC GUIDE Setting Management Tool can be switched.
The available language is as follows.
・English
・Japanese

When the language of OS is Japanese, the initial language is Japanese. When the
language of OS is other than Japanese, the initial language is English.

7.7.5 Deletion of Setting

The settings of the screen size and the MDI key kind, etc. cannot be done on the
operation screen of the CNC GUIDE after that when this tool is started.
( The menu for the setting is not displayed.)
To enable the setting from the operation screen, the following configuration files are
deleted.
Please set each model after deleting the above-mentioned configuration file.

- 109 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8 CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

You can make settings for the CNC system to be simulated.
You can make the following settings:

- Option settings
- Machine composition settings

- 110 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.1 OPTION SETTING

You can set the options for CNC GUIDE when it is active.
You set the options with a dedicated application separate from CNC GUIDE.

8.1.1 Starting and Exiting

On the start menu, click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE (Model name) ] - [ Option
Setting ] , and the Option Settings program starts.

Fig8.1.1 (a) Start menu: "Option Setting"

When it has started, the window shown below appears.

To exit, click the Cancel button.

NOTE
Option settings can be made to CNC GUIDE when it is active;
CNC GUIDE must have been previously started.
Moreover, please execute the "option setting" that exists in the
same folder as "CNC GUIDE" who executed it.

- 111 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX

Fig8.1.1 (b) Option Setting Screen

0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB

- 112 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fig8.1.1 (c) Option Setting Screen

0i-MODEL D

Fig8.1.1 (d) Option Setting Screen

NOTE
1 CNC GUIDE ( 0iD version ) can select package 1 / 2. When
package 1 or 2 is selected, the check box of the option included
in the package is checked.
2 A function that is not displayed on the option setting screen
cannot be used by CNC GUIDE even if it is included in the
package 1 or 2. Even if the setting to make the function valid by
parameters of basic funtions ( parameter No.8130 and up ), it is
not valid.

- 113 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus

Fig8.1.1 (e) Option Setting Screen

NOTE
CNC GUIDE ( 0iF version ), CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus version ) can
select type.

PMi-MODEL A

Fig8.1.1 (f) Option Setting Screen

- 114 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.1.2 Procedure
There are two following methods to set options.

・Setting options individually

・Setting multiple options at a time

Setting options individually

Use the following procedure:

1. Input "the option name or draw number" which you want to use.
2. Click the Search button.
The option to retrieve is selected.

Input "the option name or draw number"

Click the Search button.

Fig8.1.2 (a) Retrieval of option

3. Check the option which you want to use:

Click the check box located to the left of an option name or double-click the
option name, and a check mark is placed in the check box.

Click
DoubleClick CheckMark

Fig8.1.2 (b) Setting options

- 115 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

4. Click the OK button to reflect the setting change in CNC GUIDE.

5. To cancel all changes you have made, click the Cancel button.

The setting change is not reflected in CNC GUIDE.

The setting change is reflected in CNC GUIDE.

Fig8.1.2 (c) OK button and Cancel button of Option Setting Screen

NOTE
For the option setting change to take effect, you must restart
CNC GUIDE.

0i-MODEL D

NOTE
The check on the option which is included in the selected
package can not be removed.

- 116 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Setting multiple options at a time

30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B PLus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
Use two or more options can be easily set by reading the file that sets effective /
invalidity of the option.

1. Click the File Read button on Option Setting Screen.

Fig8.1.2 (d) File Read button

2. The following file selection dialog will be displayed. Choose the file to read and
click the Open button.

Fig8.1.2 (e) Read file selection dialog

- 117 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

3. The following confirmation message will be displayed, and click the OK button
to proceed. To cancel, click the Cancel button instead.

Fig8.1.2 (f) Reading confirmation message

4. Because the completion message is displayed when reading is completed, OK is

clicked.

Fig8.1.2 (g) Completion message

NOTE
1. When PMC simulation is invalid, the option of PMC simulation
cannot be changed.
2. G code skip cannot be changed.

5. Click the OK button to reflect the setting change in CNC GUIDE.

6. To cancel all changes you have made, click the Cancel button.

The setting change is not reflected in CNC GUIDE.

The setting change is reflected in CNC GUIDE.

Fig8.1.2 (h) Setting Screen

- 118 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

NOTE
The draw number that doesn't correspond to the “Option
Setting” is not updated.

Example) When you change the option of J711, J712, and J713.
J712 doesn't correspond to the “Option Setting”.
In this case, only the option of J711,J713 is updated.

J712 is missing.

Only J711 and J713 change the check box.

File format

30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
Please prepare the file that sets effective / invalidity of the option, when you
collectively set two or more options.
File format that can be read with is as follows.

- 119 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

File format:

Table8.1.2 (a) File format that can be read

Items Remarks
File type ・Text file
・Excel file *1 *2
File name Unconstrained
Character-code UTF-8
Maximum number of 500 rows ( The number of rows except for the first
rows row and the last row. )
Maximum number of 20 items
items
Maximum file size 1MB
*1：Excel97-2003 ( xls ) or Excel ( xlsx )
*2：Read the first sheet

Contents:
Please be sure to fill the following two items.
Other items may also be entered.

Table8.1.2 (b) Rwquired items

Item name Remarks
Addition OR Deletion A or D
A: The option is effective.
D: The option is invalid.
Specification Number Draw number of option
Possible any of the following description method.
1) A02B-0323-S660
2) S660
※There is no distinction between uppercase and lowercase letters
※Alphanumeric characters can be used.
Please fill in item name on the first row.
Separate the items and items with a comma ( ”,” )
( Text files only)
Please write “#” of a half-size character in the row of the last.
( The first column in the case of Excel )
Set options for CNC and PMC Please write to the same file.

Addition OR Deletion,Specification Name,Specification Number

D, CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19, A02B-0323-R624
A, 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION, A02B-0323-S673
a, 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION, S667
＃

Fig8.1.2 (i) Description of the text file example

- 120 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fig8.1.2 (j) Description of the Excel file example

The file of the sample is included in the following folders on DVD.

(DVD):\Samples\ Option Setting File

Error When File is Read

30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
The following error when reading the file.

(1) There are no settings to update.

(2) Unknown file format found.
(3) Invalid data was detected.
(4) There is no free space on the disk.
(5) Read of file failed. Install Excel.
(6) Read of file failed. The file may be used by another application.
(7) Read of file failed. Check the reading permission.
(8) Read of Excel file failed.
Check the reading permission. Or, read the file after which converted to
CSV format.
(9) Read of file failed. Check the log.
(10) An unexpected error has occurred.

- 121 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Details are described in the following.

(1) There are no settings to update.

This error occurs when there is no option update.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (k) Message if there are no settings to update

Couse:
 There is no draw number to update.
 There is effective / invalidly no change about the option.

Counter-measure:
Check the contents of the file. Example to check are as follows.

Example 1) If There is no draw number to update.

Addition OR Deletion,Specification Name,Specification Number
D, CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19, A000-000-ZZZZ
A, 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION, A000-999-J999
a, 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION, S999
＃

Please refer to [A List of Functions of CNC GUIDE] for the detail of available
draw number.

Example 2) Addition OR Deletion item and the state of the check box of a
option setting screen are the same case.
Addition OR Deletion,Specification Name,Specification Number
D, 2ND AUXLIARY FUNCTION, A02B-0303-J920
A, 2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET, A02B-0303-J980
a, 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION, S667
＃

Please confirm the Addition OR Deletion item and the state of the check
box of a option setting screen.

- 122 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Addition OR Deletion item are described in the file

D: Uncheck the check box.
A: Check the check box.

Fig8.1.2 (l) State of the check box of the option setting screen

- 123 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

(2) Unknown file format found

This error occurs if the file format is incorrect.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (m) Message if there are no settings to update

Couse:
 Error in file format.
Refer to [File format] for the detail of file format.

Counter-measure:
Check the file format and then modify the file.
Example of modification is as follows.

Example 1) Text files that not divide the items by comas.

Addition OR Deletion Specification Name Specification Number
D CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19 A02B-0323-R624
A 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION A02B-0323-S673
a 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667
＃

please divide an item in comma ( , ) .

- 124 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Example 2) If there is no item name or terminator ( # ) .

D, CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19, A02B-0323-R624

A, 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION, A02B-0323-S673
a, 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION, S667

Write item name on the first line.

Please write the terminator ( # ) at the end of the line.

Example 3) There is no Addition OR Deletion item or Specification Number

item.
Specification Name
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION
＃

“Addition OR Deletion” and ”Specification Number” are required item.

Example 4) The row exceeds 500.

Addition OR Deletion,Specification Name,Specification Number
D, CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19, A02B-0323-R624
A, 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION, A02B-0323-S673
a, 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION, S667
…
… ( The row exceeds 500 )
…
＃
Please correct to become 500 rows except the first line and the final line.

Example 5) The items exceeds 20.

Addition OR Deletion,Specification Name,Specification Number,AA,BB,CC,…,II
D, CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19, A02B-0323-R624,XX,XX,XX,…,XX
A, 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION, A02B-0323-S673,XX,XX,XX,…,XX
a, 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION, S667,XX,XX,XX,…,XX
＃

An unnecessary item is deleted, and made 20 items or less.

NOTE
Thestate of the check box dose not change if there is even one error
in the file.

- 125 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

(3) Invalid data was detected

This error occurs when the invalid data is found in data.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (n) Message when invalid data is found in data

Couse:
 There are iliegal characters in Addition OR Deletion item or Specification Name
item.
 Addition OR Deletion item or Specification Name item is blank.

Counter-measure:
 Check the Addition OR Deletion items and Specification Name items, please
modify the file.
Example of modification is as follows.

Example 1) If there is an illegal character in Addition OR Deletion item.

Addition OR Deletion,Specification Name,Specification Number
F, CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19, A02B-0323-R624
A, 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION, A02B-0323-S673
a, 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION, S667
＃

F of the line 2 is corrected to A or D.

Example 2) When the Addition OR Deletion item is a blank.

Addition OR Deletion,Specification Name,Specification Number
, CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19, A02B-0323-R624
, 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION, A02B-0323-S673
a, 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION, S667
＃

To modify A or D Addition OR Deletion item of line 2 and line 3.

NOTE
Thestate of the check box dose not change if there is even one error
in the file.

- 126 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

(4) There is no free space on the disk.

This error occurs when there is no free space on the disk.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (o) Message when there is no free space on the disk.

Couse:
 There is no free space on the disk.

Counter-measure:
 Free up 10 Mbytes or more disk space.

(5) Read of file failed. Install Excel.

This error occurs when Excel is not installed.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (p) Message when Excel is not installed.

Couse:
 Excel is not installed.

Counter-measure:
 Install Excel.
 Read the file after which converted to CSV format.

- 127 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

(6) Read of file failed. The file may be used by another application.
This error occurs when the file can not be read.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (q) Message when read of file failed.

Couse:
 The file may be used by another application.

Counter-measure:
 Confirm that the file is not used by another Application.

(7) Read of file failed. Check the reading permission.

This error occurs when the file can not be read.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (r) Message when read of file failed.

Couse:
 There is no reading permission.

Counter-measure:
 Make sure that reading permission is given.

- 128 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

(8) Read of file failed. Check the reading permission. Or, read the file after which converted
to CSV format.
This error occurs when the Excel file can not be read.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (s) Message when read of Excel file failed.

Couse:
 There is no reading permission.
 Excel File may be corrupted.

Counter-measure:
 Make sure that reading permission is given.
 Make the file again. Or, read the file after which converted to CSV format.

- 129 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

(9) Read of file failed. Check the log.

This error occurs when the file can not be read.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (t) Message of unexpected error .

Couse:
 The problem occurred when file is read.

Counter-measure:
 Check the log.
The path of the log file is as follow.
FS30i -B :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B\log\sim.log
FS30i -B 32AX:
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B 32AX\log\sim.log
FS30i -B 48AX:
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B 48AX\log\sim.log
FS30i -B Plus :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B Plus\log\sim.log
FS31i -B :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B\log\sim.log
FS31i -B Plus :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B Plus \log\sim.log
FS31i -B5 :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B5\log\sim.log
FS31i -B5 Plus :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B5\log\sim.log
FS32i -B :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS32i-B\log\sim.log
FS32i –B Plus :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS32i-B Plus \log\sim.log
FS35i -B :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS35i-B\log\sim.log
FS35i -B 16AX:
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS35i-B 16AX\log\sim.log

- 130 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

(10) An unexpected error has occurred.

This error occurrs when unexpected error occurred.
Message that is displayed is as follows.

Fig8.1.2 (u) Message of unexpected error

Couse:
 The problem occurred when file is read.

Counter-measure:
 Check the log.
The path of the log file is as follow.
FS30i -B :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B\log\sim.log
FS30i -B 32AX:
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B 32AX\log\sim.log
FS30i -B 48AX:
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B 48AX\log\sim.log
FS30i -B Plus :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B Plus\log\sim.log
FS31i -B :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B\log\sim.log
FS31i -B Plus :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B Plus \log\sim.log
FS31i -B5 :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B5\log\sim.log
FS31i -B5 Plus :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS31i-B5\log\sim.log
FS32i -B :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS32i-B\log\sim.log
FS32i –B Plus :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS32i-B Plus \log\sim.log
FS35i -B :
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS35i-B\log\sim.log
FS35i -B 16AX:
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS35i-B 16AX\log\sim.log

- 131 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.2 MACHINE COMPOSITION SETTINGS

8.2.1 Overview

You can make the machine composition settings of CNC GUIDE.

A machine composition is a collection of parameter and other various settings for

CNC GUIDE.
You can register multiple machine compositions and switch between them if needed.
For example, if you create different machine compositions for different users in
advance, you can start the CNC with the settings for a specific user simply by
switching to the machine composition for that user before starting CNC GUIDE.

This program allows you to specify the following parameters:

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
- Machine Group
- System Type
- Paths
- Axes
- Spindles

0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
- System Type
- Paths

0i-MODEL F Plus
- System Type
- Paths
- Type

- 132 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
- Machine Group
- Paths
- Axes
- Spindles

0i-LF Plus
- Paths
- Type

30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A
- Machine Group
- Paths
- Axes

And, the starting simulation function (CNC / ManualGuide i / PMC) is selected.

Note that you make machine composition settings with an application separate from
CNC GUIDE.
CNC GUIDE need not be active.

- 133 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.2.2 Starting and Exiting

From the start menu, click [ All Programs ] - [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(Model
name) ] -[ Machine Composition Setting ], and the machine composition setting
program starts.

Fig8.2.2 (a) Start menu: "Machine Composition Setting"

When it has started, the "List of Machine Composition Setting" window, shown
below, appears.
To exit, click the Exit (X) button.

Fig8.2.2 (b) Machine Composition Setting Screen

- 134 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.2.3 Selecting Machine Composition when CNC GUIDE Starts

The method of selecting the machine composition has the following two.

Fig8.2.3 (a) Select machine compsition.

① Select machine composition as start

② The following selection screens are displayed when CNC GUIDE starts, and the
machine composition can be selected at each start.

Fig8.2.3 (b) Machine composition selection at start

③ Use the default machine composition setting

CNC GUIDE starts by the default machine composition setting.

8.2.4 Select between Default Machine Compositions

This subsection explains how to switch CNC GUIDE to the desired machine
composition.

From the List of Machine Composition Setting, select the machine composition you
want to use with CNC GUIDE, and click the Default Setting (S) button.

The name following "Default: " at the top of the window changes to the selected
machine composition name.
The next time CNC GUIDE starts, it will start with the selected machine composition.

- 135 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.2.5 Creating New Machine Compositions

You can create a new machine composition.

To create a new machine composition, click the New (N) button.
The "Basic Machine Composition" window, shown below, appears. Input all desired
input items.

Fig8.2.5 Basic Machine Composition window

(CNC GUIDE (0iF version))

- 136 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Each item is explained below.

Machine Composition Name:
Enter the name of the machine composition you are going to create.
The name entered here is used on the list of the machine composition setting.

NOTE
The following characters cannot be used in a setting name:
\/:,;*?"<>|
Do not use double-byte character set (Chinese character,
katakana, and Korean character, etc.) in machine composition
that uses iHMI.

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is as follows
30iB version : 1 or 2
31iB version : 1 to 3

System Type:
You can select one from among three types, M (machining center), T (lathe), and
Mix (mixed).

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 4.

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 20.

Spindles:
Select the number of spindles you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of spindles is from 1 to 6.

0i-MODEL D
System Type:
You can select M (machining center) type or T (lathe) type.

- 137 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is below:
M(machining center) type :1
T(lathe) type : 1 or 2

0i-MODEL F
System Type:
You can select M (machining center) type or T (lathe) type.

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from : 1 or 2.

0i-MODEL F Plus
System Type:
You can select M (machining center) type or T (lathe) type.

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from : 1 or 2.

Type:
The selectable number of types is from : Type0 or Type1.

35i-MODEL B
Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 2

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 4.

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 8.

Spindles:
Select the number of spindles you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of spindles is from 1 to 4.

- 138 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

0i-LF Plus

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from : 1 or 2.

Type:
The selectable number of types is from : Type0 or Type1.

30i-LB
30i-LB Plus

Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 3

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 4

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 32.

31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB

Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 3

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 4

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 20.

PMi-MODEL A

Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.

- 139 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 3

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 4

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 32.

32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 2

System Type:
You can select one from among three types, M (machining center), T (lathe), and
Mix (mixed).

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 2.

- 140 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 10.

Spindles:
Select the number of spindles you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of spindles is from 1 to 6.

30i-MODEL B 32AX
Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 3.

System Type:
You can select one from among three types, M (machining center), T (lathe), and
Mix (mixed).

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 10.

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 32.

Spindles:
Select the number of spindles you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of spindles is from 1 to 8.

30i-MODEL B 48AX
Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 3

System Type:
You can select one from among three types, M (machining center), T (lathe), and
Mix (mixed).

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 10.

- 141 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 48.

Spindles:
Select the number of spindles you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of spindles is from 1 to 16.

30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX

Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 3

System Type:
You can select one from among three types, M (machining center), T (lathe), and
Mix (mixed).

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 15.

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 72.

Spindles:
Select the number of spindles you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of spindles is from 1 to 16.

35i-MODEL B 16AX
Machine Group:
Select the number of machine group you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of machine group is from 1 to 2

Paths:
Select the number of paths you want to use in the system.
The selectable number of paths is from 1 to 4.

Axes:
Select the number of controlled axes you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of controlled axes is from 1 to 16.

- 142 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Spindles:
Select the number of spindles you want to use throughout the system.
The selectable number of spindles is from 1 to 4.

Use CNC Simulation Function:

It sets for use the CNC simulation function.

Use iHMI:
It sets for use the iHMI.
Refer to Chapter 16 for model that can use iHMI.

Use MANUAL GUIDE i Simulation Function:

It sets for use the Manual Guide i simulation function.
If the setting of the CNC simulation function is turned on, Manual Guide i
simulation function is turned on.

Use PMC Simulation Function:

It sets for use the PMC simulation function.

Use Machine Signal Simulator:

It sets for use the Machine signal simulator.
This item is available when PMC simulation function is effective.

- 143 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Hide [PMC] menu:

You can hide the [PMC] menu by checking this item, at the context-menu of
picture mode and the menu-bar of window mode. By this setting the following
functions become unavailable.
- I / O operation panel
- Title window
- Ladder execution status window
- Signal operation replay function
- Option setting window
This item is available when both of CNC simulation function and PMC
simulation function are effective.

PMC Data I / O :
Clicking of this button, PMC I / O Data Screen has been displayed.
On this screen, loading, saving, and deletion can be performed as well as the
BOOT screen of CNC about the following PMC data of machine composition.
For details, refer to subsection 8.2.9 of this document.
- Ladder program
- Multi-language message data
- I / O Configuration data

Clicking the OK button causes the settings to be stored, returning you to the list of
machine composition setting.
To cancel the creation of a new composition, click the Cancel button.

- 144 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.2.6 Editing Machine Compositions

This section explains how to edit a machine composition.

From the List of Machine Composition Setting, select the machine composition you
want to copy and click the Edit (E) button.

The editing machine composition screen shown below, appears. Edit a machine
composition and click the OK button.
To cancel the copying, click the Cancel button.
If you click OK with nothing entered in the field, the copying will be canceled.

Fig8.2.6 Editing machine composition screen

(CNC GUIDE (0iF version))

NOTE
CNC GUIDE (0iF Plus version, 0iLF Plus version), [Use iHMI]
cannot be changed in Type1 machine composition.

- 145 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.2.7 Copying Machine Compositions

This section explains how to copy a machine composition.

From the List of Machine Composition Setting, select the machine composition you
want to copy and click the Copy (C) button.

The machine composition name input dialog box, shown below, appears. Enter a
new machine composition name and click the OK button.
To cancel the copying, click the Cancel button.
If you click OK with nothing entered in the field, the copying will be canceled.

Fig8.2.7 (a) Machine composition name input dialog box

If the entered machine composition name already exists on the list, the following
message appears, and the Machine Composition Setting Name dialog box reappears.

Fig8.2.7 (b) Message that appears if the machine composition name

already exists

8.2.8 Deleting Machine Compositions

This section explains how to delete machine compositions.

From the List of Machine Composition Setting, select the machine composition you
want to delete and click the Delete (D) button.
The following confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button.
To cancel the deletion, click the No button.

- 146 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fig8.2.8 (c) Deletion confirmation message

NOTE
If you delete the default machine composition, CNC GUIDE will
return to the state in which it was immediately after being
installed, with no machine composition being selected.

8.2.9 PMC I / O Data Screen

On this screen, you can load, save and delete the following PMC data of machine
composition, just like the BOOT screen of actual CNC.
- Ladder program
- Multi-language message data
- I / O Configuration data

Fig8.2.9 (a) PMC I/O data screen

Loading PMC data

You can load and add PMC data to machine composition as follows:

Click the Load button on PMC I / O Data Screen, and the following file selection
dialog will be displayed. Choose files to load to machine composition and click the
Open button.

- 147 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

You can also drag and drop the files onto the data display area of PMC I/O Data
Screen.

Fig8.2.9 (b) Load file selection dialog

Saving PMC data

You can save PMC data of machine composition as follows:

On PMC I / O Data Screen, choose files to save and click the Save button.

Fig8.2.9 (c) PMC I/O data screen ( Save operation )

The following dialog will be displayed.

Specify folder and file name to save as, and click the Save button.
The initial file name is "F-ROM file name" + ".000".

- 148 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fig8.2.9 (d) Save file selection dialog

Deletion PMC data

You can delete PMC data from machine composition as follows:

On PMC I / O Data Screen, choose files to delete and click the Delete button.
You may choose two or more files at once.

Fig8.2.9 (e) PMC I / O data screen ( Deletion operation )

The following confirmation message will be displayed, and click the Yes button to
proceed. To cancel, click the No button instead.

Fig8.2.9 (f) Deletion confirmation message

- 149 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.2.10 Import of Old series machine composition setting data

0i-MODEL F Plus
30i-MODEL B

You can import the machine composition setting data of the old series model (CNC
GUIDE 19.10 version or earlier) to the CNC GUIDE 0iF Plus and 30iB.
The old series models that can be imported are as follows.

Table 8.2.10 (a) Old series model and storage folder of CNC GUIDE the machine composition setting data
Old series model name Storage folder of CNC GUIDE 19.10 version or earlier
CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus iHMI version ) C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS0i-F Plus iHMI\MachineSetting
CNC GUIDE ( 30iB iHMI version ) C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B iHMI\MachineSetting

“Old series model machine composition” button is displayed only when there is a
machine composition setting data of the old model.

Fig8.2.10 (a) “Old series machine composition” buttton

- 150 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

When “Old series model machine composition” button is clicked, the old model
machine composition screen is displayed.

Fig8.2.10 (b) Old series machine composition screen

Select the machine composition setting data, and click "Copy" button.
The following window will be displayed. Input the machine composition name, and
click the "OK" button.
An initial value of the machine composition name is " Orignal machine composition
name-iHMI".

Fig8.2.10 (c) Machine composition name input window

Click the "OK" button to return to the machine composition setting list screen and the
copied machine composition setting data is displayed.

- 151 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fig8.2.10 (d) Machine composition setting list screen

- 152 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.3 G CODE SKIP FUNCTION

0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-WB
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
PMi-MODEL A
This function is disabled.

0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

8.3.1 Outline
A part of G codes cannot be executed at CNC GUIDE. Therefore, the alarm (PS0010)
may be generated and operation cannot be performed, if the program which is run in
actual CNC is performed at CNC GUIDE. In this case, program can be run without
generating the alarm by ignoring a specific G code according to this function.

8.3.2 Description
In this function, the setting to ignore G code of Table8.3.2 (a)- Table8.3.2 (d) is
possible.
The G code ignored is specified with the option setting tool. (See Fig.8.3.2 (a),
Fig.8.3.2 (b))
The specified G code is ignored when running and alarm (PS0010) is not generated.

- 153 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

0i-LF Plus
Table8.3.2 (a) List of G code that can be set
Option name G code Function
Gap control G13 Gap control mode (Always skipped)
G14 Gap control mode cancel (Always skipped)
G13.2 Beam output during approaching mode
G14.2 Beam output during approaching mode cancel

G codes for gap control function must be specified in a block in which there is no
other address.

31i-MODEL A
Table8.3.2 (b) List of G code that can be set
Option name G code Function
AI contour control I AI contour control (high-precision contour
G5
or control compatible command)
AI contour control II AI contour control / Nano smoothing /
G5.1
Smooth interpolation
AI contour control (advanced preview
G8
control compatible command)
Polygon turning G50.2 Polygon turning cancel
G51.2 Polygon turning
G250 Polygon turning cancel (for lathe system)
G251 Polygon turning (for lathe system)

30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
Table8.3.2 (c) List of G code that can be set
Option name G code Function
Polygon turning G50.2 Polygon turning cancel
G51.2 Polygon turning
G250 Polygon turning cancel (for lathe system)
G251 Polygon turning (for lathe system)

30i-LB

- 154 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Table8.3.2 (d) List of G code that can be set

Option name G code Function
Gap control G13 Gap control mode
G14 Gap control mode cancel
G13.2 Beam output during approaching mode
G14.2 Beam output during approaching mode cancel

G codes for gap control function must be specified in a block in which there is no
other address.

30i-LB Plus
Table8.3.2 (e) List of G code that can be set
Option name G code Function
Gap control G13 Gap control mode (Always skipped)
G14 Gap control mode cancel (Always skipped)
G13.2 Beam output during approaching mode
G14.2 Beam output during approaching mode cancel

G codes for gap control function must be specified in a block in which there is no
other address.

- 155 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

31i-LB

Table8.3.2 (f) List of G code that can be set

Option name G code Function
AI contour control I AI contour control (high-precision contour
G5
or control compatible command)
AI contour control II AI contour control / Nano smoothing /
G5.1
Smooth interpolation
AI contour control (advanced preview
G8
control compatible command)
Gap control G13 Gap control mode
G14 Gap control mode cancel

31i-PB

Table8.3.2 (g) List of G code that can be set

Option name G code Function
AI contour control I G5.1 AI contour control
AI contour control (advanced preview
G8
control compatible command)

Fig.8.3.2 (a) G code skip setting screen

(CNC GUIDE (30iA,31iLB,31iPB version))

- 156 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fig.8.3.2 (b) G code skip setting screen

(CNC GUIDE (30iB,31iB version))

WARNING
As for the following points, attention is necessary for using this
function.
1. Because the specified G code command is ignored, CNC
program operation is different because of actual CNC and CNC
GUIDE.
2. The alarm related to the function of Table8.3.2 (d) is not
generated.
Please test the operation of the program in not only CNC GUIDE but
also actual CNC without fail.

- 157 -
8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

8.3.3 Setting
The G code ignored is specified with the option setting tool.
The corresponding G code is set by option select.
Please restart CNC GUIDE after setting.

Procedure
A) CNC GUIDE starts.
B) Option setting tool starts.
C) Click [G code Skip] tab.
D) Check the option, and click OK.
E) The following message appears. Click OK.

F) CNC GUIDE restarts.

Example) When G5.1 is set as G code ignored, either of AI contour control I or AI

contour control II is selected.

Select the
“G code Skip”tab.

Click the check box

Fig8.3.3 (a) Setting when G5.1 is set as G code ignored

- 158 -
 8.CNC SYSTEM SETTINGS

Active program display

The select G code is ignored when program is performed.

Example) When AI contour control / Nano smoothing (G5.1) is set as G code ignored
and following program O300 is performed, G5.1 is not displayed in the N4
block of active program display though G5.1 is displayed in the N4 block
of the editing program display. (See Fig 8.3.3 (b))

Fig 8.3.3 (b) Display of G code ignored

Custom macro call based on a G code

When G code that call custom macro and G code ignored are the same, custom macro
is called.

Execution macro
When G code that call execution macro and G code ignored are the same, execution
macro is called.
This function is effective in the execution macro. The set G code is ignored.

- 159 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9 C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION

FUNCTION

- 160 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.1 SUMMARY

C Language Executor function can be used in CNC GUIDE.

The feature is as follows.

Feature:
• The application of C Language Executor can be performed in CNC GUIDE.
• The application of C Language Executor for which MTB is made can be
performed and be operated on PC, without actual CNC or machine.
• It is useful for education of operator, inquiry of end user, and making of the
manual.
• Development of the application of C Language Executor can be performed with
CNC GUIDE.
• The source code debug can be done by using the debugging tool of the compiler
software.
• The development efficiency goes up because execution and the confirmation of
the application of C Language Executor can be performed on PC.
• CNC GUIDE doesn't need to buy the “MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE
EXECUTOR” option and “CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE” option that needed in
CNC.

This chapter explains execution procedure, setting, method of development, and the
items that should be noted when C Language Executor application is developed on
CNC GUIDE.

This manual explains the content that relates with CNC GUIDE, and briefly explains
the compiler software and debugging function of Windows OS.
To confirm details of the using compiler software, please read the manual of the
compiler software.

- 161 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

This function can be used with following version of CNC GUIDE

31iA version : Ver.2 or later.
0iD version : Ver.4 or later.
0iF version : Ver.10 or later.
0iF Plus version : Ver.16 or later.
30iB version : Ver.8 or later.
31iB version : Ver.5 or later.
31iB5 version : Ver.13 or later.
32iB version : Ver.15 or later.
30iB 32AX version : Ver.18 or later.
30iB 48AX version : Ver.18 or later.
30iB Plus version : Ver.19 or later.
30iB Plus 72AX version : Ver.20 or later.
31iB Plus version : Ver.19 or later.
31iB5 Plus version : Ver.19 or later.
32iB Plus version : Ver.19 or later.
35iB version : Ver.5 or later.
35iB 16AX version : Ver.21 or later.
0iLF Plus version : Ver.25 or later.
30iLB version : Ver.25 or later.
30iLB Plus version : Ver.25 or later.
31iLB version : Ver.6 or later.
31iPB version : Ver.6 or later.
31iWB version : Ver.11 or later.
PMiA version : Ver.14 or later.

Hereafter, CNC GUIDE is called to the "CNC GUIDE".

Note the difference of the specification between each model.

- 162 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.2 INTRODUCTION

Specification of C Language Executor

This manual explains the simulator function of C Language Executor in CNC GUIDE.

0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
PMi-MODEL A
Please read C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63943EN-3)
about the detailed specification of C Language Executor.

0i-MODEL D
Please read C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64303EN-3)
about the detailed specification of C Language Executor.

Different behavior between CNC GUIDE and CNC

C Language Executor on CNC GUIDE doesn't have complete interchangeability with

C Language Executor for CNC, because of the difference of CPU hardware
performance and of configuration of servo / spindle, or so on.
Please note the following when using C Language Executor on CNC GUIDE.

- 163 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

• There are some functions that cannot be used on CNC GUIDE.

To operate C Language Executor application by both on CNC and on the CNC
GUIDE, it might be necessary to change the process such as stopping of the
function execution in CNC GUIDE.

• The processing time of the task and the timing between tasks are different from
actual CNC.
There is no problem when the tasks are controlled by logic with a flag and a
semaphore. But in the waiting processing between tasks by the execution time,
there is a possibility of not operating correctly in CNC GUIDE. In that case, it is
necessary to modify the application to meet in CNC GUIDE.

• The C Language compiler software of C Language Executor for CNC GUIDE is

different for the actual CNC. Therefore, it is necessary to consider the difference
of the compiler softwares.
When the different compiler software is used, the warning and the error might
occur even in the same source code during compiling. And, the executable codes
generated with both compiler softwares are different because the specification
such as the optimization of the compilation never becomes completely the same.
These are not the problem of the specifications of the CNC GUIDE. Please
acknowledge the difference of the specification of both compiler softwares
beforehand.

• In case of actual CNC, as for the SRAM variable declared with “sramver.c”, even
if the power supply is turned off, the value is maintained. But, these value of a
variables are not maintained in the CNC GUIDE. For maintaining these value,
Please save the value of variables declared with “sramver.c” in any files on the
hard disk by calling function‘ncguide_sramvar_save’. When CNC GUIDE starts,
the loading is done as for the file, and the saved variable value is set to the
variable. Please refer to “C Language Executor：About save the variables in
sramver.c.pdf” about details.
In CNC GUIDE Ver 3.0, the function to save the value of variables declared with
“sramver.c” in the case of exiting CNC GUIDE was added. Therefore, if using
CNC GUIDE Ver 3.0 or later, it is unnecessary to call
function‘ncguide_sramvar_save’ in C Language Executor application.

• In C Language Executor for CNC GUIDE access to drive D (USB memory for
CNC) cannot be used. When the function that does file access to drive D is called,
that function returns error.

- 164 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

NOTE
C Language Executor for CNC GUIDE doesn't have complete
interchangeability with C Language Executor for CNC. Therefore,
please perform the operation test of C Language Executor application
on not only the confirmation of the application on CNC GUIDE but also
actual CNC without fail.

9.2.1 How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC

How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC by using C LANGUAGE

EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION is as follows.

1. Excute “cnc_sysinfo”, and then get series name (series) and CNC additional
information (addinfo)
2. If one of the following conditions is satisfied, the target is distinguished to be
CNC GUIDE.
(a)Bit 6 of CNC additional information (addinfo) is “1”
(b)The end of series name (series) is “Z” or “-”

- 165 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Table 9.2.1 (a) : cnc_sysinfo

Name cnc_sysinfo( struct odbsys *sysinfo)

Sumary Reading CNC system information

Arguments sysinfo : Pointer to the ODBSYS structure including CNC system information

ODBSYS structure is as follows.

typedef struct odbsys {

short addinfo ; /* CNC additional information. */

short max_axis ; /* Maximum number of controlled axes */

char cnc_type[2] ; /* Kind of CNC (ASCII string). */

char mt_type[2] ; /* Kind of M/T/TT (ASCII string). */

char series[4] ; /* Series number (ASCII string). */

char version[4] ; /* Version number (ASCII string). */

char axes[2] ; /* Amount of controllable axes (ASCII string). */

} ODBSYS ;

addinfo ：CNC additional information

Bit 6 0 : CNC

1 : CNC GUIDE(Simulation software)

This bit value is referred to distinguish CNC from

a simulation software like CNC GUIDE.

series ：Series of CNC software(ASCII)

The character string of 4 digits is stored.

Return Processing result

- 166 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The C Language Executor application compiled for CNC GUIDE can be operated in
CNC GUIDE. But it is not possible to execute it on actual CNC.
And C Language Executor application for CNC doesn't run on in CNC GUIDE.

C Language Executor for CNC GUIDE uses a compiler software that is different from
C Language Executor for CNC.
C Language Executor application for CNC GUIDE can be made by the following
each compiler software.

Made by Microsoft Corporation

A) Visual C++ included in Visual Studio 2015 (*1)
B) Visual C++ 2015 Express Edition (*2)
C) Visual C++ included in Visual Studio 2010 (*1), (*6)
D) Visual C++ 2010 Express Edition (*3), (*4)
E) Visual C++ included in Visual Studio 2005 (*1), (*6)
F) Visual C++ 2005 Express Edition (*4), (*5)
G) Visual C++ .NET 2003 (*6)

(*1) "VisualStudio" is an integrated development environment corresponding to

the development languages such as Visual Basic, Visual C #, and Visual C++.
(*2) Visual C++ 2015 Express Edition can be downloaded from the Microsoft
Corporation homepage.
(*3) Visual C++ 2010 Express Edition can be downloaded from the Microsoft
Corporation homepage. Please see Chapter 9.10 for details.
(*4) The download service is closed now. ( As of April, 2021.)
(*5) Separately, Microsoft Platform SDK is necessary. Microsoft Platform SDK
can be downloaded from the Microsoft Corporation homepage. Please see
Chapter 9.11 for details.
(*6) It is not sold now. (As of April, 2021.)

Reference : What’s PlatformSDK

SDK means SoftwareDevelopmentKit. The header file and the library file
of C Language are included.
If this is not installed, the execution module that operates in Windows
cannot be made.
This platform SDK is not included in Visual C++ Express Edition,
therefore it is necessary to acquire it separately, and to install it.

- 167 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.4 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN CNC AND CNC GUIDE

This chapter explains the differences between the C language executor for CNC and
the C language executor for CNC GUIDE in development.

9.4.1 Procedure of Making C Language Executor Application

The procedure of making C Language Executor application for CNC and CNC
GUIDE is explained in Fig. 9.4.1 (a).

1 Source code of C Language Executor application

2
Compile and link C Language Executor C Language Executor
Compiler software for CNC Compiler software for CNC GUIDE

3
MEM file DLL file
Executable file ( cexe.mem ) ( cex1.dll, cex2.dll,.. )

4
Installation of application Write by Boot Loader Copy to
CNC GUIDE folder

5
Execute application Execute application
Execution
Debug source code

CNC CNC GUIDE

Fig. 9.4.1 (a) Procedure of making C Language Executor application

The each item is explained as follows.

- 168 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

1 Source code
C language executor for CNC GUIDE can use the same source code as C language
executor for CNC. However, the source code might have to be modified because there
are the functions with different operation from functions for CNC and the functions
which cannot be used for CNC GUIDE.
For the modification of the source code, refer to the chapter 9.4.2.

2 Compile and link

The compiler software to make the C language executor application for CNC GUIDE
is different from the compiler software for CNC.
Therefore, the compile error and warning that the compiler software for CNC GUIDE
generates might be different from the compile error and warning that the compiler
software for CNC generates. Because the condition assumed to be an error by the
compiler software commodity is slightly different. This is not the specification of
CNC GUIDE. Please acknowledge the difference of the specification concerning both
compiler softwares beforehand.

3 Executable file
In case of the compiler software for CNC, one MEM file is generated as an executable
file. In case of the compiler software for CNC GUIDE, six DLL files are generated as
executable files.
The formats of these MEM files and DLL files are different. Therefore, the MEM file
cannot be used for CNC GUIDE and the DLL files cannot be used for CNC.

Reference : What’s a DLL?

A DLL is an abbreviation of Dynamic Link Library. It is a kind of the
library in which other execution module can call functions without link
process. Only necessary DLL can be updated without linking the entire
applications if DLL is used.

4 Installation of application
It was necessary to load the MEM file which is the executable file to CNC by using
Boot Loader to execute the C language executor application with CNC.
In case of CNC GUIDE, the DLL file is loaded when starting by copying the DLL file
which is the executable file to using machine composition folder.
For the machine composition, refer to the chapter 9.4.3.

- 169 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

5 Execution
The C language executor application can be executed on CNC and CNC GUIDE.
Moreover, debug with the source code level can be performed on CNC GUIDE
besides the execution of the application.

- 170 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.4.2 Modification of Source Code

It is necessary to add the modification to the source code to make the application
which can be compiled and executed in both CNC and CNC GUIDE environments.

Condition compilation
The function which cannot be used with the C language executor application for CNC
GUIDE in the source code might be used. In that case, it is necessary not to call the
function for CNC GUIDE or to replace it by another function.
When it is necessary to use the different source code for CNC and CNC GUIDE, the
condition compilation is executed by using the symbol of “PC” like the following
example.

Ex)
#ifdef PC
/* Processing only for CNC GUIDE */
#else
/* Processing onlu for CNC */
#endif

Difference of endian
In each coding for CNC and CNC GUIDE, note the diference of endian.
A little endian is used for CNC GUIDE, and a big endian is used for CNC.
The description of the processing that operates by the condition compilation like the
following example in each condition is needed about the program influenced by
endian.

Ex)
#define GetHiByte(word) ((UINT8)((((UINT16)(word))&0xff00)>>8))
#define GetLoByte(word) ((UINT8) (((UINT16)(word))&0x00ff))

#ifdef PC /* In case of CNC GUIDE */

#define GetHiLoByte(word) GetLoByte(word), GetHiByte(word)
#else /* In case of CNC */
#define GetHiLoByte(word) GetHiByte(word), GetLoByte(word)
#endif

- 171 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

SRAM variable and DRAM variable

The DRAM variable declared in “dramver.c” can be read and written from all tasks on
CNC. The DRAM variable can be read and writen from all tasks of CNC GUIDE too.
In case of CNC GUIDE, the extern declaration of DRAM variable should be rewritten
as follows as CEXE_EXTERN.

extern int variable;

CEXE_EXTERN int variable;

The SRAM variable declared in “sramver.c” can be read and written from all tasks.
The extern declaration of SRAM variable should be rewitten as CEXE_EXTERN as
well as DRAM variable.

9.4.3 Machine Composition

The C language executor application can be arranged in CNC GUIDE for each
machine composition. Moreover, the FROM data which the C language executor
application uses can be maintained in each machine composition.

9.4.4 Custom Soft Capacity Option

Custom soft capacity means the size of the C language executor application. The
application corresponding to the size of the bought option can be executed in CNC.
In case of CNC GUIDE, there is no limit of the custom soft capacity.
Please confirm on CNC whether the size of the application don't exceed the limit of
custom soft capacity option.

9.4.5 Read and Write to Memory Card

In CNC, the file is read and written from/to the memory card in the memory card slot.
On the other hand, in CNC GUIDE, the file is read and written for the folder
“Memcard”.

- 172 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.4.6 Operation of FROM Function

The C language executor application can read the data of the C language data file
converted by DAT2MEM by using the FROM function. There are two kind of the C
language data file which include only data or both data and the program. The C
language data file included only data can be used for CNC GUIDE.
In CNC GUIDE, the C language data file is put in the FROM folder in the machine
composition folder.
Please do not apply the extension to the file name of the C language data file.

9.4.7 SRAM File

In the C Language Executor application, the file can be read and written by using the
function such as fopen, fclose, fgets, fputs etc. CNC GUIDE makes the file in the
SRAM folder in the machine composition folder while CNC writes information in the
file in the SRAM area.

9.4.8 Changing C Language Executor Configuration for CNC

For compiling the source code added above change on the development environment
for CNC, it is necessary to rewrite the Makefile as follows.

1)The api_def.h file is copied the Inc folder.

0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus

- 173 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
PMi-MODEL A
:\Samples\C languageExecutor\for_VC2010\FS31i\include\api_def.h is copied to the
\Inc folder that is in the development environment of CNC.

0i-MODEL D
:\Samples\C languageExecutor\for_VC2010\FS0i-D\include\api_def.h is copied to the
\Inc folder that is in the development environment of CNC.

2) Edit Makefile
Makefile is rewritten as follows.

CC = dcc -@$(TOOL)\cc.opt -I $(FCINC)

↓
CC = dcc -@$(TOOL)\cc.opt -I $(FCINC) -i="api_def.h"

api_def.h is included to the compile of all modules by this edit.

9.4.9 Saving Sramver Variables

The variables in sramver.c can be saved in the file on the hard disk.
When CNC GUIDE starts, the loading is done as for the file, and the saved variable
value is set to the variable.

Correspondence edition
Over CNC GUIDE/CNC GUIDE Academic package Ver 2.2

How to use
When call function ‘ncguide_sramvar_save’, the variables in sramver.c is saved in the
file on the hard disk.
When CNC GUIDE starts, the saved variable value is automatically set to the variable
in sramvar.c.

Function Specifications
void ncguide_sramvar_save( void );
• When call this, the variables in sramver.c is saved to next file.
.\(each machine composition settings folder)\sram\sramvar.dat
Please delete this file when you return the value to the initial value in coding.
Attention：

- 174 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

• This function can be called only on the C language executor for CNC
GUIDE/CNC GUIDEPro.
It is not possible to use it on the C language executor for CNC.
• It is possible to call it only in main task.
• The call must decrease as much as possible.
It might influence the performance of CNC GUIDE when there are a lot of calls.
• The variable value of sramver.c changed before this function is called is not
saved.
Please call the function according to appropriate timing.

Coding and setting

Please use the sample project (\Samples\Cexe language Executor) of C language
executor's application in
CD(over Ver2.2).
Please correct sramvar.c referring to this sample.
It is necessary to describe variable name declared in sramvar.c to
\projects\cexe_sram_order.txt.
Please refer to (3) in the next chapter for details.

Content of correction to C language executor application before the Ver2.1

It explains the adjusting point to the C language executor application source ahead for
this function as follows.
(1) Correction of sramvar.c
(a) CEXE_EXTERN" is changed to "CEXE_EXTERN_SRAM".
(b) The code is added.
Please refer to \Samples\Cexe language Executor\user\sramver.c included in CD
since the Ver2.2.

Correction example：
Ver 2.1 or earlier Ver 2.2 or later
/* For CNCGuide */
#if defined (PC)
#pragma data_seg(".CEXE_SRAM")
SRAMVER_TOP
#endif

/* example */
⇒ /* example */
CEXE_EXTERN unsigned int sram_var = 0;
CEXE_EXTERN_SRAM unsigned int sram_var = 0;

#if defined (PC)

SRAMVER_END
#pragma data_seg()
#endif
(2) The following link option is added to “Linker Option”-"Command line”
「-section:.CEXE_SRAM,rws /ORDER:@cexe_sram_order.txt」

- 175 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

(3) Lib\ns.lib is replaced with a new file on CD.

(4) Making of file to decide the order of variable arrangement
Sample file ( \Samples\Cexe language Executor\projects\cexe_sram_order.txt )
included in CD is copied to folder (\projects) with the project used now, and edit
it.
Please describe this module as follows.
・Variable name defined with sramvar.c is described in this module.
・Please change and delete neither sram_var_top nor sram_var_end described in
the sample file.
・One variable name is described in one line in order defining it with sramvar.c.
・The comment cannot be described.
・The array variable and the pointer variable describe only the variable name

Example )
sramvar.c cexe_sram_order.txt
int number[10]; number
⇒
char *ptr; ptr

- 176 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5 SUPPORTING FUNCTION LIST

In this function, it is possible to make the C Language Executor application that

operates on CNC GUIDE by using a function almost similar to C Language Executor
of CNC. However, the function of C Language Executor of all CNC cannot be used.
Operation is different in a part of function that needs hardware such as the servo, the
spindle, communications, and PMC . Note also that the function which can be used is
different between 31iA version, 30iB version, 31iB version, 35iB version, 0i version
and PMiA version.

Function List
The function is classified as follows.

○ It is possible to use functions in this function.

― It is not possible to use functions in this function.

When the function that cannot be used in this function is used, the function returns the
error value.
Moreover, the function returns an irregular value in the function that returns the value.

”30iB version” is
30i-MODEL B / 30i-MODEL B 32AX /30i-MODEL B 48AX / 30i-MODEL B Plus
/ 31i-MODEL B / 31i-MODEL B Plus / 31i-MODEL B5 / 31i-MODEL B5 Plus /
32i-MODEL B / 32i-MODEL B Plus / 35i-MODEL B 16AX.
”0iF version” is
0i-MODEL F / 0i-MODEL F Plus.

9.5.1 ANSI C Standard Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus

- 177 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 abs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 acos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 asctime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 asin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 assert ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 atan ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 atan2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 atof ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 atoi ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 atol ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 bsearch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 calloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 ceil ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 clearerr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 clock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 cos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 cosh ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 ctime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 difftime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 div ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 exp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 fabs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 fclose ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 feof ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 ferror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 fflush ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 fgetc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 fgetpos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 fgets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 floor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 fmod ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 fopen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 fprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 fputc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 fputs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 fread ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 free ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 freopen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 frexp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 fscanf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41 fseek ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 fsetpos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 ftell ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 fwrite ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 getc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 getchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 178 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
47 gets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
48 gmtime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 isalnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 isalpha ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 iscntrl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 isdigit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 isgraph ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
54 islower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
55 isprint ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
56 ispunct ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
57 isspace ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 isupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59 isxdigit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
60 labs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
61 ldexp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
62 ldiv ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
63 localtime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
64 log ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
65 log10 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
66 longjmp － － － － －
67 malloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
68 memchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
69 memcmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
70 memcpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
71 memmove ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
72 memset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
73 mktime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
74 modf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
75 perror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
76 pow ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
77 printf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
78 putc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
79 putchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
80 puts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
81 qsort ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
82 rand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
83 realloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
84 remove ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
85 rename ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
86 rewind ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
87 scanf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
88 setbuf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
89 setjmp － － － － －
90 setvbuf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
91 sin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
92 sinh ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
93 sprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
94 sqrt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
95 srand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 179 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
96 sscanf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
97 strcat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
98 strchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
99 strcmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100 strcpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
101 strcspn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
102 strlen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
103 strncat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
104 strncmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
105 strncpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
106 strpbrk ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
107 strrchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
108 strspn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
109 strstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
110 strtod ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
111 strtok ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
112 strtol ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
113 strtoul ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
114 tan ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
115 tanh ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
116 time ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
117 tmpnam ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
118 tolower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
119 toupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
120 ungetc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
121 va_arg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
122 va_end ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
123 va_start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
124 vfprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
125 vprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
126 vsprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 abs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 acos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 asctime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 asin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 assert ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 180 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
6 atan ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 atan2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 atof ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 atoi ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 atol ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 bsearch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 calloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 ceil ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 clearerr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 clock ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 cos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 cosh ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 ctime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 difftime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 div ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 exp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 fabs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 fclose ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 feof ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 ferror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 fflush ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 fgetc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 fgetpos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 fgets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 floor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 fmod ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 fopen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 fprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 fputc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 fputs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 fread ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 free ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 freopen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 frexp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 fscanf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41 fseek ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 fsetpos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 ftell ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 fwrite ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 getc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 getchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 gets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
48 gmtime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 isalnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 isalpha ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 iscntrl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 isdigit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 isgraph ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
54 islower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 181 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
55 isprint ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
56 ispunct ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
57 isspace ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 isupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59 isxdigit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
60 labs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
61 ldexp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
62 ldiv ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
63 localtime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
64 log ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
65 log10 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
66 longjmp － － － － － －
67 malloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
68 memchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
69 memcmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
70 memcpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
71 memmove ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
72 memset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
73 mktime ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
74 modf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
75 perror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
76 pow ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
77 printf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
78 putc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
79 putchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
80 puts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
81 qsort ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
82 rand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
83 realloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
84 remove ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
85 rename ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
86 rewind ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
87 scanf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
88 setbuf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
89 setjmp － － － － － －
90 setvbuf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
91 sin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
92 sinh ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
93 sprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
94 sqrt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
95 srand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
96 sscanf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
97 strcat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
98 strchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
99 strcmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100 strcpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
101 strcspn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
102 strlen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
103 strncat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 182 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
104 strncmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
105 strncpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
106 strpbrk ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
107 strrchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
108 strspn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
109 strstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
110 strtod ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
111 strtok ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
112 strtol ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
113 strtoul ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
114 tan ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
115 tanh ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
116 time ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
117 tmpnam ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
118 tolower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
119 toupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
120 ungetc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
121 va_arg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
122 va_end ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
123 va_start ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
124 vfprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
125 vprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
126 vsprintf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9.5.2 MS-C Extended C Standard Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

- 183 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 _chdrive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 _dos_findfirst ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 _dos_findnext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 _dos_getdiskfree ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 _expand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 _fcalloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 _fexpand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 _ffree ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 _fmalloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 _fmemchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 _fmemcmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 _fmemcpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 _fmemicmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 _fmemmove ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 _fmemset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 _fmsize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 _frealloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 _fstrcat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 _fstrchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 _fstrcmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 _fstrcpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 _fstrcspn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 _fstricmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 _fstrlen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 _fstrlwr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 _fstrncat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 _fstrncmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 _fstrncpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 _fstrnicmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 _fstrnset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 _fstrpbrk ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 _fstrrchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 _fstrrev ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 _fstrset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 _fstrspn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 _fstrstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 _fstrtok ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 _fstrupr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 _getdrive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 _lrotl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41 _lrotr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 _msize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 _rotl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 _rotr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 _tolower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 _toupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 alloca － － － － －
48 btom ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 cabs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 184 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
50 chdir (*1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 chkctype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 creat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
54 ecvt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
55 eof ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
56 fcvt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
57 gcvt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 getch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59 getcwd ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
60 hantozen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
61 hypot ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
62 isalkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
63 isalnmkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
64 isascii ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
65 isgrkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
66 iskana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
67 iskanji ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
68 iskanji2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
69 iskmoji ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
70 iskpun ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
71 ispnkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
72 isprkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
73 itoa ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
74 jisalpha ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
75 jisdigit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
76 jishira ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
77 jiskata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
78 jiskigou ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
79 jisl0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
80 jisl1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
81 jisl2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
82 jislower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
83 jisprint ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
84 jisspace ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
85 jistojms ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
86 jisupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
87 jiszen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
88 jmstojis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
89 jtohira ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
90 jtokata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
91 jtolower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
92 jtoupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
93 kbhit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
94 lseek ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
95 ltoa ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
96 memicmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
97 mkdir (*1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
98 mtob ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 185 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
99 nthctype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100 open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
101 read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
102 rmdir (*1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
103 stackavail － － － － －
104 strcmpi ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
105 stricmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
106 strlwr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
107 strnicmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
108 strnset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
109 strrev ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
110 strset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
111 strupr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
112 swab ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
113 tell ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
114 toascii ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
115 ultoa ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
116 write ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
117 zentohan ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

*1 The drive that can be specified is as follows.

- B drive
Series 0i-MODEL D
- B drive and C drive
Series 31i-MODEL A, Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 0i-MODEL F, Series 0i-MODEL F Plus,
Series 35i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B5,
Power Motion i-MODEL A

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 _chdrive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 _dos_findfirst ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 _dos_findnext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 _dos_getdiskfree ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 _expand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 _fcalloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 _fexpand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 _ffree ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 _fmalloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 _fmemchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 186 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
11 _fmemcmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 _fmemcpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 _fmemicmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 _fmemmove ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 _fmemset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 _fmsize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 _frealloc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 _fstrcat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 _fstrchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 _fstrcmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 _fstrcpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 _fstrcspn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 _fstricmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 _fstrlen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 _fstrlwr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 _fstrncat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 _fstrncmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 _fstrncpy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 _fstrnicmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 _fstrnset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 _fstrpbrk ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 _fstrrchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 _fstrrev ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 _fstrset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 _fstrspn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 _fstrstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 _fstrtok ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 _fstrupr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 _getdrive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 _lrotl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41 _lrotr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 _msize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 _rotl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 _rotr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 _tolower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 _toupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 alloca － － － － － －
48 btom ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 cabs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 chdir (*1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 chkctype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 creat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
54 ecvt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
55 eof ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
56 fcvt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
57 gcvt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 getch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59 getcwd ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 187 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
60 hantozen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
61 hypot ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
62 isalkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
63 isalnmkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
64 isascii ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
65 isgrkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
66 iskana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
67 iskanji ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
68 iskanji2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
69 iskmoji ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
70 iskpun ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
71 ispnkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
72 isprkana ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
73 itoa ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
74 jisalpha ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
75 jisdigit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
76 jishira ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
77 jiskata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
78 jiskigou ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
79 jisl0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
80 jisl1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
81 jisl2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
82 jislower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
83 jisprint ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
84 jisspace ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
85 jistojms ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
86 jisupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
87 jiszen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
88 jmstojis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
89 jtohira ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
90 jtokata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
91 jtolower ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
92 jtoupper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
93 kbhit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
94 lseek ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
95 ltoa ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
96 memicmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
97 mkdir (*1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
98 mtob ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
99 nthctype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100 open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
101 read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
102 rmdir (*1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
103 stackavail － － － － － －
104 strcmpi ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
105 stricmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
106 strlwr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
107 strnicmp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
108 strnset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 188 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
109 strrev ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
110 strset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
111 strupr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
112 swab ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
113 tell ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
114 toascii ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
115 ultoa ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
116 write ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
117 zentohan ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

*1 The drive that can be specified is as follows.

- B drive and C drive
Series 31i-L MODEL B, Series 31i-P MODEL B, Series 31i-WB

- 189 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.3 Graphic Library ( MS-C Compatible Graphic Functions )

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 _arc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 _clearscreen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 _ellipse ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 _floodfill ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 _getactivepage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 _getarcinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 _getbkcolor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 _getcolor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 _getcurrentposition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 _getfillmask ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 _getfontinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 _getgtextextent ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 _getgtextvector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 _getimage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 _getkanji ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 _getlinestyle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 _getphyscoord ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 _getpixel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 _gettextposition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 _gettextwindow ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 _getvideoconfig ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 _getviewcoord ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 _getvisualpage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 _getwritemode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 _grstatus ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 _imagesize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 190 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
27 _kanjisize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 _lineto ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 _moveto ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 _outgtext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 _outmem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 _outtext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 _pie ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 _polygon ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 _putimage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 _rectangle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 _registerfonts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 _remapallpalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 _remappalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 _setactivepage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41 _setbkcolor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 _setcliprgn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 _setcolor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 _setfillmask ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 _setfont ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 _setgtextvector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 _setlinestyle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
48 _setpixel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 _settextposition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 _settextrows ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 _settextwindow ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 _setvideomode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 _setvideomoderows ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
54 _setvieworg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
55 _setviewport ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
56 _setvisualpage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
57 _setwritemode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 _unregisterfonts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59 _wrapon ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 _arc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 _clearscreen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 _ellipse ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 _floodfill ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 191 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
5 _getactivepage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 _getarcinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 _getbkcolor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 _getcolor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 _getcurrentposition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 _getfillmask ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 _getfontinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 _getgtextextent ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 _getgtextvector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 _getimage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 _getkanji ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 _getlinestyle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 _getphyscoord ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 _getpixel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 _gettextposition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 _gettextwindow ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 _getvideoconfig ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 _getviewcoord ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 _getvisualpage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 _getwritemode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 _grstatus ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 _imagesize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 _kanjisize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 _lineto ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 _moveto ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 _outgtext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 _outmem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 _outtext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 _pie ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 _polygon ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 _putimage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 _rectangle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 _registerfonts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 _remapallpalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 _remappalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 _setactivepage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41 _setbkcolor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 _setcliprgn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 _setcolor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 _setfillmask ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 _setfont ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 _setgtextvector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 _setlinestyle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
48 _setpixel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 _settextposition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 _settextrows ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 _settextwindow ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 _setvideomode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 _setvideomoderows ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 192 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
54 _setvieworg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
55 _setviewport ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
56 _setvisualpage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
57 _setwritemode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 _unregisterfonts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59 _wrapon ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 193 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.4 Graphic Library ( Original Graphic Functions )

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 _putpattern ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 _getpattern ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 gr_bitblt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 gr_disp4str ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 gr_disp6str ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 gr_disp9ifchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 gr_disp9ifstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 gr_dispfstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 gr_displaychar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 gr_displayfchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 gr_displayfourlarge ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 gr_displaysixlarge ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 gr_displaysmlchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 gr_dispsstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 gr_dispstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 mmc_arc_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 mmc_circle_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 mmc_ellipse_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 mmc_gettext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 mmc_line_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 mmc_pie_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 mmc_polyline ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 mmc_puttext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 mmc_textsize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 gr_dispvskmenu ○ ○ ○ － ○

- 194 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 _putpattern ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 _getpattern ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 gr_bitblt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 gr_disp4str ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 gr_disp6str ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 gr_disp9ifchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 gr_disp9ifstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 gr_dispfstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 gr_displaychar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 gr_displayfchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 gr_displayfourlarge ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 gr_displaysixlarge ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 gr_displaysmlchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 gr_dispsstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 gr_dispstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 mmc_arc_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 mmc_circle_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 mmc_ellipse_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 mmc_gettext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 mmc_line_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 mmc_pie_b ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 mmc_polyline ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 mmc_puttext ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 mmc_textsize ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 gr_dispvskmenu ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 195 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.5 CNC Window Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 cnc_absolute ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 cnc_accdecdly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 cnc_actf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 cnc_acts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 cnc_acts2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 cnc_adcnv ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 cnc_alarm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 cnc_alarm2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 cnc_clearophis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 cnc_clr5axpls － － － － －
11 cnc_clrcntinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 cnc_delall ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 cnc_delete ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 cnc_delmagazine ○ ○ ○ － ○
15 cnc_deltlifedt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 cnc_deltlifegrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 cnc_deltool ○ ○ ○ － ○
18 cnc_diagnosr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 cnc_diagnoss ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 cnc_distance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 cnc_dnc2 － － － － －
22 cnc_dncend2 － － － － －
23 cnc_dncstart2 － － － － －
24 cnc_download ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 cnc_download4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 cnc_dwnend ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 196 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
27 cnc_dwnend4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 cnc_dwnstart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 cnc_dwnstart4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 cnc_exaxisname2 ○ ○ ○ － ○
31 cnc_exeprgname ○ ○ ○ － ○
32 cnc_exeprgname2 ○ ○ ○ － ○
33 cnc_getfigure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 cnc_getpath ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 cnc_information ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 cnc_instlifedt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 cnc_loadtorq ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 cnc_machine ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 cnc_machine3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 cnc_modal ○ ○ ○ － ○
41 cnc_pdf_add ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 cnc_pdf_cond ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 cnc_pdf_del ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 cnc_pdf_rdmain ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 cnc_pdf_rename ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 cnc_pdf_slctmain ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 cnc_rd1length ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
48 cnc_rd1radius ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 cnc_rd1tlifedat2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 cnc_rd1tlifedata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 cnc_rd2length ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 cnc_rd2radius ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 cnc_rd2tlifedata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
54 cnc_rd5axmandt － － － － －
55 cnc_rd5axovrlap － － － － －
56 cnc_rdalmhisno ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
57 cnc_rdalmhisno3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 cnc_rdalmhistry3 ○ ○ ○ － ○
59 cnc_rdalmhistry4 ○ ○ ○ － ○
60 cnc_rdalmhistry5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
61 cnc_rdalminfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
62 cnc_rdalmmsg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
63 cnc_rdalmmsg2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
64 cnc_rdaxisdata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
65 cnc_rdaxisname ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
66 cnc_rdcntover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
67 cnc_rdcnttype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
68 cnc_rdcommand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
69 cnc_rdcount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
70 cnc_rddiaginfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
71 cnc_rddiagnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
72 cnc_rddynamic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
73 cnc_rdexchgtgrp ○ ○ ○ － ○
74 cnc_rdexecprog ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
75 cnc_rdgcode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 197 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
76 cnc_rdgrpid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
77 cnc_rdgrpid2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
78 cnc_rdgrpinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
79 cnc_rdgrpinfo2 ○ ○ ○ － ○
80 cnc_rdgrpinfo3 ○ ○ ○ － ○
81 cnc_rdgrpinfo4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
82 cnc_rdhissgnl3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
83 cnc_rdjogdrun ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
84 cnc_rdlife ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
85 cnc_rdmacro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
86 cnc_rdmacroinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
87 cnc_rdmacror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
88 cnc_rdmacror2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
89 cnc_rdmagazine ○ ○ ○ － ○
90 cnc_rdmaxgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
91 cnc_rdmaxtool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
92 cnc_rdmovrlap － － － － －
93 cnc_rdngrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
94 cnc_rdnspdl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
95 cnc_rdntool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
96 cnc_rdomhisno ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
97 cnc_rdomhistry2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
98 cnc_rdophisno ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
99 cnc_rdophisno3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100 cnc_rdophistry3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
101 cnc_rdophistry4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
102 cnc_rdopmsg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
103 cnc_rdopmsg2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
104 cnc_rdopmsg3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
105 cnc_rdparam ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
106 cnc_rdparanum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
107 cnc_rdparar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
108 cnc_rdpdf_alldir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
109 cnc_rdpdf_curdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
110 cnc_rdpdf_drive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
111 cnc_rdpdf_inf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
112 cnc_rdpdf_subdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
113 cnc_rdpdf_subdirn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
114 cnc_rdpitchinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
115 cnc_rdpitchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
116 cnc_rdpmacro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
117 cnc_rdpmacror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
118 cnc_rdpmacror2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
119 cnc_rdposition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
120 cnc_rdprgnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
121 cnc_rdprogdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
122 cnc_rdprogdir2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
123 cnc_rdprogdir3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
124 cnc_rdprogdir4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 198 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
125 cnc_rdproginfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
126 cnc_rdptaxfunctablestatus － － － － －
127 cnc_rdptaxitablestatus － － － － －
128 cnc_rdptcnvalm － － － － －
129 cnc_rdptcnvinfo － － － － －
130 cnc_rdptexedistalm － － － － －
131 cnc_rdptsptablestatus － － － － －
132 cnc_rdseqnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
133 cnc_rdset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
134 cnc_rdsetinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
135 cnc_rdsetnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
136 cnc_rdsetr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
137 cnc_rdspdlname ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
138 cnc_rdspeed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
139 cnc_rdspload ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
140 cnc_rdspmeter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
141 cnc_rdsvmeter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
142 cnc_rdsyshard ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
143 cnc_rdsyssoft3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
144 cnc_rdtlgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
145 cnc_rdtlinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
146 cnc_rdtltool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
147 cnc_rdtlusegrp ○ ○ ○ － ○
148 cnc_rdtofs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
149 cnc_rdtofsinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
150 cnc_rdtofsinfo2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
151 cnc_rdtofsr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
152 cnc_rdtool ○ ○ ○ － ○
153 cnc_rdtool_f2 ○ ○ ○ － ○
154 cnc_rdtoolgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
155 cnc_rdtoolrng ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
156 cnc_rdusegrpid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
157 cnc_rdusetlno ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
158 cnc_rdwkcdshft ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
159 cnc_rdzofs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
160 cnc_rdzofsr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
161 cnc_regmagazine ○ ○ ○ － ○
162 cnc_regtool ○ ○ ○ － ○
163 cnc_regtool_f2 ○ ○ ○ － ○
164 cnc_relative ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
165 cnc_search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
166 cnc_seqsrch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
167 cnc_setpath ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
168 cnc_settimer － － － － －
169 cnc_skip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
170 cnc_srvdelay ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
171 cnc_startophis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
172 cnc_startptcnv － － － － －
173 cnc_statinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 199 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
174 cnc_stopophis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
175 cnc_sysinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
176 cnc_sysinfo_ex ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
177 cnc_t1info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
178 cnc_t2info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
179 cnc_toolnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
180 cnc_upend ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
181 cnc_upend4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
182 cnc_upload ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
183 cnc_upload4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
184 cnc_upstart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
185 cnc_upstart4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
186 cnc_verify ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
187 cnc_vrfend ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
188 cnc_vrfstart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
189 cnc_wr1length ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
190 cnc_wr1radius ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
191 cnc_wr1tlifedat2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
192 cnc_wr1tlifedata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
193 cnc_wr2length ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
194 cnc_wr2radius ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
195 cnc_wr2tlifedata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
196 cnc_wrcnttype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
197 cnc_wrcount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
198 cnc_wrcountr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
199 cnc_wrgrpinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
200 cnc_wrgrpinfo2 ○ ○ ○ － ○
201 cnc_wrgrpinfo3 ○ ○ ○ － ○
202 cnc_wrhissgnl3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
203 cnc_wrlife ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
204 cnc_wrmacro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
205 cnc_wrmacror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
206 cnc_wrmacror2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
207 cnc_wrmagazine ○ ○ ○ － ○
208 cnc_wrparam ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
209 cnc_wrparas ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
210 cnc_wrpdf_attr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
211 cnc_wrpdf_curdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
212 cnc_wrpitchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
213 cnc_wrpmacro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
214 cnc_wrpmacror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
215 cnc_wrpmacror2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
216 cnc_wrrelpos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
217 cnc_wrset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
218 cnc_wrsets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
219 cnc_wrt1info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
220 cnc_wrt2info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
221 cnc_wrtofs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
222 cnc_wrtofsr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 200 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
223 cnc_wrtool ○ ○ ○ － ○
224 cnc_wrtool_f2 ○ ○ ○ － ○
225 cnc_wrtool2 ○ ○ ○ － ○
226 cnc_wrtoolgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
227 cnc_wrtoolnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
228 cnc_wrwkcdshft ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
229 cnc_wrzofs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
230 cnc_wrzofsr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
231 cnc_pdf_rdmainpt ○ ○ ○ － ○
232 cnc_sdtsetchnl － － － － －
233 cnc_sdtclrchnl － － － － －
234 cnc_sdtstartsmpl － － － － －
235 cnc_sdtcancelsmpl － － － － －
236 cnc_sdtreadsmpl － － － － －
237 cnc_sdtendsmpl － － － － －
238 cnc_sdtread1shot － － － － －

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 cnc_absolute ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 cnc_accdecdly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 cnc_actf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 cnc_acts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 cnc_acts2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 cnc_adcnv ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 cnc_alarm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 cnc_alarm2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 cnc_clearophis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 cnc_clr5axpls － － － － － －
11 cnc_clrcntinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 cnc_delall ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 cnc_delete ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 cnc_delmagazine ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 cnc_deltlifedt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 cnc_deltlifegrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 cnc_deltool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 cnc_diagnosr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 cnc_diagnoss ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 cnc_distance ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 cnc_dnc2 － － － － － －

- 201 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
22 cnc_dncend2 － － － － － －
23 cnc_dncstart2 － － － － － －
24 cnc_download ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 cnc_download4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 cnc_dwnend ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 cnc_dwnend4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 cnc_dwnstart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 cnc_dwnstart4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 cnc_exaxisname2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 cnc_exeprgname ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 cnc_exeprgname2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 cnc_getfigure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 cnc_getpath ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 cnc_information ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 cnc_instlifedt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 cnc_loadtorq ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 cnc_machine ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 cnc_machine3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 cnc_modal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41 cnc_pdf_add ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 cnc_pdf_cond ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 cnc_pdf_del ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 cnc_pdf_rdmain ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 cnc_pdf_rename ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 cnc_pdf_slctmain ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 cnc_rd1length ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
48 cnc_rd1radius ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 cnc_rd1tlifedat2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 cnc_rd1tlifedata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 cnc_rd2length ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 cnc_rd2radius ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 cnc_rd2tlifedata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
54 cnc_rd5axmandt － － － － － －
55 cnc_rd5axovrlap － － － － － －
56 cnc_rdalmhisno ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
57 cnc_rdalmhisno3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 cnc_rdalmhistry3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59 cnc_rdalmhistry4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
60 cnc_rdalmhistry5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
61 cnc_rdalminfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
62 cnc_rdalmmsg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
63 cnc_rdalmmsg2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
64 cnc_rdaxisdata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
65 cnc_rdaxisname ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
66 cnc_rdcntover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
67 cnc_rdcnttype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
68 cnc_rdcommand ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
69 cnc_rdcount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
70 cnc_rddiaginfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 202 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
71 cnc_rddiagnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
72 cnc_rddynamic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
73 cnc_rdexchgtgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
74 cnc_rdexecprog ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
75 cnc_rdgcode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
76 cnc_rdgrpid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
77 cnc_rdgrpid2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
78 cnc_rdgrpinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
79 cnc_rdgrpinfo2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
80 cnc_rdgrpinfo3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
81 cnc_rdgrpinfo4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
82 cnc_rdhissgnl3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
83 cnc_rdjogdrun ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
84 cnc_rdlife ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
85 cnc_rdmacro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
86 cnc_rdmacroinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
87 cnc_rdmacror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
88 cnc_rdmacror2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
89 cnc_rdmagazine ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
90 cnc_rdmaxgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
91 cnc_rdmaxtool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
92 cnc_rdmovrlap － － － － － －
93 cnc_rdngrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
94 cnc_rdnspdl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
95 cnc_rdntool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
96 cnc_rdomhisno ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
97 cnc_rdomhistry2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
98 cnc_rdophisno ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
99 cnc_rdophisno3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100 cnc_rdophistry3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
101 cnc_rdophistry4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
102 cnc_rdopmsg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
103 cnc_rdopmsg2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
104 cnc_rdopmsg3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
105 cnc_rdparam ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
106 cnc_rdparanum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
107 cnc_rdparar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
108 cnc_rdpdf_alldir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
109 cnc_rdpdf_curdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
110 cnc_rdpdf_drive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
111 cnc_rdpdf_inf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
112 cnc_rdpdf_subdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
113 cnc_rdpdf_subdirn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
114 cnc_rdpitchinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
115 cnc_rdpitchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
116 cnc_rdpmacro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
117 cnc_rdpmacror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
118 cnc_rdpmacror2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
119 cnc_rdposition ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 203 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
120 cnc_rdprgnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
121 cnc_rdprogdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
122 cnc_rdprogdir2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
123 cnc_rdprogdir3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
124 cnc_rdprogdir4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
125 cnc_rdproginfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
126 cnc_rdptaxfunctablestatus － － － － － －
127 cnc_rdptaxitablestatus － － － － － －
128 cnc_rdptcnvalm － － － － － －
129 cnc_rdptcnvinfo － － － － － －
130 cnc_rdptexedistalm － － － － － －
131 cnc_rdptsptablestatus － － － － － －
132 cnc_rdseqnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
133 cnc_rdset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
134 cnc_rdsetinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
135 cnc_rdsetnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
136 cnc_rdsetr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
137 cnc_rdspdlname ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
138 cnc_rdspeed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
139 cnc_rdspload ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
140 cnc_rdspmeter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
141 cnc_rdsvmeter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
142 cnc_rdsyshard ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
143 cnc_rdsyssoft3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
144 cnc_rdtlgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
145 cnc_rdtlinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
146 cnc_rdtltool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
147 cnc_rdtlusegrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
148 cnc_rdtofs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
149 cnc_rdtofsinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
150 cnc_rdtofsinfo2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
151 cnc_rdtofsr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
152 cnc_rdtool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
153 cnc_rdtool_f2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
154 cnc_rdtoolgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
155 cnc_rdtoolrng ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
156 cnc_rdusegrpid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
157 cnc_rdusetlno ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
158 cnc_rdwkcdshft ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
159 cnc_rdzofs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
160 cnc_rdzofsr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
161 cnc_regmagazine ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
162 cnc_regtool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
163 cnc_regtool_f2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
164 cnc_relative ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
165 cnc_search ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
166 cnc_seqsrch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
167 cnc_setpath ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
168 cnc_settimer － － － － － －

- 204 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
169 cnc_skip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
170 cnc_srvdelay ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
171 cnc_startophis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
172 cnc_startptcnv － － － － － －
173 cnc_statinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
174 cnc_stopophis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
175 cnc_sysinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
176 cnc_sysinfo_ex ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
177 cnc_t1info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
178 cnc_t2info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
179 cnc_toolnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
180 cnc_upend ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
181 cnc_upend4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
182 cnc_upload ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
183 cnc_upload4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
184 cnc_upstart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
185 cnc_upstart4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
186 cnc_verify ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
187 cnc_vrfend ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
188 cnc_vrfstart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
189 cnc_wr1length ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
190 cnc_wr1radius ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
191 cnc_wr1tlifedat2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
192 cnc_wr1tlifedata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
193 cnc_wr2length ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
194 cnc_wr2radius ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
195 cnc_wr2tlifedata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
196 cnc_wrcnttype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
197 cnc_wrcount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
198 cnc_wrcountr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
199 cnc_wrgrpinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
200 cnc_wrgrpinfo2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
201 cnc_wrgrpinfo3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
202 cnc_wrhissgnl3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
203 cnc_wrlife ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
204 cnc_wrmacro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
205 cnc_wrmacror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
206 cnc_wrmacror2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
207 cnc_wrmagazine ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
208 cnc_wrparam ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
209 cnc_wrparas ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
210 cnc_wrpdf_attr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
211 cnc_wrpdf_curdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
212 cnc_wrpitchr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
213 cnc_wrpmacro ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
214 cnc_wrpmacror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
215 cnc_wrpmacror2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
216 cnc_wrrelpos ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
217 cnc_wrset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 205 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
218 cnc_wrsets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
219 cnc_wrt1info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
220 cnc_wrt2info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
221 cnc_wrtofs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
222 cnc_wrtofsr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
223 cnc_wrtool ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
224 cnc_wrtool_f2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
225 cnc_wrtool2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
226 cnc_wrtoolgrp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
227 cnc_wrtoolnum ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
228 cnc_wrwkcdshft ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
229 cnc_wrzofs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
230 cnc_wrzofsr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
231 cnc_pdf_rdmainpt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
232 cnc_sdtsetchnl － － － － － －
233 cnc_sdtclrchnl － － － － － －
234 cnc_sdtstartsmpl － － － － － －
235 cnc_sdtcancelsmpl － － － － － －
236 cnc_sdtreadsmpl － － － － － －
237 cnc_sdtendsmpl － － － － － －
238 cnc_sdtread1shot － － － － － －

- 206 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.6 CNC Window Library ( for Laser / Punch )

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 cnc_rddischarge － － － － －
2 cnc_rd1punchtl_ex － － － － －
3 cnc_rd2punchtl_ex － － － － －
4 cnc_rdacttlzone － － － － －
5 cnc_rddischrgalm － － － － －
6 cnc_rdlactnum － － － － －
7 cnc_rdlagslt － － － － －
8 cnc_rdlcmddat － － － － －
9 cnc_rdlcmmt － － － － －
10 cnc_rdldsplc － － － － －
11 cnc_rdldsplc2 － － － － －
12 cnc_rdledgprc － － － － －
13 cnc_rdlerrz － － － － －
14 cnc_rdlppfbdt － － － － －
15 cnc_rdlprcprc － － － － －
16 cnc_rdlpscdpwrctl － － － － －
17 cnc_rdlpwrctrl － － － － －
18 cnc_rdlpwrdat － － － － －
19 cnc_rdlpwrdty － － － － －
20 cnc_rdlpwrslt － － － － －
21 cnc_rdmngtime － － － － －
22 cnc_rdmultitldt － － － － －
23 cnc_rdpscdedge － － － － －
24 cnc_rdpscdedge2 － － － － －
25 cnc_rdpscdpirc － － － － －
26 cnc_rdpscdproc － － － － －

- 207 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
27 cnc_rdpwofsthis － － － － －
28 cnc_rdsafetyzone － － － － －
29 cnc_rdsetzone － － － － －
30 cnc_rdtlctldata － － － － －
31 cnc_rdtooldata － － － － －
32 cnc_rdtoolinfo － － － － －
33 cnc_rdtoolzone － － － － －
34 cnc_wrlagslt － － － － －
35 cnc_wrldsplc － － － － －
36 cnc_wrldsplc2 － － － － －
37 cnc_wrledgprc － － － － －
38 cnc_wrlppfbdt － － － － －
39 cnc_wrlprcprc － － － － －
40 cnc_wrlpscdpwrctl － － － － －
41 cnc_wrlpwrctrl － － － － －
42 cnc_wrlpwrdty － － － － －
43 cnc_wrlpwrslt － － － － －
44 cnc_wrmngtime － － － － －
45 cnc_wrmultitldt － － － － －
46 cnc_wrpscdedge － － － － －
47 cnc_wrpscdedge2 － － － － －
48 cnc_wrpscdpirc － － － － －
49 cnc_wrpscdproc － － － － －
50 cnc_wrpunchtl_ex － － － － －
51 cnc_wrsafetyzone － － － － －
52 cnc_wrsetzone － － － － －
53 cnc_wrtlctldata － － － － －
54 cnc_wrtooldata － － － － －
55 cnc_wrtoolzone － － － － －

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 cnc_rddischarge ○ ○ ○ － － －
2 cnc_rd1punchtl_ex － － － ○ － －
3 cnc_rd2punchtl_ex － － － ○ － －
4 cnc_rdacttlzone － － － ○ － －
5 cnc_rddischrgalm ○ ○ ○ － － －
6 cnc_rdlactnum ○ ○ ○ － － －
7 cnc_rdlagslt ○ ○ ○ － － －
8 cnc_rdlcmddat ○ ○ ○ － － －

- 208 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
9 cnc_rdlcmmt ○ ○ ○ － － －
10 cnc_rdldsplc ○ ○ ○ － － －
11 cnc_rdldsplc2 ○ ○ ○ － － －
12 cnc_rdledgprc ○ ○ ○ － － －
13 cnc_rdlerrz ○ ○ ○ － － －
14 cnc_rdlppfbdt ○ ○ ○ － － －
15 cnc_rdlprcprc ○ ○ ○ － － －
16 cnc_rdlpscdpwrctl ○ ○ ○ － － －
17 cnc_rdlpwrctrl ○ ○ ○ － － －
18 cnc_rdlpwrdat ○ ○ ○ － － －
19 cnc_rdlpwrdty ○ ○ ○ － － －
20 cnc_rdlpwrslt ○ ○ ○ － － －
21 cnc_rdmngtime ○ ○ ○ － － －
22 cnc_rdmultitldt － － － ○ － －
23 cnc_rdpscdedge ○ ○ ○ － － －
24 cnc_rdpscdedge2 ○ ○ ○ － － －
25 cnc_rdpscdpirc ○ ○ ○ － － －
26 cnc_rdpscdproc ○ ○ ○ － － －
27 cnc_rdpwofsthis ○ ○ ○ － － －
28 cnc_rdsafetyzone － － － ○ － －
29 cnc_rdsetzone － － － ○ － －
30 cnc_rdtlctldata － － － ○ － －
31 cnc_rdtooldata － － － ○ － －
32 cnc_rdtoolinfo － － － ○ － －
33 cnc_rdtoolzone － － － ○ － －
34 cnc_wrlagslt ○ ○ ○ － － －
35 cnc_wrldsplc ○ ○ ○ － － －
36 cnc_wrldsplc2 ○ ○ ○ － － －
37 cnc_wrledgprc ○ ○ ○ － － －
38 cnc_wrlppfbdt ○ ○ ○ － － －
39 cnc_wrlprcprc ○ ○ ○ － － －
40 cnc_wrlpscdpwrctl ○ ○ ○ － － －
41 cnc_wrlpwrctrl ○ ○ ○ － － －
42 cnc_wrlpwrdty ○ ○ ○ － － －
43 cnc_wrlpwrslt ○ ○ ○ － － －
44 cnc_wrmngtime ○ ○ ○ － － －
45 cnc_wrmultitldt － － － ○ － －
46 cnc_wrpscdedge ○ ○ ○ － － －
47 cnc_wrpscdedge2 ○ ○ ○ － － －
48 cnc_wrpscdpirc ○ ○ ○ － － －
49 cnc_wrpscdproc ○ ○ ○ － － －
50 cnc_wrpunchtl_ex － － － ○ － －
51 cnc_wrsafetyzone － － － ○ － －
52 cnc_wrsetzone － － － ○ － －
53 cnc_wrtlctldata － － － ○ － －
54 cnc_wrtooldata － － － ○ － －
55 cnc_wrtoolzone － － － ○ － －

- 209 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.7 PMC Window Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 pmc_get_current_pmc_unit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 pmc_get_number_of_pmc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 pmc_get_pmc_unit_types ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 pmc_getpmcptr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 pmc_isvalidpmcptr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 pmc_kpmsiz ○ ○ ○ － ○
7 pmc_rdkpm ○ ○ ○ － ○
8 pmc_rdpcmsg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 pmc_rdpmcchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 pmc_rdpmclong ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 pmc_rdpmcrng ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 pmc_rdpmcshort ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 pmc_select_pmc_unit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 pmc_wrkpm ○ ○ ○ － ○
15 pmc_wrpmcchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 pmc_wrpmclong ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 pmc_wrpmcrng ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 pmc_wrpmcshort ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 pmc_rdpcmlmsg － － － － －
20 pmc_rdprmstart － ○ － － －
21 pmc_rdpmcparam － ○ － － －
22 pmc_rdprmend － ○ － － －
23 pmc_wrprmstart － ○ － － －
24 pmc_wrpmcparam － ○ － － －
25 pmc_wrprmend － ○ － － －

- 210 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 pmc_get_current_pmc_unit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 pmc_get_number_of_pmc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 pmc_get_pmc_unit_types ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 pmc_getpmcptr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 pmc_isvalidpmcptr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 pmc_kpmsiz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 pmc_rdkpm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 pmc_rdpcmsg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 pmc_rdpmcchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 pmc_rdpmclong ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 pmc_rdpmcrng ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 pmc_rdpmcshort ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 pmc_select_pmc_unit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 pmc_wrkpm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 pmc_wrpmcchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 pmc_wrpmclong ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 pmc_wrpmcrng ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 pmc_wrpmcshort ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 pmc_rdpcmlmsg － － － － － －
20 pmc_rdprmstart － － － － － －
21 pmc_rdpmcparam － － － － － －
22 pmc_rdprmend － － － － － －
23 pmc_wrprmstart － － － － － －
24 pmc_wrpmcparam － － － － － －
25 pmc_wrprmend － － － － － －

- 211 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.8 MDI Operation Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 aux_mdi_altmatrix － － － － －
2 aux_mdi_clrbuf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 aux_mdi_control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 aux_mdi_getmatrix － － － － －
5 aux_mdi_getstat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 aux_mdi_putc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 aux_mdi_putmatrix － － － － －
8 aux_mdi_repeat － － － － －
9 aux_mdi_rstmatrix － － － － －
10 aux_mdi_write ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 aux_mdi_altmatrix － － － － － －
2 aux_mdi_clrbuf ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 aux_mdi_control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 aux_mdi_getmatrix － － － － － －

- 212 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
5 aux_mdi_getstat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 aux_mdi_putc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 aux_mdi_putmatrix － － － － － －
8 aux_mdi_repeat － － － － － －
9 aux_mdi_rstmatrix － － － － － －
10 aux_mdi_write ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9.5.9 CRT Operation Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 crt_2ndcursor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 crt_closegr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 crt_cncscrn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 crt_fchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 crt_fstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 crt_getcgpttn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 crt_getcncpalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 crt_getcurscrn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 crt_gettextattr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 crt_gettextimg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 crt_gettype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 crt_graphic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 crt_isnewscrn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 crt_mapuch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 crt_opengr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 213 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
16 crt_pcinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 crt_puttextimg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 crt_readfkey ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 crt_reguserchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 crt_set6chmode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 crt_setallpalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 crt_setgraphpage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 crt_setmode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 crt_setpalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 crt_setscrlarea ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 crt_setswt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 crt_settextattr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 crt_setuserscrn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 crt_setuserskey ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 win_activate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 win_close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 win_col ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 win_full ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 win_getstat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 win_hide ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 win_info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 win_move ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 win_open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 win_redraw ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 win_select ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41 win_setfrm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 win_setttl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 win_show ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 win_size ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 win_window ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 vwin_close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 vwin_hide ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
48 vwin_info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 vwin_open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 vwin_select ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 vwin_show ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 crt_chgvskpage ○ ○ ○ － ○
53 crt_chgdspsize － － － － －

- 214 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 crt_2ndcursor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 crt_closegr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 crt_cncscrn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 crt_fchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 crt_fstr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 crt_getcgpttn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 crt_getcncpalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 crt_getcurscrn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 crt_gettextattr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 crt_gettextimg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 crt_gettype ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 crt_graphic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 crt_isnewscrn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 crt_mapuch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 crt_opengr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 crt_pcinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 crt_puttextimg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 crt_readfkey ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 crt_reguserchar ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20 crt_set6chmode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 crt_setallpalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 crt_setgraphpage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23 crt_setmode ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24 crt_setpalette ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 crt_setscrlarea ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 crt_setswt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 crt_settextattr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28 crt_setuserscrn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29 crt_setuserskey ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 win_activate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 win_close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32 win_col ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 win_full ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 win_getstat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 win_hide ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
36 win_info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 win_move ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
38 win_open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39 win_redraw ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 win_select ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 215 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
41 win_setfrm ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42 win_setttl ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43 win_show ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
44 win_size ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45 win_window ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 vwin_close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 vwin_hide ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
48 vwin_info ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
49 vwin_open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 vwin_select ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 vwin_show ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 crt_chgvskpage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 crt_chgdspsize － － － － － －

- 216 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.10 File Operation Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 aux_file_format － － － － －
2 aux_file_memcinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 aux_file_mount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 aux_file_unmount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 aux_file_usbinfo － － － － －
6 _dos_findfirst32 － － － － －
7 _dos_findnext32 － － － － －

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 aux_file_format － － － － － －
2 aux_file_memcinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 aux_file_mount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 aux_file_unmount ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 aux_file_usbinfo － － － － － －
6 _dos_findfirst32 － － － － － －
7 _dos_findnext32 － － － － － －

- 217 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.11 Serial Communication Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 rs_buffer － － － － －
2 rs_close － － － － －
3 rs_getc － － － － －
4 rs_open － － － － －
5 rs_putc － － － － －
6 rs_read － － － － －
7 rs_status － － － － －
8 rs_wait － － － － －
9 rs_write － － － － －

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 rs_buffer － － － － － －
2 rs_close － － － － － －
3 rs_getc － － － － － －

- 218 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
4 rs_open － － － － － －
5 rs_putc － － － － － －
6 rs_read － － － － － －
7 rs_status － － － － － －
8 rs_wait － － － － － －
9 rs_write － － － － － －

9.5.12 Task Control Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 os_clar_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 os_delt_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 os_delt_sem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 os_make_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 os_make_sem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 os_puls_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 os_set_tim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 os_show_tim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 os_sign_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 os_sign_sem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 os_strt_wtsk ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 os_sync_tim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 os_wait_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 os_wait_sem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 os_wait_tim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
- 219 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 os_clar_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 os_delt_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 os_delt_sem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 os_make_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 os_make_sem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 os_puls_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 os_set_tim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 os_show_tim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 os_sign_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 os_sign_sem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 os_strt_wtsk ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 os_sync_tim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 os_wait_flg ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 os_wait_sem ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 os_wait_tim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 220 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.13 FCA Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 fca_bye － － － － －
2 fca_close － － － － －
3 fca_delete － － － － －
4 fca_fclose － － － － －
5 fca_fopen － － － － －
6 fca_getc － － － － －
7 fca_open － － － － －
8 fca_putc － － － － －
9 fca_read － － － － －
10 fca_readdir － － － － －
11 fca_remains － － － － －
12 fca_rename － － － － －
13 fca_setparam － － － － －
14 fca_status － － － － －
15 fca_write － － － － －

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

- 221 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 fca_bye － － － － － －
2 fca_close － － － － － －
3 fca_delete － － － － － －
4 fca_fclose － － － － － －
5 fca_fopen － － － － － －
6 fca_getc － － － － － －
7 fca_open － － － － － －
8 fca_putc － － － － － －
9 fca_read － － － － － －
10 fca_readdir － － － － － －
11 fca_remains － － － － － －
12 fca_rename － － － － － －
13 fca_setparam － － － － － －
14 fca_status － － － － － －
15 fca_write － － － － － －

9.5.14 F-ROM Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 aux_from_close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 aux_from_getc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 aux_from_getdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 aux_from_getinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 aux_from_gets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 aux_from_moveptr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 222 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
7 aux_from_open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 aux_from_read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 aux_from_select ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 aux_from_close ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 aux_from_getc ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 aux_from_getdir ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 aux_from_getinfo ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 aux_from_gets ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 aux_from_moveptr ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 aux_from_open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 aux_from_read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 aux_from_select ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 223 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.15 Touch-panel Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31i 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 aux_tpl_read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 aux_tpl_invalskey ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

No. 0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

Name
version version version version version version
1 aux_tpl_read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 aux_tpl_invalskey ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

- 224 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.16 FTP Transfer Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31i 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 eth_putopen － － － － －
2 eth_put － － － － －
3 eth_putclose － － － － －
4 eth_getopen － － － － －
5 eth_get － － － － －
6 eth_getclose － － － － －

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 eth_putopen － － － － － －
2 eth_put － － － － － －
3 eth_putclose － － － － － －
4 eth_getopen － － － － － －
5 eth_get － － － － － －
6 eth_getclose － － － － － －

- 225 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.5.17 High Level / Middle Level Task Control Library

31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
0i-MODEL D
0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus

31iA 30iB 35iB 0iD 0iF

No. Name
version version version version version
1 cnc_hldata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 rettask ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 cnc_mldata － － － － －

0i-LF Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
PMi-MODEL A

0iLF 30iLB 31iLB 31iPB 31iWB PMiA

No. Name
version version version version version version
1 cnc_hldata ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 rettask ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 cnc_mldata － － － － － －

- 226 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.6 EXECUTE THE C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR APPLICATION

In this chapter, setting and how to execute the C Language Executor application on
CNC GUIDE are described by using a sample application.
Hereafter, we assume that CNC GUIDE has been installed in the directory
C:\Program Files (x86)\FANUC. Additionally, E drive is assumed to be DVD of CNC
GUIDE.

9.6.1 Necessary Option, Parameter and How to Set

The required setting for executing the C Language Executor application on CNC
GUIDE is described in this chapter.

Option
“MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR” option must be enable for
using C Laguage Executor on CNC GUIDE.
To enable this function, the option setting tool (OptionSetting.exe) is started after
starting CNC GUIDE.
Check the check box of the following two options and finish the option setting tool.
And restart CNC GUIDE.

31i-MODEL A
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
( one of 1Mbyte / 2Mbyte / 3Mbyte / 4Mbyte / 5Mbyte / 6Mbyte / 8Mbyte )

0i-MODEL D
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
( Machining Center System : one of 2Mbyte/4Mbyte/6Mbyte )
( Lathe System : one of 1Mbyte/2Mbyte/3Mbyte/4Mbyte/5Mbyte/6Mbyte/8Mbyte )

30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
0i-MODEL F
31i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
- 227 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31i-MODEL B5
32i-MODEL B
PMi-MODEL A
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
(one of 2Mbyte/4Mbyte/6Mbyte/8Mbyte)

30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B Plus
The following options are standard function.
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8Mbyte

To use these parameters, the following parameters are set.

-Parameter ECE (No.24531#0) = 0

0i-MODEL F Plus
The following options are standard function.
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6Mbyte

0i-LF Plus
The following options are standard function.
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
(one of 6Mbyte /8Mbyte /12Mbyte /16Mbyte)

30i-LB
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
(one of 512Kbyte /2Mbyte /4Mbyte /6Mbyte /8Mbyte /12Mbyte)

30i-LB Plus
The following options are standard function.
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
(one of 8Mbyte /12Mbyte /16Mbyte)

To use these parameters, the following parameters are set.

-Parameter ECE (No.24531#0) = 0

Parameter
- 228 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

To use the C Language Executor, the following parameters are set.

• Parameter 8661 (variable area size) 59

• Parameter 8662 (size of SRAM Disk) 4
• Parameter 8781 (size of DRAM used by C language executor)
16

9.6.2 Start of the C Executor Application

How to execute of the C Language Executor application is described in this chapter.

0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
PMi-MODEL A

The C Language Executor application that can be started on the CNC GUIDE is
distributed as 6
DLL files. ( cex1.dll, cex2.dll, cex3.dll, cex4.dll, cex5.dll, cex6.dll )

0i-MODEL D

- 229 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

The C Language Executor application that can be started on the CNC GUIDE is
distributed as 5
DLL files. ( cex1.dll, cex2.dll, cex3.dll, cex4.dll, cex5.dll )

The C Language Executor application can be started on the CNC GUIDE by setting
according to the explanation in chapter 9.6.1 and putting these DLL files on the folder
of the using machine structure.

- 230 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Execute and Arrangement of module

0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
PMi-MODEL A

If the CNC GUIDE is running, end it once.

Copy 6 DLL files in ”E:\Samples\C language Executor\for_VC2010\FS31i\products”
of the DVD onto the folder of the machine structure that has been selected in the
machine structure setting tool (MachineSetup.exe).

0i-MODEL D
If the CNC GUIDE is running, end it once.
Copy 5 DLL files in ”E:\Samples\C language Executor\for_VC2010\FS0i-D\products”
of the DVD onto the folder of the machine structure that has been selected in the
machine structure setting tool (MachineSetup.exe).

For example, when the machine structure of 1path-3axis-M has been selected in the
machine structure setting tool (MachineSetup.exe), DLL is copied in the following
folders

C:\Program files\NCGuide\MachineSetting\1path-3axis-M

When the copy is completed, CNC GUIDE is started.

- 231 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

When CNC GUIDE is started, the C Language Executor application is started.The

screen like
Fig. 9.6.2 (a) is displayed.
In this application, when the one of the numeric key 1-4 is pressed, the one side of
the quadrangle corresponding to each figure is drawn, When the key is pressed
again, the side is deleted. When the numeric key 5 is pressed, all sides are deleted.

Fig. 9.6.2 (a) Execute the sample application

NOTE
Execute DLL files for 31iA version by CNC GUIDE of 31iA
version, 30iB version, 30iB 32AX version, 30iB 48AX version,
30iB Plus version, 30iB Plus 72AX version, 31iB version, 31iB
Plus version, 35iB version, 35iB 16AX version, 31iLB version,
31iPB version, 31iWB version, 0iF version, 0iF Plus version,
31iB5 version, 31iB5 Plus version, 32iB version, 32iB Plus
version, PMiA version.
Execute DLL files for 0iD version by CNC GUIDE of 0iD
version.

NOTE
Execute DLL files for 0iD version by CNC GUIDE of 0iD

version.
Execute DLL files for 31iA version by using the CNC GUIDE

other than 0iD version.

- 232 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.7 COMPILING AND DEBUGGING OF THE C LANGUAGE

EXECUTOR APPLICATION

About this Chapter

First of all, the preparation of developing the C Language Executor application by

Visual C++ is described.
Next, the making the C Language Executor application from the sample source code
of attachment and how to execute it are described.
Finally, how to debug the source code is described.

- 233 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.7.1 Preparation

The preparation of making and executing the sample application and is described in
this chapter.

Installing Visual C++

The correspondence compiler software in Chapter 9.3 is installed.
How to install Visual C++2010 Express Edition which is one of the applicable
compiler softwares is explained in Chapter 9.10. Install other compiler softwares
respectively according to how to install the compiler software.

The following explains the procedure of the case of using Visual C++ 2010 Express
Edition.
In the different part in the using compiler software, please replace with each condition
of compiler software and read the procedure.

Copy of model

0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
PMi-MODEL A

Copy E:\Samples\C language Executor\for_VC2010\FS31i in DVD on the hard disk

of the PC.

- 234 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

This sample application can be used also with 30i-MODEL B, 30i-MODEL B 32AX,
30i-MODEL B 48AX, 30i-MODEL B Plus, 30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX, 31i-MODEL
B, 31i-MODEL B Plus, 35i-MODEL B, 35i-MODEL B 16AX, 0i-LF Plus, 30i-LB,
30i-LB Plus, 31i-LB, 31i-PB and 31i-WB, 0i-MODEL F, 0i-MODEL F Plus,
31i-MODEL B5, 31i-MODEL B5 Plus, 32i-MODEL B, 32i-MODEL B Plus,
PMi-MODEL A.

0i-MODEL D
Copy E:\Samples\C language Executor\fpr_VC2010\FS0i-D in DVD on the hard disk
of the PC.

- 235 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

The content of the folder is as follows.

CExe_Sample―＋― include ：Header file to which it refers at the time of the Build is stored.
＋― lib ：The library file used when Build is done is stored.
＋― products ：After Build is done, DLL is made for execution in this folder.
＋― projects ：The file that manages information on the whole project is stored.
＋― win_src ：A source code that is necessary for making DLL is put.
＋― user ：Put the source code that the user made.
Add the source code in this folder when you use this model.

It explains assuming that these files are copied onto C:\Project\CExe_Sample at the
following.

Release of read only attribute

Immediately after copying files from DVD, it is impossible to modify because the
files are read only attribute. To release the read only attribute, please execute
readonly_clear.bat from the C:\Project\CExe_Sample folder.

Start of Visual C++

When \Project\CExe_Sample\projects\CExe_Dll.sln is double-clicked, Visual C++

starts and the sample project opens.

Fig.9.7.1 (a) The sample project was opened.

- 236 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.7.2 Making and Execution of C Language Executor

This chapter explains the sample program making and method of execution.

Compilation of source and link of execution modules

Stop CNC GUIDE before executing the following operation.

Click [ Build (B) of the solution ] of [ Build (B) ] menu. Information on the status of
the compilation like the message etc. to show that Build succeeded in [ Output ]
window is displayed.

Fig9.7.2 (a) Execution and result of Build

Copy of execution file of C Language Executor application

0i-MODEL F
0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
31i-MODEL A
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
- 237 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
PMi-MODEL A

Six files of "cex1.dll", "cex2.dll", "cex3.dll", "cex4.dll", "cex5.dll", and "cex6.dll" are
made in "C:\Project\CExe_Sample\products\debug" folder when succeeding in Build.

0i-MODEL D
Five files of "cex1.dll", "cex2.dll", "cex3.dll", "cex4.dll", "cex5.dll" are made in
"C:\Project\CExe_Sample\products\debug" folder when succeeding in Build.

Copy these files onto the folder of machine structure that has been selected in the
machine structure setting tool (MachineSetup.exe).
Read these DLL when CNC GUIDE starts by the machine composition of
"1path-3axis-M" and copy it onto this folder, and execute the C Language Executor
application.

NOTE
DLL made at Build ( 6 files for 31iA version, 5 files for 0iD
version) must use the same project and DLL must be made
at a time.
Do not mix DLL by different Build.
Execute DLL for 31iA version by CNC GUIDE of 31iA
version, 30iB version, 30iB 32AX version, 30iB 48AX
version, 30iB Plus version, 30iB Plus 72AX version, 31iB
version, 31iB Plus version, 0iF version, 0iF Plus version,
35iB version, 35iB 16AX version, 31iLB version or 31iPB
version, 31iB5 version, 31iB5 Plus version, 32iB version,
32iB Plus version, Execute DLL for 0iD version by CNC
GUIDE of 0iD version

- 238 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

NOTE
DLL made at Build ( 6 files for 31iA version, 5 files for 0iD
version) must use the same project and DLL must be made
at a time.
Do not mix DLL by different Build.
Execute DLL files for 0iD version by CNC GUIDE of 0iD
version.
Execute DLL files for 31iA version by using the CNC GUIDE
other than 0iD version.

Execution

Start CNC GUIDE. Display is as shown in Fig. 9.7.2 (b).

This C Language Executor application draws each side of the quadrangle
corresponding to either of pushed numeric key 1-4, and when the key is pushed again,
it is deleted the side there. When numeric key 5 is pushed, every side is deleted.

Fig. 9.7.2 (b) Execute sample application

- 239 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Example of editing program

This chapter explains editing of the source code and the procedure for adding a new
function to the application.
Stop the running CNC GUIDE before the edit begins.
Select the source code of the edited program. When the investigated source code is
double-clicked from [Solution Explorer], the source code is displayed. Select
tsk1main.c in cex1 project at this time. Add “Printf("Hello\n")” to tsk1main.c in the
“for loop” of the main function as follows.

/* title display */
draw_title() ;

printf("Hello\n"); /* ADD */

/* key data read */

get_keyin() ;

Afterwards, Build it according to the same procedure described before. Next, copy it
to the machine composition folder that uses the made DLL. Execute CNC GUIDE at
the last. The character of "Hello" is displayed as shown in Fig. 9.7.2 (c).

Fig. 9.7.2 (c) Sample application after it edits it

9.7.3 Debugging Execution Example

The program is stopped by using the breakpoint during executing the program in
debug mode, and the value of the variable at that time can be examined.
Moreover, the program can be executed from the stopping point step by step, and the
flow of the processing of the program can be examined.
This chapter explains the procedure by using the sample program.

- 240 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Preparation
In order to execute the debugged application, it is necessary to specify the work
directory to debug the application and executed file. It explains the setting method for
that.
1. Stop it when CNC GUIDE starts.
2. Right-click in the project of cex1 in the solution Explorer, and select
[Properties].Then, cex1 property page dialog opens.

Fig 9.7.3 (a) The property of the cex1 project is selected.

3. Select [Configuration properties] - [Debugging] of [cex1 property pages] dialog,

and click [Command] once. Then, the button with the downwards arrows to a
right edge of the input field appears.
4. When the button is clicked, the pull-down menu is displayed.
5. Select [Reference] from among the pull-down menu. [Debugged Program]
dialog is displayed. Register the execution file name of CNC GUIDE by using
it.
6. The following string is set to the [Command Argument]. “/CEXE_PAUSE”
7. As for [Working Directory], register the directory with the execution file of
CNC GUIDE] in the same way.
8. [Attach] changes to [YES].
9. [Debugger Type] changes to [Native Only].
Finish the setting operation by pushing [OK] button after [Apply (A)] button in lower
right is pushed when you want to finish every operation.

- 241 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.7.3 (b) Property of cex1 project

Setting of breakpoint

Processing can be stopped at the set line when Breakpoint is set in the source code,
and it is possible to change the mode into the interruption mode. The value of the
variable when the execution is stopped can be examined, and the processing can be
executed from the line one by one, and the flow of processing can be analyzed.
The following three methods exist to set or to release the breakpoint to the source
code.
1. Right-click in the line that is wanted Setting / release, and select [Breakpoint
(B)]-[Insertion of the breakpoint (R)] from the menu that appears at that time.
2. Move the cursor to the line that is wanted Setting / release, and click [Setting /
release of breakpoint (G)] of [Debugging (D)] menu.
3. Click the area at the left of the code line.
The breakpoint can be added even by each method. Add the breakpoint to the line
written, cur_scrn = crt_getcurscrn( ); of the main function at this time. When the
breakpoint is added, a red circle is displayed in the line added like Fig 9.7.3 (a).

- 242 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.7.3 (a) breakpoint

Start of debugging

This chapter explains the method to start debug.

First of all, start CNC GUIDE.
Afterwards, return to Visual C++, and click [Debugging Beginning (S)] of
[Debugging (D)] menu or push the F5 key. Then, the debugger of Visual C++ starts,
and debugging starts.

When the program reaches the line of the breakpoint, the program enters an
interruption mode. An yellow arrow at the left of the code line shows the line
executed next.

- 243 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.7.3 (b) It stopped by the breakpoint.

Display of variable when debugging

Right-click in the variable that wants to be examined, and click [Addition of the watch
type] when you examine the value of the variable executing debugging. Then, the
variable is displayed in [Watch window]. The drag of the variable can be done to
[Watch] window. Click [Window] - [Watch] of the [Debug] menu to display the
[Watch] Window.

Fig 9.7.3 (c) [Watch] Window

Display the value of the variable that exists in the scope of the line executed by a
present function in [Autos] window. Click [Window] - [Autos] of the [Debug] menu
to display [Autos] window.

- 244 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.7.3 (d) [Autos] window

Display the variable and the value of a present function in [Locals] window. Click
[Window] - [Locals] of the [Debug] menu to display [Locals] window.

Fig 9.7.3 (e) [Locals] window

Step execution of program

To execute the code one by one, the three commands for the following step executions
are prepared in Visual C++. An interruption mode should be selected to execute these
steps while debugging it.

[Step In]
Order to execute the following code line of the stopped line. The executingn point
moves to the head of the function when the function call is included in the line. This
operation is executed in the interruption mode by clicking [Step In] of the [Debug]
menu or pushing F11 key.

[Step Over]
Order to execute the following code line of the stopped line as well as the Step In.
However, stop at the next of the following line of the function without moving in the
function after executing the function even if the function call is included in the line.
This operation is executed in the interruption mode by clicking [Step Over] of the
[Debug] menu or to push F10 key.

- 245 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

[Step Out]
Stop by the first line outside of the function after executing all of remaining function
that has stopped now. This operaiotn is executed in the interruption mode by clicking
[Step Out] of the [Debug] menu or to push Shift key + F11 key.

Stop of debugging

Debugging is finished to click [Debug Stop] on the debugging menu or to push Shift +
F5 key.

- 246 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.8 COMPILE ENVIRONMENT

9.8.1 Relation between C Language Executor Task and Visual C++

Project

When C Language Executor application for CNC is made, the module which
composes the task is described in makefile as follows.

TASK1 = main.o display.o

TASK2 = comm.o
TASK3 = alarm.o
#TASK4 =
#TASK5 =

In Visual C++, the project is used to compose the task.

The project is a unit by which the source code etc. are brought together in Visual C++.
The project can be seen in [Solution Explorer] window. It is displayed as shown in
Fig. 9.8.1 (a) in the compile environment of 31iA version and from cex1 to cex6 in
the figure is a project.There is no project of cex6 for 0i version.

Fig 9.8.1 (a) Solution Explorer

These projects correspond to the task respectively.

Note
The project of cex6 in the compile environment of 31iA version is not used.
Please do not delete nor change the source included in prototype.

- 247 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.8.1 (b) Relation between task and project

Adding the file to the project means adding the module of the file to the task
corresponding to the project.
For instance, when source code example.c is added to the cex1 project, it means that
example.c is added to the main task.

Moreover, when one module is used by two or more tasks, describe in makefile as
follows.

TASK1: task1main.o example.o

TASK5: task5main.o example.o

To do similar with Visual C++, the file is added to each project as shown in Fig 9.8.1
(c).

- 248 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.8.1 (c) Solution Explorer

9.8.2 Debug Build and Release Build

There are two types of build, Release build and Debug build.

In case of Release build, when the execution file is generated, information for
debugging is not generated. Therefore, it is not possible to debug.
However, the size of an executable file becomes small and the execution speed
improves because the program is optimized.

In case of Deug build, when the execution file is generated, debugging information is
generated. In the source code debugging, this debugging information is used.

In usual development, the execution file is made by debug build. And when C
language executor application of CNC GUIDE for the distribution is made, the
execution file is made by Release build.

Switching of Debug build and Release build can be executed by the pull-down menu
in Fig 9.8.2 (d).

Fig 9.8.2 (d) Switching of Debug build and Release build

- 249 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.9 ADDITIONAL PROCEDURE OF EXISTING SOURCE CODE

This chapter explains the procedure by which the source code which has been made
by now is added to the project.

9.9.1 Copy of Source Code

The source code which has been used up to now is copied from the work directory of
the compilation environment of CNC to C:\Project\NC_Sample\user.

9.9.2 Addition of Source Code to Project

Select the project in Solution Explorer to add the source code, then right-click and
select [Add] - [Existing item].
The dialog box [Addition of existing item] will be opened. Add the source code in
C:\Project\NC_Sample\user.

Fig 9.9.2 (a) Dialog box [Addition of existing item]

When the addition of the source code ends by all projects, please execute [Edit] of
source code, [Build], move the DLL files, [Execute] and [Debug] as well as a little
while ago.

NOTE
tsk6main.c is not included in the source code of the
sample project for 0iD version.

- 250 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.9.3 Modification of Source Code

It is necessary to modify some to operate the source code made for C Language
Executor application for CNC by CNC GUIDE. Please refer to Chapter 9.4 for details.

- 251 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.10 REFERENCE1 : THE USAGES OF VISUAL C++ 2010 EXPRESS

EDITION

You can make applications that simulate C Language xecutor by using Visual C++
2010 Express Edition.
This chapter explains about how to install Visual C++ 2010 from CD. Please
download CD image and write to CD-R. You can get the CD image of Visual C++
2010 Express Edition from Microsoft corporation directly.

NOTE
1 Please refer to the detail technology informations about Visual
C++ from Microsoft corporation.
2 This software is not supply from FANUC. Please get by yourself.
3 The following description is for reference infornation. If the
software, information, etc. provided by Microsoft is changed, it is
expected that the explanation will not match.

The web site of Visual Studio

https://visualstudio.microsoft.com/

9.10.1 How to Install Visual C++ 2010 Express Edition

An administrator account is necessary to install Visual C++ 2010. When you install
Visual C++ 2010, you have to login as an administrator.

You stop all unnecessary applications, and insert the install CD into the CD drive.
Installation is started. At first, [Visual Studio 2010 Express Setup] window is
displayed. Please press [Visual C++ 2010 Express] button.

- 252 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.10.1 (a) start setup

[Welcome to Setup] window is displayed. Please press [Next(N)] button.

Fig 9.10.1 (b) Welcome to Setup

- 253 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

[License Terms] window is displayed. If you read, understand, and agree on the terms
of the MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS, you check [I have read and
accept the license terms] check box and press [Next >] button.

Fig 9.10.1 (c) End-User License Agreement

- 254 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

[Installation Options] window is displayed. Please remove the check of [Microdoft

Silverlight] and [Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Service Pack 1 (x86)], and press
[Next >] button.

Fig 9.10.1 (d) select optional features

- 255 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

[Destination Folder] window is displayed. Please confirm the location where you
would like to install Visual C++ 2010 and whether to have enough hard disk space to
install this software. Then press [install >]. Installation is started.

Fig 9.10.1 (e) Destination Folder

Fig 9.10.1 (f) Installation

- 256 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

If restart is requested, you have to restart the computer.

Fig 9.10.1 (g) restart

- 257 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Finally, “ Visual C++ 2010 Express Edition has benn successfully installed” is
displayed in [Setup Complete] window.

Fig 9.10.1 (h) Installation complete

Next, the following service packs are gotten and installed.

 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Service Pack 1

( Filename: VS10sp1-KB983509.exe )

- 258 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.11 REFERENCE2 : THE USAGES OF VISUAL C++ 2005 EXPRESS

EDITION

You can make applications that simulate C Language Executor by using Visual C++
2005 Express Edition and Platform SDK.
This chapter explains about how to install Visual C++ 2005 and Platform SDK from
CD. Please download CD images and write them to CD-R. You can get the CD
images of Visual C++ 2005 Express Edition and Platform SDK from Microsoft
corporation directly.

NOTE
1 Please refer to the detail technology informations about Visual
C++ and Platform SDK from Microsoft corporation.
2 These softwares are not supply from FANUC. Please get them by
yourself.
3 The following description is for reference infornation. If the
software, information, etc. provided by Microsoft is changed, it is
expected that the explanation will not match.

The web site of Visual Studio

https://visualstudio.microsoft.com/

9.11.1 How to Install Visual C++ 2005 Express Edition

An administrator account is necessary to install Visual C++ 2005. When you install
Visual C++ 2005, you have to login as an administrator.

- 259 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

You stop all unnecessary applications, and insert the install CD into the CD drive.
Installation is started. At first, [Welcome to Setup] window is displayed. Please press
[Next(N)] button.

Fig 9.11.1 (a) start setup

[End-User License Agreement] window is displayed. If you read, understand, and

agree on the terms of the End-User License Agreement, you check [I accept the terms
of the License Agreement] check box and press [Next >] button.

Fig 9.11.1 (b) End-User License Agreement

- 260 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

[Installation Options] window is displayed. Please check [Graphical IDE] check box,
and press [Next >] button.

Fig 9.11.1 (c) select optional features

[Destination Folder] window is displayed. Please confirm the location where you
would like to install Visual C++ 2005 and whether to have enough hard disk space to
install this software. Then press [install >]. Installation is started.

Fig 9.11.1 (d) Destination Folder

- 261 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.11.1 (e) Installation

If restart is requested, you have to restart the computer.

Fig 9.11.1 (f) restart

Finally, “ Visual C++ 2005 Express Edition has benn successfully installed” is
displayed in [Setup Complete] window.

- 262 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.11.1 (g) Installation complete

After the personal computer is rebooted, the following service pack is gotten, and
installed.

 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Express Editions Service Pack 1

( Filename: VS80sp1-KB926748-X86-INTL.exe )

In addition, when OS used is Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 / 8.1, the

following service pack is getton, and installed.

 Visual Studio 2005 Service Pack 1 Update for Windows Vista

( Filename: VS80sp1-KB932236-X86-(Lang).exe )

9.11.2 How to Install Platform SDK

Platform SDK is necessary to develop C Language Executor applications with Visual

C++ 2005 Express Edition. In this chapter, we explain about how to install Platform
SDK.

The setup wizard window is displayed, when you insert the Platform SDK install CD
into CD drive. Please press [Next>] button.

- 263 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.11.2 (a) start setup

[End User License Agreement] window is displayed. If you read, understand, and
agree on the terms of the End User License Agreement, please check [I Agree] check
box and press [Next >] button.

Fig 9.11.2 (b) Confirmation of License Agreement

[Select An Installation Type] window is displayed. You can choose to install all of
project (Typical), or just a portion (Custom). Please press [Next >].

- 264 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.11.2 (c) Select an installation type

[Select An Installation Location] window is displayed. Please confirm the location

where you would like to install Platform SDK and whether to have enough hard disk
space to install the software. Then press [Next >] button.

Fig 9.11.2 (d) select an installation location

- 265 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

The setting to install Platform SDK has been finished. Please press [Next>] button,
then the installation is started.

Fig 9.11.2 (e) Begin installation

Finally, the message “Completing the Setup Wizard” is displayed. If you press
[Finish] button, this setup wizard is finished.

Fig 9.11.2 (f) Installation complete

- 266 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.11.3 How to Set to Use Platform SDK in Visual C++ 2005 Express
Edition

In this chapter, we explain about how to set to use Platform SDK in Visual C++ 2005
Express Edition.

At first, Visual C++ 2005 is started clicking [Start] menu - [All Programs] - [Visual
C++ 2005 Express Edition] - [Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Express Edition].

After Visual C++ 2005 starts, you click [Options...] in [Tools] menu.

Fig 9.11.3 (a) click options

- 267 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

[Options] dialog is displayed. Please select [Project and Solution] - [VC++

Directories] in left tree menu.

Fig 9.11.3 (b) [Options] dialog

Please click pulldown menu under the [Show directories for:] and select [Executable
files].

Fig 9.11.3 (c) select executable files

- 268 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

We explain about how to set Platform SDK Bin directory in center field above the
[Executable Directories] label.
After clicking bottom line and [...] button, [Select Direcotry] dialog is displayed. You
can select Platform SDK bin directory from [Select Direcotry] dialog.

Fig 9.11.3 (d) setting Executable files

Fig 9.11.3 (e) setting Executable files

- 269 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

In the same way, please change [Show directories for:] pulldown menu from
[Eexecutable files] to [Include files] and set Platform SDK Include directory.

Fig 9.11.3 (f) setting Include files

Please change [Show directories for:] pulldown menu from [Include files] to [Library
files] and set Platform SDK Lib directory.

Fig 9.11.3 (g) setting library files

- 270 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

9.12 REFERENCE3 : CONVERTING VISUAL C++ 2005 PROJECT

INTO VISUAL C++ 2010 PROJECT

When you execute C language executor application on CNC GUIDE, executable file
of C language executor application for CNC GUIDE is made by using sample project
that is bundled this DVD.
This sample project is designed for VisualC++2005, but it is necessary to convert to
project for VisualC++2010 by Visual Studio Conversion Wizard when this project is
used on VisualC++2010.
This section describes how to convert a project created using a sample project for
Visual C++ 2005 into a project for Visual C++ 2010.
Note : Project that is converted for Visual C++ 2010 cannot be used on Visual C++
2005.

Conversion Process using by Visual Studio Conversion Wizard

1. Start up the Visual Studio 2010 and open the project file for Visual C++ 2005.

Fig 9.12 (a) Open menu of project file

Fig 9.12 (b) Open dialog of project file

- 271 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

2. Display the screen of Welcome to the Visual Studio Conversion Wizard, click the
[Next] button.

Fig 9.12 (c) Screen of Welcome to the Visual Studio Conversion Wizard

3. Display the screen of Choose Whether To Create a Backup, select the “Yss,
create a backup before converting” and click [Next] button.

Fig 9.12 (d) Screen of Choose Whether To Create a Backup

4. Display the screen of Ready to Convert, confirm the summary and click [Finish]
button.

- 272 -
 9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.12 (e) Screen of Ready to Convert

5. Conversion is executed and the screen of Conversion Complete is displayed.

Click [Close] button and finish the conversion.

Fig 9.12 (f) Screen of Conversion Complete

6. Open the property dialog of each task.

- 273 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.12 (g) Opening of property dialog

7. Change the [Program Database File Name] which is in [Configuration Properties]

– [C/C++] – [Output Files] as follows.
Before : ”$(IntDir)$(ProjectName).pdb”
After : ”$(IntDir)vc$(PlatformToolsetVersion).pdb”
Note : It should be set to all tasks (cex1 to cex6) project.

Fig 9.12 (h) Program Database File Name (Before)

- 274 -
9.C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig 9.12 (i) Program Database File Name (After)

NOTE
If you don't change the program database file name, the debugging
operation such as step execution etc. cannot be used because
debugging information is not read at debugging start.
Please change the program database file name if you want to do the
debugging operation.

- 275 -
10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

10 MACRO
FUNCTION
EXECUTOR SIMULATION

- 276 -
 10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

10.1 OUTLINE

The macro executor simulation function is a function to execute macro executor in

CNC GUIDE.
The special hardware is not needed.

The following feature exists.

Feature
• The variable used by macro executor can be confirmed on the macro variable
screen. The reference to system variable is also possible.
• The execution macro can be confirmed by executing the CNC program.
• The display of the screen can be confirmed by the conversation macro.
• Aux macro can be confirmed.
• The P-CODE variable can be input and output.
• The real CNC or machine is unneccessary. The P-CODE file that MTB made on
PC can be executed and be operated.
• The P-CODE file that use on the real CNC or machine can be used at CNC
GUIDE.
• It is possible to use Macro Executor simulation function for making the
education of the end user, the inquiry, and the manual etc.
• In CNC GUIDE, it is not necessary to buy the macro executor option and the
option of the capacity of the custom software.

The macro compiler is not included in CNC GUIDE. Separately, it is necessary to buy
the macro compiler.
This function can be used with CNC GUIDE version 2 or later.

- 277 -
10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

10.2 INTRODUCTIONS

About this chapter

This chapter explains the macro executor simulation function in CNC GUIDE.
Please see manual (B-66264JA / B-63943JA-2) about the specification of macro
compiler / macro executor.

About unlike operation with CNC

The operation of the macro executor function in the CNC GUIDE is different from the
CNC. The purpose of this is the following conditions.
･Difference of hardware performance such as CPU
･Without presence of actual servo or spindle

All functions executable by CNC cannot be executed.

The main difference between CNC GUIDE and actual CNC is as follows.

• The following functions are not supported.

 Reader puncher interface
 Control concerning servo / spindle
 File control
 Additionally, the function that needs hardware of CNC
• Execution speed
• Timing of the execution between tasks , Execution macro, Conversation macro,
and Aux macro

When macro executor doesn't operate correctly by these differences on CNC GUIDE,
it is necessary to modify it.
Please acknowledge it beforehand.
In that case, please modify the application to operate on CNC GUIDE, and confirm
operation also on actual CNC without trouble afterwards.

NOTE
The operation of macro executor on CNC GUIDE cannot completely
guarantee operation on CNC.
Therefore, please test macro executor on actual CNC without fail.

- 278 -
 10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

10.2.1 How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC

How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC by using MACRO EXECUTOR
SIMULATION FUNCTION is as follows.

1. Switch to “CNC Guide Original (OLD)” Series / Version by using CNC GUIDE
SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL.For more detail, please refer to the
following chapter.
-7.7 CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL
2. Get series name by using window function.
3. If the series name ends with "Z" or "-", the target is distinguished to be CNC
GUIDE.

NOTE
CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL does not support
switching to “CNC Guide Original (OLD)” Series / Version at the
following models. Therefore, it is impossible to distinguish between
CNC GUIDE and CNC.
FS30i-B Plus / FS30i-B Plus 72AX / FS31i-B Plus / FS31i-B5 Plus /
FS32i-B Plus / FS35i-B 16AX / FS35i-B Line / FS32i-B Plus Line /
FS0i-LF Plus / FS30i-LB / FS30i-LB Plus

10.3 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

The environment that CNC GUIDE operates is necessary.

Please refer to “CNC GUIDE OPERATOR’S MANUAL (SETUP)”.

Moreover, please see macro compiler / macro executor programming manual

(B-63943JA-2) about a necessary environment of the macro compiler.

10.4 SETTING OF CNC GUIDE

This chapter explains the setting necessary to execute the P-CODE file in CNC
GUIDE.

10.4.1 Option

It is necessary to set the option of macro executor to use the macro executor functions
on CNC GUIDE.

- 279 -
10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

10.4.2 Machine Settings

In CNC GUIDE, the P-CODE file of each machine setting can be set.
Therefore, each machine setting has the folder to read and write the data that the
P-CODE file and the P-CODE file use.

10.4.3 Loading of P-CODE File

In CNC, it is necessary to load the P-CODE file to CNC.

Please copy it in the machine seting folder that uses the P-CODE file in CNC GUIDE.
The P-CODE file in the folder is read to the during starting.

NOTE
Please do not put the P-CODE file that the P-CODE number is the
same in the machine setting folder.

Machine composition folder is installed in “MachineSetting” folder.

Ex.) If the machine composition “1path-3axis-M” of FS30i-B is used, the folder of the
machine composition is as follow.
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B\MachineSetting\1path-3axis-M
See “CNC GUIDE OPERATOR’S MANUAL (SETUP)” Chapter 5.1 for details
of machine composition folder.

10.4.4 Custom Software Size

The custom software size is a size of the P-CODE file and the C language executor
application. The application can be executed when the size of the made application is
below the bought option size in CNC.
In CNC GUIDE, the capacity of the custom software is not limited.
Please confirm for the capacity of the custom software not to exceed it on CNC.

10.4.5 Reading and Writing to Memory Card

In CNC, the file can be read and written from/to the memory card in the memory card
slot. In CNC GUIDE, the file can be read and written from / to the MEMCARD
folder.

- 280 -
 10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

10.5 AVAILABLE FUNCTION

The MACRO EXECUTOR functions in CNC GUIDE are as follows. Please note that
CNC GUIDE does not support a part of MACRO EXECUTOR functions. The
function for which the servo or the spindle is necessary and function that
communicates with hardware are not supported.

List of function
The sign in the list means as follows.
○ Available
― Not available.

10.5.1 List of G Code

G code Function Available Remarks

Screen display functions
G01 Linear display ○
G02 Circular display (CW) ○
G03 Circular display (CCW) ○
G202 Screen clear ○
G204 Rectangle display ○
G206 Filling ○
G230 Cursor (rectangular cursor) display ○
G240 Screen / graphic display color ○
G242 Graphic start point ○
G243 Character display ○
G244 Graphic line type command ○
G249 Graphic cursor function ○
G250 Command for display with background color ○
G280 Prompt statement display ○
G300 Rapid traverse drawing ○
Specification of rapid traverse rate for rapid
G311 ○
traverse drawing
G317 Marking ○
G390 Absolute mode specification ○
G391 Incremental mode specification ○
G392 Graphic coordinate system setting ○
CNC program referencing and writing
G320 Program registration ○
G321 Program deletion ○
G322 Program condensing ○
G325 Block read ○

- 281 -
10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

G code Function Available Remarks

G326 Block write ○
G327 Block deletion ○
G328 Block read (characters) ○
G329 Block write (characters) ○
Reader / puncher interface
G330 Line open －
G331 Line close －
Line open (G330)
G335 One-character read (reception) －
returns an error ”No
G336 Write (transmission) －
line function option”
G337 Variable data read (reception) －
(#8539=6).
G338 Variable data write (transmission) －
G339 FANUC CASSETTE control －
Memory card control
G330 Memory card open ○
G331 Memory card close ○
G335 One-byte read ○
G336 Write ○
G337 Variable data read ○
G338 Variable data write ○
G339 File information read, File deletion ○
PMC axis control
G340 Rapid traverse command ○
G341 Cutting feed command ○
G344 Dwell command ○
G345 Reference position return command ○
G346 Auxiliary function command ○
G348 State signal read command ○
G349 Command signal write command ○
Other functions
G310 Relative coordinate presetting ○
G310 PMC data read / write ○
G315 Array-type data processing ○
Inter-multi-path control variable read / write
G316 ○
function
Function for searching data tables for control
G400 ○
variables

10.5.2 List of Control Variables

Variable No. Function Available Remarks

Execution macro call masking function

- 282 -
 10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Variable No. Function Available Remarks

Execution macro call masking variable 1
#8690 ○
(Axis address call masking)
Execution macro call masking variable 2
#8691 (Macro calls and subprogram calls with T ○
codes)
Modal call function
#8680 Modal call recognition variable ○
P-CODE workpiece number search
#8610 Program number ○
Execution control variable
Conversational macro execution control
#8500 ○
variable 1 (User screen 1)
Conversational macro execution control
#8550 ○
variable 2 (User screen 21)
Conversational macro execution control
#8551 ○
variable 3 (User screen 3)
#8530 Auxiliary macro execution variable ○
Screen display control
Character string registration program
#8509 ○
variable
#8510 Function screen control variable ○
#8571 Chapter screen control variable ○
Screen display identification
#8681 Display device identification ○
Identification of display with background
#8682 ○
color
Graphic state reading
#8800 Graphic state reading variable ○
Cursor control
#8505 Cursor control variable ○
#8506 Cursor X position control variable ○
#8507 Cursor Y position control variable ○
Key input and data input / output
#8501 Key input control variable ○
#8502 Data input control variable ○
#8503 Numeric data variable ○
#8504 Address data variable ○
#8508 Character string input ○
Key input line display control
#8561 Key input line display position X coordinate ○
#8562 Key input line display position Y coordinate ○
#8563 Key input count ○

- 283 -
10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Variable No. Function Available Remarks

Extended data input control variable
#8552 Variable number setting ○
MDI key image reading function
#8549 MDI key image reading ○
#8533 MDI keyboard type reading －
Multi-path control function
#8531 Executing path number reading ○
#8603 PMC selecting for Multi-PMC function －
Reader / puncher interface
Completion code (auxiliary macro execution
#8537 ○
result)
Completion code (conversational macro
#8538 ○
execution result)
Completion code (common to auxiliary
#8539 ○
macros and conversational macros)
Referencing and writing CNC programs
#8520 Program number specification ○
#8521 Block number specification ○
#8522 Storage variable number specification ○
Variable number for specifying the number of
#8523 ○
decimal places
Program information read
#8527 Number of registered programs ○
#8528 Free CNC program memory space ○
#8529 Completion number ○
Cutting time and distance read and preset functions
#8553 Reading and presetting the cutting time ○
#8554 Reading and presetting a cutting distance ○
Relative coordinate read and preset functions
#8996 Completion code ○
#8997 Intra-path controlled axis number ○
#8998 Relative coordinate read selection code ○
#8999 Relative coordinate data ○
Array-type processing and referencing of P-CODE variables
#8511 Source data ○
#8512 Source two-dimensional array number ○
#8513 Source three-dimensional array number ○
#8514 Destination two-dimensional array number ○
#8515 Destination three-dimensional array number ○
#8516 Number of one-dimensional array elements ○
#8517 Number of two-dimensional array elements ○

- 284 -
 10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Variable No. Function Available Remarks

#8518 (1 whenever used) ○
#8519 Array start variable number ○
Torque limit override control
#8621 to Torque limit override values for the 1st to 8th
○
#8628 servo axes
#8990 Read / write selection ○
#8991 Axis number ○
#8992 Torque limit override value ○
#8993 Completion code ○
PMC axis control
#8602 PMC controlled axis selection ○
PMC controlled axis selection variable
#8700 ○
(macro variable command type)
#8710,#8720,
PMC command signal variable ○
#8730,#8740
#8711,#8721,
PMC control command variable ○
#8731,#8741
#8712,#8722,
PMC cutting feed variable ○
#8732,#8742,
#8713,#8723,
PMC control travel distance variable ○
#8733,#8743,
#8715,#8725,
Variables for reading PMC status signals ○
#8735,#8745
Axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock function
#8600 (1 to
16 axes) Axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock
○
#8607 (17 to control variables
32axes)
#8601 (1 to
16 axes) Movement axis and direction variables for
○
#8608 (17 to the rise time of the SKIP signal
32 axes)
Window function
#8996 Completion code ○ -1 (Abnormal end) is set
#8997 Axis number ○ to completion code
#8998 System information ID ○ (#8996) when the
function that needs
#8999 System information ○ servo or spindle is
executed.
Function for searching data tables for control variables

- 285 -
10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

Variable No. Function Available Remarks

Start macro variable number in the search
target data table (for READ) Start macro
#8650 variable number in the set next to the ○
retrieved data table set number (#8655) (for
WRITE)
The number of macro variables forming a set
#8651 ○
in the data table
The number of search target data table sets
(for READ) Set value minus the number of
#8652 ○
sets that have already been retrieved (for
WRITE)
#8653 Lower limit to the search value ○
#8654 Upper limit to the search value ○
The data table set number where a control
#8655 variable that satisfies the search condition is ○
contained
Other function
Variable number selecting of #100000
#8572 ○
(=0: #10000 - / =1: #100000 -)

- 286 -
 10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

10.6 EXECUTION OF THE SAMPLE P-CODE FILE

This chapter describes the method to execute the Sample P-CODE file attached to
CNC GUIDE.

10.6.1 Setting of the Option and the CNC Parameter

Setting to execute P-CODE file on CNC GUIDE is as follows.

Option
Set the option of macro executor to use the macro executor functions on CNC GUIDE
by the following operation.
1. Execute the Option Setting (OptionSetting.exe) after CNC GUIDE is started.
2. Check the check box of the following two options.
3. Close and restart CNC GUIDE.

31i-MODEL A
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
( one of 1Mbyte / 2Mbyte / 3Mbyte / 4Mbyte / 5Mbyte / 6Mbyte / 8Mbyte )

0i-MODEL D
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
( Machining Center System : one of 2Mbyte/4Mbyte/6Mbyte )
( Lathe System : one of 1Mbyte/2Mbyte/3Mbyte/4Mbyte/5Mbyte/6Mbyte/8Mbyte )

30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
0i-MODEL F
31i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX
31i-LB
31i-PB
31i-WB
31i-MODEL B5
32i-MODEL B
PMi-MODEL A
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
(one of 2Mbyte/4Mbyte/6Mbyte/8Mbyte)

- 287 -
10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B Plus
The following options are standard function.
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8Mbyte

To use these functions, the following parameter is set.

-Parameter ECE (No.24531#0) = 0

0i-MODEL F Plus
The following options are standard function.
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6Mbyte

0i-LF Plus
The following options are standard function.
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
(one of 6Mbyte /8Mbyte /12Mbyte /16Mbyte)

30i-LB
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
(one of 512Kbyte /2Mbyte /4Mbyte /6Mbyte /8Mbyte /12Mbyte)

30i-LB Plus
The following options are standard function.
• MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR
• CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE
(one of 8Mbyte /12Mbyte /16Mbyte)

To use these parameters, the following parameters are set.

-Parameter ECE (No.24531#0) = 0

CNC Parameter

Allocate “1” to P-CODE number of conversational macro by setting “1” to the

parameter No.9049 .

- 288 -
 10.MACRO EXECUTOR SIMULATION FUNCTION

10.6.2 Exexutuion of P-CODE File

Execute the P-CODE file ( PCODE.MEM ) attached to CNC GUIDE by the following
operation.

Preparation
The sample P-CODE file is copied onto the machine composition folder.
1. Close CNC GUIDE
2. Execute the machine composition setting tool(MachineSetup.exe)
3. Select “1path-3axis-M” as the machine composition
4. Put the file in the attached DVD into the folder “1path-3axis-M” under the
MachineSetting folder.

NOTE
FS0i-D 8.4inchi : sample\ Macro Executor \FS31i-D \PCODE_84.MEM
FS0i-D 10.4inchi : sample\ Macro Executor \FS31i-D \PCODE_104.MEM

5. Start CNC GUIDE.

Execution of P-Code file

The sample P-CODE file is executed.
1. Press [CUSTOM1] key on the CNC GUIDE.
2. P-CODE file is executed and the conversational macro is displayed (Fig 10.6.2
(a)).
3. Press each soft keys to display circle, rectangle and characters and clear the
screen.

Fig 10.6.2 (a) Sample macro executor screen

- 289 -
11.FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION

11 FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION

CNC GUIDE can execute the screens made by FANUC PICTURE.
Please refer to ”CNC GUIDE FANUC PICTURE Function.pdf” included in “CNC
application development application Kit” ( A08B-9010-J555#ZZ1 ) .

11.1 How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC

How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC by using FANUC PICTURE
FUNCTION is as follows.
1. Switch to “CNC Guide Original (OLD)” Series / Version by using CNC GUIDE
SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL.For more detail, please refer to the
following chapter.
-7.7 CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL
2. Get series name, by executing “sysinfo”.
3. If the series name ends with "Z" or "-", the target is distinguished to be CNC
GUIDE.

NOTE
CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL does not support
switching to “CNC Guide Original (OLD)” Series / Version at the
following models. Therefore, it is impossible to distinguish between
CNC GUIDE and CNC.
FS30i-B Plus / FS30i-B Plus 72AX / FS31i-B Plus / FS31i-B5 Plus /
FS32i-B Plus / FS35i-B 16AX / FS35i-B Line / FS32i-B Plus Line /
FS0i-LF Plus / FS30i-LB / FS30i-LB Plus

- 290 -
 12.FOCAS2 FUNCTION

12 FOCAS2 FUNCTION
FOCAS2 / HSSB and FOCAS2 / Ethernet function are available with CNC GUIDE.

The outline of a necessary setting to use FOCAS2 function is as follows.

[HSSB]
 Make "PMC simulation funnction" effective by using the machine setting tool.
 Make “Extended drivers and libraries function” effective by using option setting
tool.
 Use cnc_allclibhndl2 function is for getting handle.
node ： 9
 Use the FOCAS2 library for CNC GUIDE. (fwlib32.dll & fwlibNCG.dll)

[Ethernet]
 Make "PMC simulation funnction" effective by using the machine setting tool.
 Use cnc_allclibhndl2 function is for getting handle.
IP aaddress ： IP address of PC, at where CNC GUIDE runs.
Porrt number ： 8193
* If CNC GUIDE and FOCAS2 application run at the same PC, set “127.0.0.1”
to IP address.
 Use the FOCAS2 library for Ethernet. (fwlib32.dll & fwlibe1.dll)

Necessary FOCAS2 librarys are included in the following folder on DVD.

(DVD):\Samples\FOCAS2

Please refer to ” CNC GUIDE FOCAS2 Function.pdf” included in “CNC application

development application Kit” ( A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12 ) .

12.1 How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC

How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC by using FOCAS2 is as follows.

1. Excute “cnc_sysinfo”, and then get series name (series) and CNC additional
information (addinfo).
2. If one of the following conditions is satisfied, the target is distinguished to be
CNC GUIDE.
(a) Bit 6 of CNC additional information (addinfo) is 1

- 291 -
12.FOCAS2 FUNCTION

(b) The end of series name (series) is “Z” or “-”

Fig.12.1 (a) cnc_sysinfo

Name cnc_sysinfo(unsigned short FlibHndl, ODBSYS *sysinfo)

Sumary Reading CNC system information

Arguments FlibHndl : Specify the library handle

sysinfo : Pointer to the ODBSYS structure including CNC system information.

ODBSYSstructure is as follows.

typedef struct odbsys {

short addinfo ; /* CNC additional information. */

short max_axis ; /* Maximum number of controlled axes */

char cnc_type[2] ; /* Kind of CNC (ASCII string). */

char mt_type[2] ; /* Kind of M/T/TT (ASCII string). */

char series[4] ; /* Series number (ASCII string). */

char version[4] ; /* Version number (ASCII string). */

char axes[2] ; /* Amount of controllable axes (ASCII string). */

} ODBSYS ;

addinfo : CNC additional information

Bit 6 0 : CNC

1 : CNC GUIDE(Simulation software)

This bit value is referred to distinguish CNC from

a simulation software like CNC GUIDE.

series : Series of CNC software(ASCII)

The character string of 4 digits is stored.

Return Processing result

In case of HSSB connection, fwlibNCG.dll must be updated to version 5.3.0.4 or
later.

- 292 -
 13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13 CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

- 293 -
13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.1 OVERVIEW

The MANUAL GUIDE i Function is an application for learning how to operate the
MANUAL GUIDE i that runs on a personal computer.

It has features such as:

(1) Edit of the part program and editing the machining cycle are available.
(2) MEM mode function operate and automatic operation are available.
(3) MDI mode function operate and automatic operation are available.
(4) Machining simulation is available.
(5) CNC program conversion is available.
(6) CNC screen display and operation are available.
(7) Parameter setting screen operation are available.
(8) Performing a part program format checks through program operation is
available.
(9) Full screen displaying the simulator on the personal computer display is
available.
(10) MANUAL GUIDE i data input / output is available.

- 294 -
 13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.2 FEATURE OF MANUAL GUIDE i FUNCTION

13.2.1 EDITING OF EDIT MODE

You can edit of the machining program and making the machining cycle.

13.2.2 AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF MEM MODE

You can equal operation to real CNC.
Please refer to "I. CNC Simulation Function" for details of the automatic operation.

13.2.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF MDI MODE

You can equal operation to real CNC.
Please refer to "I. CNC Simulation Function" for details of the MDI mode operation.

13.2.4 EXECUTION OF MACHINING SIMULATION

You can operate the machining simulation of part program.

13.2.5 EXECUTION OF CNC PROGRAM CONVERSION

You can convert the CNC program of cycle machining of MANUAL GUIDE i.

13.2.6 EDIT OF CNC PARAMETER

The CNC parameter can be set by switching to the system screen of the CNC
Simulation Function. Please refer to "I. CNC Simulation Function" for details of the
parameter edit.

13.2.7 DISPLAY OF CNC SCREEN

CNC and MANUAL GUIDE i screen can be switched with the function key.

13.2.8 I / O MANUAL GUIDE i DATA

You can input / output of the CNC program etc. of MANUAL GUIDE i.data

- 295 -
13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.3 OPERATION OF MANUAL GUIDE i FUNCTION

13.3.1 AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF MEM MODE

The following buttons are operated in the MEM mode when automatic operation with
MANUAL GUIDE i Function.

(1) [CYCLE START]

This button is clicked and automatic operation begin.

(2) [CYCLE STOP]

This button is clicked and automatic operation end.

(3) [SINGLE BLOCK]

Single block mode is switched effective or ineffective by this button.

(4) [BLOCK SKIP]

Block skip mode is switched effective or ineffective by this button.

- 296 -
 13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.3.2 OPERATIONS USING THE KEYBOARD OF PERSONAL COMPUTER

In MANUAL GUIDE i Function, the operation of the MDI key, the software key, and
the operation panel can be input from the keyboard of the personal computer.

When you want the change function to allocate to the PC key, set by starting
PCKeyArrangement.exe at the folder in which the application has been installed.
Please refer to "I. CNC Simulation Function" for details.

Fig.13.3.2 PC key arrangement tool

13.3.3 DISPLAY OF CNC SCREEN

FUNCTION key is clicked and screen changes into the CNC screen.
In the sample machine composition of MANUAL GUIDE i Function, the screen
returns to MANUAL GUIDE i screen when the GRAPH button is clicked.
Please refer to "I. CNC Simulation Function" for details.

Fig.13.3.3 FUNCTION keys

- 297 -
13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.3.4 EDIT OF CNC PARAMETERS

The CNC parameter can be edited by changing into the system screen of the CNC
Simulation Function. The SYSTEM button is clicked with the mouse, and the
parameter is edited from CNC system screen.

Fig.13.3.4(a) SYSTEM key

Fig.13.3.4(b) Parameter setting screen

13.3.5 I / O MANUAL GUIDE i DATAS

The MANUAL GUIDE i Function enables you to input / output MANUAL GUIDE i
data in the same way as the real CNC.
The folder subject to input / output by the CNC Simulation Function is the folder
named "MEMCARD" in the folder in which the application has been installed.

For example:

Folder in which the application has been installed:

" C:\Program Files\FANUC\FS31i Simulator "
Folder subject to input / output:
" C:\Program Files\FANUC\FS31i Simulator\MEMCARD "

You can make a copy of this file and use it with the CNC Simulation Function
installed in another personal computer.

NOTE
Set parameter No. 20 (output device number) to 4 when
specifying a memory card.

- 298 -
 13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.3.6 VERSION INFORMATION

13.3.6.1 Version confirmation of MANUAL GUIDE i

The version of MANUAL GUIDE i is confirmed on the screen displayed when
starting.

Fig.13.3.6.1 Version information of MANUAL GUIDE i

13.3.6.2 Version Confirmation of CNC Simulation Function

The version of the CNC Simulation Function can be confirmed according to the
following procedures.
(Picture mode)
① Right-clicks mouse on the window of the simulator.
② Select "Help" from the menu.

Fig.13.3.6.2(a) Help menu(Picture mode)

③ Click "About".

- 299 -
13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

Fig.13.3.6.2(b) Version information

(Window mode)
① Click "Help" menu.

Fig.13.3.6.2(c) Help menu(Window mode)

② Click " About" menu.

13.3.7 SETTING OF MACHINE COMPOSITION

The machine composition decides the system requirements of the simulator, and is a
file which included the following data.
- Parameter
- Offset data (Work offset, Tool offset)
- CNC program
- Macro parameter

The machine composition of the simulator used is set with the machine composition
setting tool.
In the machine composition set tool, is the machine composition selected at each start
of the simulator or the machine composition used beforehand can be set.

13.3.7.1 Setting of Machine Composition to Use MANUAL GUIDE i Function

Using simulator machine composition is selected. The setting procedure of MANUAL
GUIDE i Function is as follows.

① On the start menu, click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(Model name) ] - [Machine

composition setting ] , and Machine composition setting starts.
② When the machine composition is newly made, the "New" button is clicked.

- 300 -
 13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

③ When you edit the machine composition which has already been made, the
machine composition is selected from the list, and click "Edit" button.

Fig.13.3.7.1 (a) Machine composition setting tool

Fig. 13.3.7.1 (b) Select using simulator

④ Check " Use CNC Simulator Function ".

⑤ Check " Use Additional Function ". Afterwards, select the MANUAL GUIDE i.
⑥ Click "OK" button.
⑦ Click "CLOSE" button.

- 301 -
13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.3.7.2 Option Setting to Use MANUAL GUIDE i Function

You should set MANUAL GUIDE i option by the option setting tool.

① The simulator is started by the machine composition which uses MANUAL

GUIDE i Function.
② On the start menu, click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(Model name) ] - [ Option
setting ] , and Option setting starts.

Fig.13.3.7.2 Option setting tool

③ " MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC" are check as basic.

④ When the MULTI-PATH LATHE function is used, " MANUAL GUIDE i -
BASIC " and " MANUAL GUIDE i MULTI-PATH FUNCTION " are check.

Option name Draw No.

MANUAL GUIDE i-1 S790

MANUAL GUIDE i Multi path lathe S786

- 302 -
 13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.3.7.3 Selecting Machine Composition

Using machine composition is selected.

① On the start menu, click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(Model name) ] - [Machine

composition setting ] , and Machine composition setting starts.

Fig.13.3.7.3 Machine composition setting tool

② Click "Select machine composition at start." or "Use the default machine

composition setting.".
③ Click "CLOSE" button.

- 303 -
13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.3.7.4 Select Machine Composition at Start

When "Select machine composition at start." is selected with the machine composition
setting tool, and the simulator is started, the "Select machine composition" window is
displayed.

① On the start menu, click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE( FS0i-D / FS0i-F / FS0i-F
Plus/ FS30i-B / FS30i-B Plus / FS31i-A / FS31i-B / FS31i-B Plus / FS31i-B5 /
FS31i-B5 Plus / FS32i-B / FS32i-B Plus ) ] - [CNC GUIDE] .
② "Select machine composition" window is displayed.

Fig.13.3.7.4 Select machine composition window

③ The machine composition list is selected, and click "OK" button.

13.3.8 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTION

Setting as follows when the MULTI-PATH lathe function is use.

13.3.8.1 Setting of MULTI-PATH Lathe Function

① The simulator is started by the machine composition which uses MANUAL
GUIDE i Function.
② On the start menu, click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(Model name) ] - [ Option
setting(Model name) ] , and Option setting starts.
③ Check "MANUAL GUIDE i MULTI-PATH FUNCTIONS" with the option
setting tool.

- 304 -
 13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

Fig.13.3.8.1 Option setting tool

④ “Paths” number is set with the machine composition set tool. Please refer to "I.
CNC Simulation Function" for details of the machine composition set tool.

Fig.13.3.8.1 Machine composition setting tool

⑤ The parameter is set referring to "1.1 preparations" - "Ⅳ MULTI-PATH

LATHE FUNCTION" of MANUAL GUIDE i OPEREATOR'S MANUAL
(B-63874JA/05)
The parameter is set from the system screen of the CNC simulator.

- 305 -
13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.3.8.2 PATH Selection Change

Selection path is changed by "PATH SELECT" button click.

Fig.13.3.8.2 PATH SELECT button

- 306 -
 13.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE i Function

13.4 ERROR MESSAGE

The error message is displayed in the message box.

(1) [Machine Composition is not selected. Please set the Machine Composition.]
When the CNC Simulation Function starts, this error is displayed when the
machine composition is not selected. The Simulation Function does not start when
this error is displayed.

(2) [It is not possible to display by this monitor.]

When the personal computer is not set in a resolution necessary for displaying
full-screen, this error is displayed. When this error is displayed, full screens are not
displayed.

Display size Require resolution

10.4inch 640×480
15nch 1024×768

- 307 -
14.TURN MATE i Function

14 TURN MATE i Function

- 308 -
 14.TURN MATE i Function

14.1 OVERVIEW

The TURN MATE i Function is an application for learning how to operate the TURN
MATE i that runs on a personal computer.

- 309 -
14.TURN MATE i Function

14.2 TURN MATE i FUNCTION

14.2.1 SETTING OF MACHINE COMPOSITION

The machine composition decides the system requirements of the simulator, and is a
file which included the following data.
- Parameter
- Offset data (Work offset, Tool offset)
- CNC program
- Macro parameter

The machine composition of the simulator used is set with the machine composition
setting tool.
In the machine composition set tool, is the machine composition selected at each start
of the simulator or the machine composition used beforehand can be set.

14.2.1.1 Setting of Machine Composition to Use TURN MATE i Function

Using simulator machine composition is selected. The setting procedure of TURN
MATE i Function is as follows.

① Click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(FS0i-F/FS0i-F Plus) ] - [ Machine composition

setting ] from the start menu.
② When the machine composition is newly made, the "New" button is clicked.
③ When you edit the machine composition which has already been made, the
machine composition is selected from the list, and click "Edit" button.

Fig.14.2.1.1 (a) Machine composition setting tool

- 310 -
 14.TURN MATE i Function

Fig.14.2.1.1 (b) Select using simulator

④ Check "Use CNC Simulation Function".

⑤ Check "Use Addintional Function". Afterwards, select "TURN MATE i".
⑥ Check "Use PMC Simulation Function".
⑦ Click "OK" button.
⑧ Click "CLOSE" button.

NOTE
TURN MATE i runs on the following conditions:
・Paths is 1
・Sytem Type is T
・CNC Display Size is 8.4 inch or 10.4 inch

- 311 -
14.TURN MATE i Function

14.2.1.2 Option Setting to Use TURN MATE i Function

You should set TURN MATE i option by the option setting tool.

① The simulator is started by the machine composition which uses TURN MATE i
Function.
② Click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(FS0i-F/FS0i-F Plus) ] - [ Option setting ] from
the start menu.

Fig.14.2.1.2 Option setting tool

③ " TURN MATE i (with touch panel) " are check as basic.

Option name Draw No.

TURN MATE i (with touch panel) S792

TURN MATE i MDI key operation function S794
TURN MATE i NC program conversion function S795
TURN MATE i Expansion of Machining Cycle S796

- 312 -
 14.TURN MATE i Function

14.2.1.3 Selecting Machine Composition

Using machine composition is selected.

① Click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(FS0i-F/FS0i-F Plus) ] - [ Machine composition

setting ] from the start menu.

Fig.14.2.1.3 Machine composition setting tool

② Click "Select machine composition at start." or "Use the default machine

composition setting.".
③ Click "CLOSE" button.

14.2.1.4 Select Machine Composition at Start

When "Select machine composition at start." is selected with the machine composition
setting tool, and the simulator is started, the "Select machine composition" window is
displayed.

① Click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(FS0i-F/FS0i-F Plus) ] - [ CNC

GUIDE(FS0i-F/FS0i-F Plus) ] from the start menu.
② "Select machine composition" window is displayed.

Fig.14.2.1.4 Select machine composition window

③ The machine composition list is selected, and click "OK" button.

- 313 -
15.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function

15 CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function

- 314 -
 15.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function

15.1 OVERVIEW

The MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function is an application for learning how to operate the
MANUAL GUIDE 0i that runs on a personal computer.

- 315 -
15.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function

15.2 OPERATION OF MANUAL GUIDE 0i SIMULATION FUNCTION

15.2.1 SETTING OF MACHINE COMPOSITION

The machine composition decides the system requirements of the simulator, and is a
file which included the following data.
- Parameter
- Offset data (Work offset, Tool offset)
- CNC program
- Macro parameter

The machine composition of the simulator used is set with the machine composition
setting tool.
In the machine composition set tool, is the machine composition selected at each start
of the simulator or the machine composition used beforehand can be set.

15.2.1.1 Setting of Machine Composition to Use MANUAL GUIDE i Function

Using simulator machine composition is selected. The setting procedure of MANUAL
GUIDE 0i Function is as follows.

① Click "FANUC simulator" -"Machine composition setting" from the start menu.
② When the machine composition is newly made, the "New" button is clicked.
③ When you edit the machine composition which has already been made, the
machine composition is selected from the list, and click "Edit" button.

Fig.15.2.1.1 (a) Machine composition setting tool

- 316 -
 15.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function

Fig.15.2.1.1(b) Select using simulator

④ Check "Use CNC Simulation Function".

⑤ Check "Use Additional Function". Afterwards, select "MANUAL GUIDE 0i".
⑥ Click "OK" button.
⑦ Click "CLOSE" button.

NOTE
MANUAL GUIDE i runs on the following conditions:
・Paths is 1
・CNC Display Size is 8.4 inch or 10.4 inch

15.2.1.2 Option Setting to Use MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function

You should set MANUAL GUIDE 0i option by the option setting tool.

① The simulator is started by the machine composition which uses MANUAL

GUIDE 0i Function.
② Click "FANUC simulator"-"Option setting" from the start menu.

- 317 -
15.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function

Fig.15.2.1.2 Option setting tool

③ " MANUAL GUIDE 0i " are check as basic.

Option name Draw No.

MANUAL GUIDE 0i S772

- 318 -
 15.CNC GUIDE MANUAL GUIDE 0i Function

15.2.1.3 Selecting Machine Composition

Using machine composition is selected.

① Click "FANUC simulator" -"Machine composition setting" from the start menu.

Fig.15.2.1.3 Machine composition setting tool

② Click "Select machine composition at start." or "Use the default machine

composition setting.".
③ Click "CLOSE" button.

15.2.1.4 Select Machine Composition at Start

When "Select machine composition at start." is selected with the machine composition
setting tool, and the simulator is started, the "Select machine composition" window is
displayed.

① Click "FANUC simulator" -"FS31i Simulator" from the start menu.

② "Select machine composition" window is displayed.

Fig.15.2.1.4 Select machine composition window

③ The machine composition list is selected, and click "OK" button.

- 319 -
16.iHMI Function

16 iHMI Function
0i-MODEL F Plus
0i-LF Plus
30i-MODEL B
30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
30i-MODEL B Plus
30i-LB
30i-LB Plus
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B
32i-MODEL B Plus
35i-MODEL B 16AX

iHMI Function is available with CNC GUIDE.

- 320 -
 16.iHMI Function

16.1 Use of iHMI

This section explains how to use iHMI in CNC GUIDE.

16.1.1 SETTING OF MACHINE COMPOSITION

Set the machine composition to use iHMI.

① Start Machine composition setting too of the model that uses iHMI from the start menu.
② To create the new machine composition, click "New" button.
③ To edit the machine composition which has already exists, select the machine composition
from the list, and click "Edit" button.

Fig16.1.1 (a) New making screen of machine composition

④ Check "Use iHMI" chackbox.
⑤ Click "OK" button.

NOTE
As for the machine composition of type 1 of FS0iF Plus, the
setting of "iHMI is used" cannot edit when the “Edit” button is
clicked.

16.1.2 SETTING OF OPTION

To use iHMI, the option is set.

① Start Machine composition setting too of the model that uses iHMI from the start
menu.
② Start Option setting tool of the CNC GUIDE from the start menu.

- 321 -
16.iHMI Function

③ Check the option "iHMI basic function (R901)".

④ Click "OK" button.
⑤ Restart CNC GUIDE .

NOTE
CNC GUIDE ( 0iF Plus version ) is unnecessary to be set the
option "iHMI BASIC FUNCTION (R901)", because the option is
the standard issue.

- 322 -
 16.iHMI Function

16.2 Setting Files

16.2.1 STORAGE FOLDER

The following iHMI files are storaged in the following folders.

settings.xml, apps.xml
These files are storaged in installed folder of CNC GUIDE.
[%InstallDir%\NCGuide_iHMI\FS30i-B \app\iHMI]
[%InstallDir%\NCGuide_iHMI\FS30i-B Plus\app\iHMI]
[%InstallDir%\NCGuide_iHMI\FS0i-F Plus\app\iHMI]
[%InstallDir%\NCGuide_iHMI\FS30i-LB\app\iHMI]
[%InstallDir%\NCGuide_iHMI\FS30i-LB Plus\app\iHMI]
[%InstallDir%\NCGuide_iHMI\FS0i-LF Plus\app\iHMI]
(%InstallDir%：installed folder of CNC GUIDE)

settings-general.xml, apps-general.xml
These files are storaged in MachineSetting data folder.
Example：1path-3axis-M of FS30i-B iHM
[C:\ProgramData\FANUC\NCGuide FS30i-B iHMI\MachineSetting\1path-3axis-M\iHMI]

16.2.2 SETTINGS

iHMI Screen Keyboard

iHMI Screen Keyboard can be displayed from iHMI launcher ( Fig 16.2.2 (a)).

(1) Start CNC GUIDE.

(2) Push button in red frame from Fig 20.1.2 (a).

iHMI Screen Keyboard is displayed.

Fig16.2.2 (a) iHMI Screen Keyboard

- 323 -
 16.iHMI Function

You can change the startup setting for Show or Hide of iHMI Screen Keyboard launcher by modifying
settings.xml.

<settings>
<screenkeyboards launcher="100,100" current="qwerty" signal="1:R1000" option="startup">
<entry>
<name>qwerty</name>
<x>100</x>
<y>100</y>
<width>0</width>
<height>0</height>
</entry>
<entry>
<name>auto_hmi_t</name>
…
</entry>
</screenkeyboards>
</settings>

The following describes tag descriptions.

Table 16.2.2 (a) iHMI Screen Keyboard Setting

XML tag / attribute

Description

<screenkeyboards> Define the screen keyboard setting items.

Launcher Specify the upper-left corner of the display position of the
attribute launcher.
If omitted, the launcher is not shown.
current
Value Type Default Size
attribute
Width: 522, height:
qwerty Standard keyboard
245
Machine operator's
Width: 485, height:
auto_hmi-t panel screen display
233
function keyboard
signal Specify a PMC address used for reset input.
attribute Example: 1:R1000, 3:R1000
When the reset key is pressed, bit 0 of the specified signal
is turned on.
Output this signal to the external reset signal with a ladder.
Note: Bits 1 to 7 of the specified signal cannot be used
as they are reserved.

- 324 -
 16.iHMI Function

option • startup: Displays the screen keyboard at iHMI startup.

attribute • lockpos: Fixes the screen keyboard position. The
keyboard cannot be moved by dragging.
• autohide: Hides the launcher and screen keyboard
temporarily when a screen shot is taken.
Note: To specify multiple attributes, separate them with
"," (comma), like 'option="startup,autohide"'.
<entry> Set the tag for each screen keyboard type.
This setting can be omitted. If omitted, the upper-left corner
of the display position of the screen keyboard is (0, 0), and
the size is the default.
<name> Specify the value of the screen keyboard type.
Specify the top side of the display position of the screen
<x>
keyboard.
Specify the top side of the display position of the screen
<y>
keyboard.
Specify the display width of the screen keyboard. (*1)
<width>
If "0" is set, the default size is applied.
Specify the display height of the screen keyboard. (*1)
<height>
If "0" is set, the default size is applied.
*1 The keyboard is expanded or reduced to the specified width and height from the
default size of the specified keyboard type.

CNC display size

You can change the startup setting for CNC display size by modifying settings-general.xml.

<settings>
…
<display>
<inchx10>150</inchx10>
…
</display>
</settings>

The following describes tag descriptions.

Table 16.2.2 (b) CNC display size Setting

XML tag Description

<display> Display settings.

Set the application display size. The value is ten times the display size (select
<inchx10>
104, 150, or 190).

- 325 -
16.iHMI Function

16.3 Restriction

① MAINTENACE DISPLAY
In the setting files apps.xml or apps-general.xml, if “first attribute” is set to
MAINTENANCE DISPLAY , the screen switching function with the Subject tag is
not available.

② Boot Setting
Unlike actual machine, Boot Setting is not available.

NOTE
Although Boot Setting Screen is displayed, the setting will be discarded.
The setting is not saved.

③ Screen Saver Setting

Unlike actual machine, Screen Saver Setting is not available.

NOTE
Setting is saved.However, the setting is ignored.

④ iHMI Screen Keyboard

If you use keyboards that right Alt key is as Shift key (for example French keyboard),
iHMI Screen Kyeboard is not available. Enter those characters by PC keyboard.

⑤ iHMI Screen Keyboard RESET key

If you want to assign a signal to the RESET key on the screen keyboard by the signal
attribute of "screenkeyboards tag" of apps.xml, enable the PMC simulation function.

⑥ Press the "CAN"and "RESET" Screen Keyboard keys simultaneously.

You cannot press the "CAN" and "RESET" at the same time on the Screen keyboard
or the PC keyboard.
To cancel the Alarm SW0100, "PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON", please set
the parameter PWR(No.3116#2=1).
If alarm (DS0022)"DUAL CHECK SAFETY IS NOT WORKED" occurs,
please set the parameter DCE(No.1902#6=1), or disable the dual check safety option.

⑦ MachineSetting file name and storage folder

Do not use double-byte character set (Chinese character, katakana, and Korean
character, etc.) for machine setting file name and storage folder.
If you use these characters, iHMI function does not work. If CNC GUIDE freezes,
please push Alt key and F4 key at the same time to close CNC GUIDE

⑧ Cycle Time Estimate Function

Cycle Time Estimate Function cannot be used.

- 326 -
 16.iHMI Function

⑨ RESET by ESC key

You can reset by ESC key on PC keyboard only when window of CNC GUIDE has
keyboard forcus.

⑩ Display Settings
Please use the following magnification of display settings in Windows at 100%.
If you use other than 100%, display size of iHMI application and MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY are displayed differently.
- Windows settings - System - Display - Change the size of text, apps,
and other items
- Windows settings - Ease of Access - Display - Change the size of apps
and text on the main display

⑪ Virtual MDI key

When iHMI function is enabled, Virtual MDI key function is not supported.

- 327 -
II. CNC GUIDE PMC Simulation Function

- 328 -
 1.INTRODUCTION

1 INTRODUCTION
This manual explains the operation of “PMC simulation function” that is a function
for ladder debugging included in software FANUC CNC GUIDE for PC.
For the entire operations and settings of CNC GUIDE, refer to "I. CNC GUIDE CNC
Simulation Function".

Refer to the PMC Programming Manuals about the programming and operation of
PMC.
- FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, FANUC Series 0i-F/0i-F Plus
PowerMotion i-A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64513)
- FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(B-63983)
- FANUC Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(B-64393)

Refer to the following manual for the Dual Check Safety function.
- FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, FANUC Series 0i-F/0i-F Plus
PowerMotion i-A Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL (B-64483)

- 329 -
1.INTRODUCTION

1.1 FEATURES OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

1.1.1 Features
PMC simulation function is software that executes ladder program on PC and enables
you to debug ladder without CNC.
The followings are available for debugging ladder:
- Operation of CNC screens, diagnosis and maintenance screens of built-in
PMC
- Debugging of ladder that uses window functional instruction and signals
related with CNC
- Executing ladder on PC.
- Debugging ladder without using CNC.
- Changing I/O signals by mouse operation.
- Debugging ladder in cooperation with FANUC LADDER-III
 Edit, load, and store ladder
 Monitor display of ladder diagram and state of signals
 Editing running ladder
 Signal trace

1.1.2 Difference between actual PMC and PMC Simulation Function

There are some differences in operations between PMC simulation function and PMC
built-in actual CNC, because PMC simulation function executes ladder program by
pseudo PMC function on PC. The different points of PMC and PMC simulation
function are as follows.

PMC Simulation function

- Execution of ladder
 The execution cycle time and timing of ladder are different from actual
PMC.
 Some error in timing at timers to count up may be caused by the
difference of running status between actual PMC and PMC simulation
function.
 The cycle timing of the system relay R9091.5(Z91.5), R9091.6(Z91.6)
are different from actual PMC.
 The override function of signals cannot be used.
 Ladder execution order in multi-path PMC function is different from
actual PMC.
 In multi-path PMC function, the setting of the percentage of ladder
execution time is not effective.

- The following functions are not supported.

 PMC/L for FS32i-A
 PMC/L for FS0i-F
 PMC/L for FS0i-F Plus
 PMC/L for FS0i-D/0i Mate-D

- 330 -
 1.INTRODUCTION

To simulate the ladder for PMC/L, convert its source files to one of supported PMC
model with FANUC LADDER-III, and use the converted ladder for debugging.

NOTE
DCSPMC (Dual Check Safety PMC) is available only on
FS30i/31i/32i/35i-B, FS30i/31i/32i-B Plus. Please refer to “4 Dual
Check Safety function” for more detail.

- You can debug ladder on PMC simulation function that cooperates with
CNC simulation function.
 Display and operation of CNC screen
 Ladder using the functional instruction related to CNC
 Ladder using the signals related to CNC (G, F)

The functions available on PMC simulation function are as follows.

Table 1.1.2 (a) Available functions in PMC simulation function

Function Available
Window functional instruction (except servo/spindle data, tool life management data) ✓
DISPB (message display) functional instruction and EXIN (external data input) functional ✓
instruction
AXCTL (PMC axis control) functional instruction* and signals related to PMC axis control ✓
function
Signals related to auxiliary function ✓
Signals related to tool functions ✓
Signals related to spindle function －
Signals related to high-speed position switch and to position switch ✓
Skip function ✓
High-speed skip function －
Signals related to Reference position establishment －
Laser oscillator function (31i-LB) －
✓ : available － : unavailable

- 331 -
1.INTRODUCTION

Table 1.1.2 (b) Available functions of AXCTL

Operation Control Available
Rapid traverse 00H ✓
Cutting feed (feed per min.) 01H ✓
Cutting feed (feed per revolution) 02H －
Skip (feed per min.) 03H ✓
Dwell 04H ✓
Reference pos. return 05H －
Continuous feed 06H ✓
1st ref. pos. return 07H ✓
2nd ref. pos. return 08H ✓
3rd ref. pos. return 09H ✓
4th ref. pos. return 0AH ✓
External pulse synchronization (Position coder) 0BH －
External pulse synchronization (1st manual pulse generator) 0DH －
External pulse synchronization (2nd manual pulse generator) 0EH －
External pulse synchronization (3rd manual pulse generator) 0FH －
Speed command 10H －
Torque control 11H －
Auxiliary function 1 12H ✓
Auxiliary function 2 14H ✓
Auxiliary function 3 15H ✓
Machine coordinate system selection 20H ✓
Cutting feedrate (sec/block) 21H ✓
Simultaneous start mode off 40H ✓
Simultaneous start mode on 41H ✓
✓ : available － : unavailable

NOTE
These window functions in the above table 1.1.2 (b) are not
available for FS0i-D /0i Mate-D.

- 332 -
 1.INTRODUCTION

- The following function codes of the window functions are supported.

Table1.1.2 (c) Supported window function list

Function
Group Description
code
Reading CNC system information 0
Reading a tool offset 13
Write a tool offset 14
Reading a workpiece origin offset value 15
Writing a workpiece origin offset value 16
Reading a parameter 17,154
Writing a parameter 18
Reading a real type parameter 321
Writing a real type parameter 323
Reading setting data 19,155
Writing setting data 20
Reading a custom macro variable 21
Writing a custom macro variable 22
CNC information
Reading a custom macro variable (variable number extension) 437
Writing a custom macro variable (variable number extension) 438
Reading the CNC alarm status 23
Reading the current program number 24
Reading the current sequence number 25
Reading modal data 32
Reading diagnosis data 33
Reading the P-code macro variable 59
Writing the P-code macro variable 60
Reading CNC status information 76
Reading the current program number (8-digit program numbers) 90
Entering data on the program check screen 150
Reading clock data (date and time) 151
Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes 26
Reading the absolute position (absolute coordinates) of controlled axes 27
Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled axes 28
Reading a skip position (stop coordinates of skip operation (G31)) of
29
controlled axes
Axis information
Reading the relative position on a controlled axis 74
Reading the remaining travel 75
Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes 91
Presetting the relative coordinate 249
Reading the actual machine position of controlled axes 428

- 333 -
1.INTRODUCTION

Function
Group Description
code
Moving (exchanging) tool management data numbers in a cartridge
329
management table
Searching for a free pot 330
Registering new tool management data 331
Writing tool management data 332
Deleting tool management data 333
Reading tool management data 334
Writing a specified type of tool management data 335
Searching for tool management data 366
Tool management Shifting tool management data 367
functions Searching for a free pot (oversize tools supported) 397
Reading the total tool life data 409
Writing tool management data by specified data 419
Deleting tool management data by specified data 420
Reading tool management data by specified data 421
Writing each tool management data by specified data 422
Searching for a free pot by specified data 427
Reading a tool geometry data 429
Writing a tool geometry data 430
Moving tool management data numbers in a magazine management table 432

NOTE
Functions not listed in “Table 1.1.2 (c) Supported window
function list” do not work. Therefore, please do not use them.

- The PMC simulation function might not support the functions added or
changed in the recent version of CNC and PMC because the timing to
release is different between actual CNC and PMC software and CNC
GUIDE.

- 334 -
 1.INTRODUCTION

1.2 How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC

How to distinguish between CNC GUIDE and CNC by using PMC is as follows.

1. Switch to “CNC Guide Original (OLD)” Series / Version by using CNC GUIDE
SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL. For more detail, please refer to the
following chapter:
10.7 CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL
2. Read series name by the window function.
3. If the series name ends with "Z" or "-", the target is distinguished to be CNC
GUIDE.

NOTE
CNC GUIDE SETTING MANAGEMENT TOOL does not support
switching to “CNC Guide Original (OLD)” Series / Version at the
following models. Therefore, it is impossible to distinguish
between CNC GUIDE and CNC.
FS30i-B Plus / FS30i-B Plus 72AX / FS31i-B Plus / FS31i-B5 Plus /
FS32i-B Plus / FS35i-B 16AX / FS35i-B Line / FS32i-B Plus Line /
FS0i-LF Plus / FS30i-LB / FS30i-LB Plus

- 335 -
2.OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

2 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
PMC simulation function requires the same environment as CNC GUIDE does.

To use FANUC LADDER-III or Machine Signal API function for PMC simulation
function, an effective network connection or installing Loopback Adapter is
necessary.

NOTE
1 The privilege of Power Users or higher is required to use the
PMC simulation function.
2 For PMC simulation function, multi-core or Hyper-Threading
CPU feature is recommended. And in the following cases,
multi-core or Hyper-Threading might be necessary for enough
performance.
• To communicate with FANUC LADDER-III on the same PC.
• To use the machine signal simulator.
• To run ladder of large step number.

- 336 -
 3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3 SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC

SIMULATION FUNCTION
This section explains the screens and the operations of PMC simulation function in
each display mode.

- 337 -
3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3.1 OPERATION MODE OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

To use PMC Simulation function, check “Use PMC Simulator” in the following
Machine Composition Screen.

Fig.3.1 (a) Machine Composition Screen

- 338 -
 3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3.2 PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

This section describes the display with the PMC simulation function enabled.

3.2.1 Display Mode

You can choose display mode from “Picture mode” and “Window mode”.

Features of picture mode

The image of CNC is displayed on the screen, and you can operate it just like an
actual CNC.

Fig.3.2.1 (a) Appearance of picture mode

Features of window mode

This mode shows the display as a usual Windows program without the image of an
actual CNC. You can change the size and the position of the windows.

Fig.3.2.1 (b) Appearance of window mode

- 339 -
3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3.2.2 Operation in Picture Mode

In this mode, instead of main menu, click right button of the mouse to pop up the
menu in which the [PMC] menu is added to select an item you want.

Fig.3.2.2 (a) Pop-up menu “PMC”

Table3.2.2 (a) Menu list

Main menu Submenu Reference
PMC (Note 1) I/O Operation Panel 4 I/O OPERATION PANEL
PMC Title Data 3.2.5 Title window
Ladder Execution Status 3.2.6 Ladder execution status window
Signal Operation Replay Function 6 SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION
Option 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS
10.3 PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION SETTING

NOTE
1 This item can be hidden by checking the “Hide [PMC] menu” on
the Machine composition setting.
2 Refer to "I. CNC Simulation Function" for the basic operations in
the picture mode, such as CNC screen operations and MDI key
operations.

- 340 -
 3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3.2.3 Window Mode

Select an item you want from the [PMC] menu of the main menu.

Fig.3.2.3 (b) Main menu “PMC”

Fig.3.2.3 (a) Menu list

Main menu Submenu Reference
PMC (Note) I/O Operation Panel 4 I/O OPERATION PANEL
PMC Title Data 3.2.5 Title window
Ladder Execution Status 3.2.6 Ladder execution status window
Signal Operation Replay Function 6 SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION
I/O Operation Panel Setting 4 I/O OPERATION PANEL
Option 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS
10.3 PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION SETTING

NOTE
This item can be hidden by checking the “Hide [PMC] menu” on
the Machine composition setting.

- 341 -
3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3.2.4 Title Window

The content of PMC title data of the ladder under the simulation is displayed.
In multi-path PMC, title window for each path is displayed individually.

Fig.3.2.4 (a) Title window

NOTE
This window is not displayed when checking the “Hide [PMC]
menu” on the Machine composition setting.

- 342 -
 3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3.2.5 Ladder Execution Status Window

Execution status of the ladder of PMC is displayed.

Title information

Communication status
Alarm with FANUC LADDER-III

Ladder execution status

Ladder run/stop

Fig.3.2.5 (a) Ladder execution status window

- Title information
Displays the information of the title data in each path of multi-path PMC.

- Ladder execution status

Displays r un/stop status of ladder.
: Ladder is running.
: Ladder is stopping.

- Alarm
Displays alarm status.
: Alarm occurs
: No alarm

- Run/stop ladder
Button to run/stop ladder.
: Run ladder
: Stop ladder

- Communication with FANUC LADDER-III

Displays the communication with FANUC LADDER-III.

- 343 -
3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

: Connecting
: Disconnecting

NOTE
This window is not displayed when checking the “Hide [PMC]
menu” on the Machine composition setting.

- 344 -
 3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3.3 ADDING DIVIDED LADDER PROGRAM

3.3.1 Outline
When you use the Ladder Dividing Management Function, divided ladder programs
can be newly registered on the BOOT screen or the IPL screen in actual CNC.
In the CNC GUIDE, divided ladder programs can be registered at the PMC I/O data
screen.

3.3.2 Starting PMC I/O Data Screen

In machine composition screen, check the item of [Use PMC Simulation Function],
and click the [PMC Data I/O] button.

Fig.3.3.2 (a) Machine Composition Screen

- 345 -
3.SCREEN AND OPERATION OF PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

3.3.3 Loading Divided Ladder Program

Click the [Load] button on PMC I/O Data Screen.

The following file selection dialog will be displayed. Choose the files of divided
ladder program to register newly, and click the [Open] button. You can also drag and
drop the files of divided ladder programs onto the data display area of PMC I/O Data
Screen.

Fig.3.3.3 (a) Load file selection dialog

When loading finishes, new divided ladder programs will appear in the PMC I/O data
screen.

Fig.3.3.3 (b) PMC I/O Data Screen

NOTE
Refer to the subsection 8.2.9 in "I. CNC Simulation Function" for
the operations of the PMC I/O data screen.

- 346 -
 4.Dual Check Safety function

4 Dual Check Safety function

- 347 -
4.Dual Check Safety function

4.1 OUTLINE
The DCSPMC and DCS function are enabled by the CNC option “Dual Check Safety
function (S661)”.
Please refer to “I. CNC GUIDE CNC Simulation Function” for the detail of the option
parameters.

Fig.4.1 (a) Option parameter setting

DCSPMC and DCS function are available on the following models of CNC GUIDE:
 FS30i/31i/32i-B, FS31i-B5, FS30i-B 32AX, FS30i-B 48AX
 FS30i/31i/32i-B Plus, FS31i-B5 Plus, FS30i-B Plus 72AX
 FS35i-B 16AX

Restriction at using DCSPMC

The maximum PMC paths will be four when you enable DCSPMC. In case the opsion
“Multi-path PMC function (5 paths)” is enabled, you will have PMC1, PMC2, PMC3,
PMC4, and DCSPMC available.

- 348 -
 4.Dual Check Safety function

4.2 DCSPMC of PMC Simulation function

4.2.1 Specification
The specification of the ladder program for DCSPMC of the PMC Simulation
function is the same as the one of DCSPMC of the actual CNC.

4.2.2 Difference between actual DCSPMC and one of PMC Simulation

function
There are differences between the DCSPMC’s behavior of PMC Simulation function
and the one of the actual CNC. The differences are listed below:

 Ladder execution
 The cycle and the timing of the ladder execution may be different with the
actual DCSPMC.
 The time for timer instructions to measure may include error comparing to
the actual DCSPMC according to the status of ladder execution of PMC
Simulation function.
 The cyclic signals of system relays R9091.5 (Z91.5) and R9091.6 (Z91.6)
may have different cycle from the one of the actual DCSPMC.

- 349 -
4.Dual Check Safety function

4.3 Safety function

The dual check safety function of CNC GUIDE supports the following safety
function:
 Safety-related I/O signal monitoring

NOTE
The period in which the Safety-related I/O signal monitoring
function detects the disagreement of the signal status, may
include error against the CNC parameter No.1945 (Safety-related
I/O check timer).

The following safety functions are not supported:

 Safety-related I/O signal monitoring

 Safe reduced speed check
 Safe machine position monitoring
 Safe speed zero monitoring
 MCC off test
 Safety position switch function
 Safety related parameters checkfunction
 Parameter lock function
 Safe position error monitoring function
 Amplifier circuit monitoring function
 Safety brake signal output function
 CPU self test function
 RAM check function
 CRC check function
 Safe stop monitoring
 Brake test
 Safe spindle stop function

For the detail of each function, please refer to “Dual Check Safety CONNECTION
MANUAL”.

- 350 -
 4.Dual Check Safety function

4.4 I/O Signals

The following I/O signals are supported:
 Programmable Safety I/O signal
 Signal transfer between PMC and DCSPMC

The following safety-related output signals stick to “1” that represents safety status:
 Safety monitoring result signals (RSVx, RSPs)
 MCC off signals (*MCFVx, *MCFPs)
 Safety brake signals (*BRKx)

- 351 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5 I/O OPERATION PANEL

- 352 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.1 OUTLINE
The I/O operation panel window displays the state of the I/O signals, and you can
change the on-off state of signals in this window. Moreover, the data count, data
length, and the data type etc. of the I/O signals can be specified in the I/O operation
panel setting dialog, and you can arrange the I/O signals on the panel as you want.

NOTE
The I/O operation panel is unavailable when checking the “Hide
[PMC] menu” on the Machine composition setting.

- 353 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.2 SETTING PROCEDURE ON I/O OPERATION PANEL

1. The following screen that lists some X and Y addresses is displayed at the very
first time of starting in PMC simulation function mode.

Fig.5.2 (a) I/O operation panel window of PMC simulation function start

- 354 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

2. To add a new address of I/O signals in I/O operation panel, select [Tool] - [I/O
Operation Panel Setting], to reach the fllowing setting dialog.

Fig.5.2 (b) I/O operation panel setting dialog

3. Right-click on the I/O operation panel setting node, and select “Add new page”.

Fig.5.2 (c) Add new page

4. Set the properties of the new page at the page node. (Page2 here)

Fig.5.2 (d) I/O page setting

- 355 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5. Right-click on page node (Page2 here), and select “Add new address”.

Fig.5.2 (e) Add new address

6. When selecting the address data node, the properties of the address data is
displayed in the right of the dialog, and then set them as you want.

Fig.5.2 (f) Address data setting dialog

- 356 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.3 CONTENTS OF I/O OPERATION PANEL SETTING DIALOG

I/O operation panel setting node

Page node

Address data node

Fig.5.3 (a) I/O operation panel setting dialog

I/O Operation Panel Setting node

Fig.5.3 (b) I/O Operation Panel Setting node

You can perform the following operation from the pop-up menu of the I/O
operation panel setting node.
- Addition of page node
- Pasting page node
- Automatic setting of page node
- Writing/Reading of page node setting

Page node

Fig.5.3 (c) I/O Operation Panel Setting node

- 357 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Page node shows the composition of the page on the I/O operation panel. The
I/O operation panel is displayed with the addresses in the order of the address
data nodes displayed in this dialog.

You can perform the following operations from the pop-up menu of page node.
- Addition of page node
- Cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting page node
- Addition of address data node
- Pasting address data node
- Automatic setting of page node
- Writing/Reading of page node setting

Moreover, page node can be copied by dragging with right button and moved by
dragging with left button, by the drag & drop of the mouse operation.

Address data node

Fig.5.3 (d) Address data node

The address data node shows the composition of the address data in the page. The
addresses on the I/O operation panel are displayed in order of the displayed
address data.

You can perform the following operations from the pop-up menu of the address
data node.
- Addition of address data node
- Cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting address data node

Moreover, the address data node can be copied by dragging with right button and
moved by dragging with left button by the drag & drop of the mouse operation.

- 358 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.4 I/O OPERATION PANEL SETTING DIALOG

I/O Operation Panel Setting node

Fig.5.4 (a) I/O operation panel setting

- Address notation
Specify whether addresses are displayed by the symbol or the address in the I/O
operation panel.

Page node

Fig.5.4 (b) Page setting

- Title
The page node is shown with the title of the page. Title cannot be omitted. Note
that the character '\' cannot be included in the title.

- Show this page

Select whether to show this page in the I/O operation panel.

- 359 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Address data node

Fig.5.4 (c) Address data setting

- Title
The address data node is shown with the title of the address data if it has. The
address is displayed if the title is blank.

- PMC address
PMC address 2
Specify the first PMC signal to display by its address or symbol. In the
multi-path PMC system, an address may follow its PMC number. You can
enter “PMC number” + “:” + “address” to enter an address as indicated above.
When no PMC number is specified, the address is assumed to belong to the first
PMC path. In this case, “PMC number” + “:” is automatically prefixed to the
specified address. When the PMC is the standard model that has only one PMC
path, no PMC number needs to be specified.
You can set an address or symbol in “PMC address 2” to realize duplicated input
that DCS function requires. You can omit “PMC address 2” if not needed.

NOTE
1 Enter “S” + “:” + “address” to set an address of DCSPMC.
2 After you change the number of PMC paths, please re-enter any
addresses of DCSPMC. Otherwise, the signal may not be
manipulated correctly.
3 The button and lamp show the status of the signal of “PMC
address”. The signal status of “PMC address 2” is not indicated.
4 Only the symbol of “PMC address” is displayed on the button or
lamp. The symbol of “PMC address 2” is not displayed.

- 360 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

- Data Count
Set the number of data of PMC addresses to display.

- Data length
Select byte, word, dword, and bit.

- Data type
Select among signed, unsigned, and hexadecimal.

- Switch type
Select switch type of the input signals.
Alternate The state changes between on and off every time you push the
button.
Momentary The state is on only while you push the button; the state is off when
you release it.

- Show this address

Select whether to show this address data in the I/O operation panel.

- OK
Accept the modification you made and exit.

- Cancel
Cancel all the modification and exit.

- 361 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.5 I/O OPERATION PANEL WINDOW

Window mode

Fig.5.5 (a) I/O operation panel

- Forcing
When the forcing of I/O is effective, you can change the value of any PMC
address on the I/O operation panel. Forcing I/O is enabled by checking
“Forcing” on the I/O operation panel.

- Symbol display
Switch the notation of the address on the I/O operation panel between address
and symbol. The notation of the address on the I/O operation panel will be
symbols at checking “Disp symbol” on the I/O operation panel.

- 362 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Picture mode
To display the I/O operation panel screen, select the [PMC] - [I/O Operation Panel] by
the pop-up menu.

Fig.5.5 (b) I/O operation panel

- Page name
Displays the title of the page.

- Forcing
When the forcing of I/O is effective, you can change the value of any PMC
address on the I/O operation panel. Forcing I/O is enabled by checking
“Forcing” on the I/O operation panel.

- 363 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

- Symbol display
Switch the notation of the address on the I/O operation panel between address
and symbol. The notation of the address on the I/O operation panel will be
symbols at checking “Disp symbol” on the I/O operation panel.

- Setting button
Display the I/O operation panel setting dialog.

- Page No.
To change the display page, enter the page number directly or operate the upper
and lower arrow.

Input button and Output lamp

The signals of the I/O operation panel are displayed as the input button and the output
lamp according to the kind of address type. You can operate input buttons using the
mouse. The output lamp displays the signal state usually, but when the forcing of
I/O is enabled, you can also change the state of output lamp as well as input buttons.
The symbols contained in ladder program are displayed on the input button and output
lamp.
Only X address is displayed as input buttons.

Fig.5.5 (c) Input button and Output lamp

NOTE
To change the state of a signal of output lamp, enable the
forcing mode of the I/O operation panel.

- 364 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Display and setting of byte, word, and dword

The display and the setting of byte, word, dword are operated in the edit box.

Display content of I/O

The address and the symbol information of the I/O signal are displayed in the tool
chip. When the title of the address data node is set at the I/O operation panel setting
dialog, the title string is displayed in the form of “< title >”. When the title is not set,
this line is omitted.

NOTE
The information of the address in “PMC address 2” in address
node is not displayed.

- 365 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.6 WRITING/READING FUNCTION OF I/O OPERATION PANEL

SETTING

5.6.1 Outline
Using this function, the I/O operation panel setting information can be written to a file
and can be restored by reading the file. By this function, you can create the I/O
operation panel setting based on the setting of other machine composition, or you can
reuse your I/O operation panel setting between different PCs.

NOTE
Do not change the contents of the file created to save the setting
information of the I/O operation panel. It may cause failure at
reading the file.

5.6.2 Write Setting File

The setting information of the I/O operation panel can be written to a file following
the procedure below.

1. Select [Write Setting File...] in the context menu by right-clicking the mouse on
the I/O operation panel setting node or on arbitrary page node.

Fig.5.6.2 (a) Menu [Write Setting File...]

2. Enter the file name to save and click the < Save > button.

Fig.5.6.2 (b) Save setting file

- 366 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Range of saved setting

The range of the saved I/O operation panel setting may change according to the
operation.
When you start with the context menu of the I/O operation panel setting node,
information of all page nodes will be saved.
When you start with the context menu of a page node, information of the single page
node is saved.

Fig.5.6.2 (c) Save setting file

In case of invalid setting

The following settings are invalid and the information of a page that contains such
setting cannot be saved.

- “PMC address” is invalid.

- “PMC address” is valid, but there are invalid addresses in the range of
address specified by data count

When you try to save the page setting that contains invalid setting, an error message is
displayed.

Invalid PMC address or too many PMC address data count.

(Page:m, Address:n)
(* m is the page number of the first invalid information, and n is the address
number of it.)

When the error message is closed, the focus will move to the position of the invalid
setting.

- 367 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.6.3 Read Setting File

The setting information of the I/O operation panel saved in the file can be read
following the procedure below.

1. Select [Read Setting File...] in the context menu by right-clicking the mouse on
the I/O operation panel setting node or arbitrary page node.

Fig.5.6.3 (a) Menu [Read Setting File...]

2. Enter the file name to save and click the < Open > button.

Fig.5.6.3 (b) Open setting file

If the specified file does not contain correct information of I/O operation panel setting,
the following error occurs. Confirm if you specified a correct file when this error
occurs.

The file does not contain valid I/O Operation Panel setting.

Position to add read pages

The added position of the I/O operation panel setting read from file may vary
according to the operation.
When you start with the context menu of the I/O operation panel setting node, the
pages of the read setting information will be added under the last page.
When you start with the context menu of a page node, the pages of the read setting
information will be added under that page.

- 368 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Invalid PMC address

The following PMC address information in the setting information of the I/O
operation panel cannot be interpreted as a correct PMC address.

- PMC address of a PMC path which does not exist in the current
composition.
- The PMC address outside valid range in the current composition.

The address nodes of these invalid addresses will be also added together with the ones
of valid address. If invalid PMC address is found in the setting information, the
following message will be displayed.

Found n invalid PMC address(es).

(* n is address count)

The invalid PMC addresses are displayed in red.

Fig.5.6.3 (c) Invalid PMC address

- 369 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.7 AUTO-SETTING FUNCTION OF I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.7.1 Outline
The auto-setting function of the I/O operation panel is a function to set the I/O
operation panel automatically referring to the I/O Configuration data of I/O Link i or
the setting of the I/O Link assignment data defined in the ladder program. For each
area of the machine I/O signals (X/Y address), this function extracts the address of I/O
signals of assigned I/O devices, then assembles them to make pages of the I/O
operation panel and adds them.

X020 0. 0. 1 IO24I Y020 0. 0. 1 IO16O

X040 0. 0. 3 ID08F Y030 0. 0. 2 OD16D

Fig.5.7.1 (a) Example of I/O Link assignment data

Fig.5.7.1 (b) Page node by Auto-setting function

Fig.5.7.1 (c) Page of I/O operation panel by Auto-setting function

NOTE
This function does not automatically create the I/O operation
panel from I/O Configuration data or I/O Link assignment data of
DCSPMC.

- 370 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.7.2 Operation

Auto-Setting procedure of I/O operation panel

1. Select [Tool] - [I/O Operation Panel Setting] to show the setting dialog.

2. Select [Page Auto-Setting] - [I/O Link Assignment...] in the context menu by

right-clicking the mouse on the I/O operation panel setting node or arbitrary page
node.

Fig.5.7.2 (a) Menu [I/O Link Assignment…]

3. As Page Auto-Setting dialog is displayed, select “PMC path” and “sort by”. In
FS0i-D/0i Mate-D, select “sort by” only.

Fig.5.7.2 (b) Page Auto-Setting (I/O Link Assignment) dialog

- 371 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Fig.5.7.2 (c) Page Auto-Setting (I/O Link Assignment) dialog

(1) PMC path

Select the PMC path from which the I/O Link assignment data is referred.
More than one PMC path can be selected at one time.

(2) Sort by
Select the arranging method of the address nodes in each page. Connection
order or Address order can be selected.

(3) <OK> button

Perform the auto-setting function to set the I/O operation panel according to
the setting. When there is a problem in the setting or the ladder program,
an error will be displayed.

(4) <Cancel> button

Exit the dialog without setting the I/O operation panel.

- 372 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

4. When the <OK> button is pushed, the pages generated from the I/O Link
assignment data will be added to the I/O operation panel setting. The new pages
will be added under the last page when you start with the menu of the I/O
operation panel setting node. When you start with the menu of a page node the
new pages will be added just under that page node.

Fig.5.7.2 (d) I/O Operation Panel Setting dialog after addition

- 373 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Error messages
When an error occurs in Page Auto-Setting of I/O operation panel, a message is
displayed like following dialog. When the <OK> button is pushed, the dialog is
closed and it returns to the Page Auto-Setting (I/O Link Assignment) dialog.

Fig.5.7.2 (e) Error message dialog

Table5.7.2 (a) List of error message

Message Description Measure

Please select PMC path. No PMC path is selected. Select one or more PMC path
from which the I/O Link
assignment data is referred.
Cannot read I/O assignment data in PMCn. I/O assignment data cannot be Set “PMC program view inhibit”
FS0i-D/0i Mate-D: referred because of “PMC to No and operate again.
Cannot read I/O assignment data. program view inhibit” setting.
Ladder program in PMCn is broken. There is a problem in the ladder Confirm the state of the ladder
FS0i-D/0i Mate-D: program, and the I/O Link program. According to the
Ladder program is broken. assignment data cannot be used. situation, modify or replace it to
solve the problem.
Cannot read ladder program in PMCn The ladder program is being Please operate it again after
which is being edited. changed by FANUC LADDER-III completing the change in the
FS0i-D/0i Mate-D: or from the PMC screen. (edit or ladder program on FANUC
Cannot read ladder program which is being store) LADDER-III or the PMC screen.
edited.

- 374 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

5.7.3 I/O Operation Panel Set Automatically

Page node set automatically

The I/O operation panel that is set automatically from the I/O Link assignment data
consists of pages corresponding to the following areas.

- Area of X0 to 127 and Y0 to 127

- Area of X200 to 327 and Y200 to 327
- Area of X400 to 527 and Y400 to 527
- Area of X600 to 727 and Y600 to 727

NOTE
1 The page for the area, which does not contain any I/O Link
assignment data at all, will not be added.
2 When more than one page are added, they are arranged in the
order of above X/Y address area in each PMC path.

Fig.5.7.3 (a) Page nodes by Auto-setting function

- 375 -
5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Properties
Properties of the page node which is set automatically are set as follows.

- Title
Title is set in the following format
<PMC path>-<X/Y address area>
Ex) PMC1-X/Y0

FS0i-D/0i Mate-D
<X/Y address area>
Ex) X/Y200

- Show this page

Checked, and the page is displayed.

Address node set automatically

One address node is set for one I/O Link device automatically.

Fig.5.7.3 (b) Address nodes by Auto-setting function

- 376 -
 5.I/O OPERATION PANEL

Properties

Properties of each address node are set as follows according to the based I/O
assignment data corresponding to an I/O device.

- Title
The title is set from the connected location and the module name of the I/O Link
assignment data in the following form.
<Group><Base><Slot><Module name>
Ex)
0.0.1.ID32A (Group =0, Base=0, Slot=1, Module ID32A)
15.0.1.OD32A (Group =15, Base=0, Slot=1, Module OD32A)

- PMC Address
The top address of module assignment.

- Data Count
The number of occupied bytes by the I/O module.

- Data Length
BIT type with switch type Alternate.

- Show this Address

Checked and the address is displayed.

Order of address node

The arrangement of address nodes in each page is decided by the specified option in
the Page Auto-Setting dialog.

1. Connection
The order is decided from the value of group, base, and slot of the assignment
data. When connected location is same, the order is decided by the address
order.
2. Address
They are arranged from input (X) to output (Y), and then arranged so that the
PMC addresses are in ascending order in each area.

- 377 -
6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

6 STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S

PANEL WINDOW

- 378 -
 6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

6.1 OUTLINE
Standard machine operator’s panel window consists of Main panel and Sub panel,
which simulate the input/output signals of the actual Standard machine operator’s
panel connected as an I/O device.Main panel is common, and you can choose Sub
panel from Type A (horizontal type) and Type D (vertical type).

Sub panel

Main panel

Fig.6.1 Standard machine operator’s panel (Main + Sub Type D)

To operate CNC by Standard machine operator’s panel, you need a ladder program
that supports the Standard machine operator’s panel.Just after you create a new
Machine composition, it will start the ladder program supporting the Standard
machine operator’s panel.The simulation of the input/output signals of the Standard
machine operator’s panel starts after the CNC comes into operation.Regardless of the
assignment of the Standard machine operator’s panel, the X-signals will stay “0”
before the CNC starts up.
If you want to operate the CNC GUIDE with the same feeling as an actual CNC, you
can use the "MOP simulator" sold separately.
Please see FANUC MOP Simulator manual (A-97238-00001EN) about the MOP
simulator.

NOTE
The MOP simulator cannot be used when the following languages
are selected in the Windows keyboard layout.
・Italian
・Russian
・Bulgarian
・Hindi

- 379 -
6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

6.2 CONFIGURATION OF STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S

PANEL
You can configure the assignment address of the Standard machine operator’s panel
according to your ladder program.
Choose menu [PMC] and [Option], and you can change the settings at “Machine
Operator’s Panel” tab.

Fig.6.2 Options for Standard machine operator’s panel

Setting address
Set the address at the left side to assign the Standard machine operator’s panel.
If you use Safety machine operator’s panel and want duplicated input, you can also set
the duplicated address at the “for DCS” side.
You can omit “for DCS” side if you do not use Safety machine operator’s panel.

- PMC path
Set the PMC path for “DI Address” and “DO Address” of the Standard machine
operator’s panel. The available PMC paths in PMC simulation function will be
listed.

NOTE
DCSPMC can be set only in “for DCS”.

- 380 -
6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

- DI Address
Set the X address where the input signals from main panel and sub panel will be
assigned. Sub panel will be assigned to the four bytes from the X address in“DI
Address”, and main panel to the 5th to 12th bytes from the X address.
The emangency stop button will be assigned to the 4th bit of the first byte of X
address set in “DI Address” of “for DCS”, and the main panel to the 2nd to 9th bytes
from the X address.

NOTE
To delete the setting in “for DCS”, clear “DI Address” of “for
DCS” and push [OK] button. This operation also clears the “PMC
Path” of “for DCS”.

- DO Address
Set the Y address where the output signals to main panel will be assigned. The nine
bytes from the Y address will be used.

Initial values are as follows:

Settings in the “Machine operator’s panel” tab

for DCS
PMC path PMC1 (blank)
DI Address X0006 (blank)
DO Address Y0000
Use Key Top Customization Function No check
Key top bitmap storage folder (blank)

Example settings) In the case of the following setting:

Example settings in the “Machine operator’s panel” tab
For DCS
PMC path PMC1 PMCS
DI Address X0006 X0008
DO Address Y0000

Input signals from Sub panel are assigned to X0006 – X0009, input signals from main
panel to X0010 – X0017, and output signals to main panel to Y0000 – Y0007.
Input signal from the emergency button on sub panel is assigned to X0008.4 of
DCSPMC, and input signals from main panel to X0009 – X0017.

- 381 -
6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

NOTE
1 To assign the Emergency stop switch to *ESP (X8.4), set the DI
Address as X6.
2 For details of the signals, please refer to the following manuals:
“FS30i-B CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)” (B-64483EN)
- “8.8 CONNECTION TO MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL”
“FS30i-A CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)” (B-63943EN)
- “8.9 CONNECTION TO STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S
PANEL”
“FS0i-F CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)” (B-64603EN)
- “8.8 CONNECTION TO MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL”
“FS0i-D/0i Mate-D CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)”
(B-64303EN)
- “9.9 CONNECTION TO STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S
PANEL”

- 382 -
 6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

6.3 FUNCTION OF STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL

The Standard machine operator’s panel window is common to Picture mode and
Window mode, and has following functions:

・ Change the window position and size as you like.

・ OFF switch on Sub panel can terminate the CNC GUIDE.
・ By shortcut operation (default: Ctrl+F12), you can hide the Standard machine
operator’s panel window temporarily, and also show it again.
・ Key top customization of main panel.

Assignment of Shortcut keys

You can change the shortcut operation to hide/show the panels by the Key
Arrangement Tool.
To change the shortcut key, start the Key Arrangement Tool, and choose “Window
Operation” at “Category”. Then select “Show/Hide Machine Operator’s Panel” in
“Function List” and change the key setting as you like. It is assigned to Ctrl + F12 in
default.

Fig.6.3(a) Key Arrangement screen

Key top customization of main panel

As a key top image of key switch of main panel, a bit map file stored in a folder can
be displayed substitutionally. Storage folder can be specified by any machine
composition.
The file name of the bit map file can be used the arrangement number of the key
switch.
The fig. 24.4(b) is the arrangement number table of the main panel.
The setting of the customization of key top can be operated in the option screen of
[PMC] menu.
Check [Use Key Top Customization Function] and specify the storage folder of the bit
map in the [Key top bitmap storage folder]. The image of the key top is exchanged.

- 383 -
6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

Address of key switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
A

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
B

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11
C

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
D

E
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11

Fig.6.3(b) Key Arrangement screen

Example:
The case of customizing the key tops of A1, D1 and E11of the Fig. 24.4 (b).
(1) Prepare the bit map files which you want to replace and name as “A1.bmp “,
“D1.bmp” and “E11.bmp”.
(2) Store above bit map files to storage folder (“C:\Customize”).
(3) Set the followings in the option screen of the [PMC] menu.
1. Check [Use Key Top Customization Function]
2. Specify “C:\Customize” to [Key top bitmap storage folder].
(4) Press the [OK] button.

- 384 -
 6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

6.4 OPERATION OF STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL

This section describes the operation of the Standard machine operator’s panel using
the ladder program integrated as default.

NOTE
For details of the switches and the signals, please refer to the
following manuals:
“FS30i-B CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)” (B-64483EN)
- “8.8 CONNECTION TO MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL”
“FS30i-A CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)” (B-63943EN)
- “8.9 CONNECTION TO STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S
PANEL”
“FS0i-F CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)” (B-64603EN)
- “8.8 CONNECTION TO MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL”
“FS0i-D/0i Mate-D CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)”
(B-64303EN)
- “9.9 CONNECTION TO STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S
PANEL”

6.4.1 Operation of Main Panel

The functions of the key switches of the Main panel, and the meanings of the
corresponding LEDs are as follows:

Key switch Function Meaning of LED Key switch Function Meaning of LED
Change CNC mode to MEM mode Not used (Yn+2.7)
“MEM” (Xm+6.7)

Change CNC mode to EDIT mode Single block operation Single block
“EDIT” operation mode

Change CNC mode to MDI mode Optional block skip Optional block skip
“MDI” mode

Change CNC mode RMT mode Optional block stop Optional block stop
to ”RMT” mode

Change CNC mode REF mode Change to “TEACH “TEACH IN” mode
to ”REF” IN” mode

Change CNC mode JOG / TJOG mode Restart program Selecting program
to ”JOG” restart

Change CNC mode INC mode Machine lock all axes Machine is locked
to ”INC”

- 385 -
6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

Key switch Function Meaning of LED Key switch Function Meaning of LED
Dry run Dry run mode Jog feed negative Feeding axis in
direction negative direction

Halts automatic Automatic Not used (Yn+7.0)

operation. operation is (Xm+11.0)
suspended
Not used (Yn+7.1)
Cycle start Automatic
(Xm+11.1)
operation

Not used Automatic Not used (Yn+7.2)

(Xm+11.2) operation is (Xm+11.2)
stopped
Change feedrate Jog feedrate is x1

Change feedrate Jog feedrate is x10

Change feedrate Jog feedrate is

x100

Change feedrate Jog feedrate is

x1000

Select jog feed X-axis X-axis is selected

for jog feed

Select jog feed Y-axis Y-axis is selected

for jog feed

Select jog feed Z-axis Z-axis is selected

for jog feed

Select jog feed 4th-axis is selected

4th-axis for jog feed

Select jog feed 5th-axis is selected

5th-axis for jog feed

Select jog feed 6th-axis is selected

6th-axis for jog feed

Jog feed positive Feeding axis in

direction positive direction

Select rapid traverse Rapid traverse

mode

- 386 -
 6.STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL WINDOW

6.4.2 Operation of Sub Panel

The functions of the switches of the Sub panel are as follows:

Name Image Signal Function

Xm+2.4 Switching emergency stop mode.

When the switch is pressed,
Emergency “EMG” is displayed on the button.
stop switch

Xm+1.4 Change the protection status of

program.
Program
protect key

Xm+0.0 Apply feedrate override.

Feedrate |

override rotary Xm+0.5

switch

Xm+0.6 Apply spindle speed override.

Spindle speed | * CNC GUIDE does not support

override rotary Xm+1.3 spindle function.

switch

Power off N/A Terminate CNC GUIDE.

swtich

Power on N/A Not used.

switch

- 387 -
7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

7 SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

- 388 -
 7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

7.1 OUTLINE
This function is to record the transitions of input signals operated on the I/O operation
panel, and to replay the recorded data, to reduce the manual operations of the signals.
And you can save/load the recorded data to/from files. The saved data can be edited
by the application on PC such as applications for spreadsheet.
Moreover, making a signal operation file from the trace data obtained from actual
machine by signal trace function in the built-in PMC, enables you to reproduce the
behavior of input signals on the actual machine for debugging the ladder.

Signal operation replay function

PMC Simulation function

I/O operation panel

Record
Memory

Play

Read Save Read

Signal operation file Trace result file

Edit

Spreadsheet etc.

Fig.7.1 (a) Signal operation replay function

NOTE
1 The Signal operation replay function is unavailable when
checking the “Hide [PMC] menu” on the Machine composition
setting.
2 The transition of the input signal of the address set as the “PMC
Address 2” of the I/O operation panel setting dialog are also
recorded by the operation of I/O operation panel and can be
replayed.

- 389 -
7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

7.2 SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY SCREEN

This section describes about the signal operation replay window. Select [Signal
Operation Replay Function] from menu to reach the signal operation replay window.

Fig.7.2 (a) Signal operation replay function window

- State
Display the state of a current operation.

Replaying.

Recording.

Stopping.

- 390 -
 7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

Pausing while replaying.

- Comment
Put a comment on recording data.

- Step interval to record

Choose “Real time” or “Constant” as interval of operated time for recording
operations.
- Real time: Record the interval time as you operated, to reproduce your
operations in real time.
- Constant: Record every interval as a constant time set by “Wait time”.
- Wait time: Set the waiting time when “Constant” is selected.

NOTE
The time recorded in the signal operation replay function does
not mean the actual time.

- Execution status
- Next step: The signal transition to be replayed in the next step is shown.
It is shown in the form of
“PMC system: address = value”.

Above example shows that X127.7=1 in the 2nd path PMC is executed in
the next step. In case of two or more signal transitions in the same step,
they are displayed as long as possible in the line. The maximum number of
the signal transitions that can be replayed in a step is 32 points.

- Wait time: Displays waiting time for the next step.

- Next file: Displays the file name which will be read next when a
CHAIN command exists in the signal operation file.

- Recorded step: The signal transition that is recorded last is shown at

recording operation. It is shown in the form of
“PMC system: address = value”.

Above example shows that X127.7=1 in the 2nd path PMC

is recorded.

- 391 -
7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

The current step number and the total steps are shown. There is no
limitation in the total step number.

(Play button)
Starts replaying of signal transitions according to the data recorded in
the memory.

(Pause button)
Temporarily stops replaying of the signal transitions.

(Stop button)
Stops replaying or recording the signal transitions.

(Record button)
Starts recording of the signal transitions. After the record button is
pushed, the input signals operated on the I/O operation panel are
recorded in the memory. When the history of the recorded signal
already exists in the memory, new operation will be recorded in the tail
additionally. You cannot start recording when the history data that
contains CHAIN command is in the memory.

(Step button)
Replays the signal transitions by single step execution.

(Clear button)
Clears the data in the memory.

- 392 -
 7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

7.3 FILE OPERATION

This section describes about the operation of the signal operation file. You can use
toolbar to make the file operations.

(New)
Newly records the signal operation. The recorded operation in the memory
is cleared. When some recorded operation data is in the memory, the
following message is displayed.

Fig.7.3 (a) Confirmation message

(Open)
Open the saved signal operation file. The data in the memory is cleared,
and then the data in the file is read into the memory. The confirmation
message is displayed when some recorded operation data is in the memory.

(Save)
Save the recorded signal operation data into the file.

(Save as)
Save the record of signal operation data into another file.

(Close)
Exit the signal operation replay function, and close the window. When the
operation record is in the memory, the confirmation message is displayed.

Even if this window is closed, the contents of the memory remain. Select
“New” from the toolbar or push “Clear” button to clear the content of the
memory.

- 393 -
7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

7.4 SIGNAL OPERATION FILE FORMAT

The signal operation file is formatted as CSV (Comma Separated Value) file. The
file can be divided into the header and the command part. The file can be displayed
and be edited by some text editor, word pad and spreadsheet application supporting
CSV format such as Microsoft Excel.

1. Header part
The identifier that shows the type of data is output at the head of data.
- Identifier: PMC SIGNAL DATA

2. Command part
In the format of a line in command part, a command is specified at the first
column. Specify arguments for each command at second column and after.
The kinds of the commands are enumerated as follows.

- REMARK (abbreviation R)
- Specify the comment displayed in the signal operation replay function
window.
- Specify the comment text as the following argument.
- There is no limitation of the number of characters in comments.
- This command can be omitted.
- When this command is set to two or more lines, the second and after
commands are ignored.

- SET (abbreviation S)
Set data.
- Specify the arguments after the command in the format “wait, (address
(symbol), value, type), (address (symbol), value, type)...”.
- Specify the wait time in the column following SET. Wait is an
interval from the last SET line. The unit of wait is ms. Wait must be
a multiple of the execution cycle of first level of ladder. Round the
entered number at the execution cycle when it is not a multiple of it.
For instance, when 1ms is specified and the execution cycle is 8ms, it is
rounded to 8ms. And when 0ms is specified, the line is performed
after the same interval as the previous SET line. When reading a file
with negative number specified as wait time, an error occurs.
- Specify the address following the wait time. Two or more addresses
can be specified in the same line, and those address transitions will be
performed at the same timing. The maximum number of addresses
that can be specified at the same time is 32 points.
- Specify the signal value following the address. The hexadecimal
number can be specified with the prefix “16#”.
- Specify the data type following the signal value.

- 394 -
 7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

Data type Bit Byte Word Dword

Abbreviation Bi B W D

- This command can be omitted.

- CHAIN (abbreviation C)
Move the control to another signal operation file.
- As the following argument, specify a file name in the format of
“C:\...\ file name. csv”.
- Relative path from the execution folder can also be specified.
- When this command exists, any lines after this command in the file are
discarded.
- This command can be omitted.

PMC SIGNAL DATA

REMARK,ABC

SET,0,X0.0,1,Bi,X0.1,0, Bi,X20,16#3,B

SET,100,X0.0,0, Bi,X0.1,1, Bi,X20,16#2,B

SET,200,X0.0,1, Bi,X0.1,0, Bi,X20,16#1,B

CHAIN, C:\ filename. csv

Fig.7.4 (a) Example of display in text form

PMC SIGNAL DATA

REMARK ABC
SET 0 X0.0 1 Bi X0.1 0 Bi X20 16#3 B
SET 100 X0.0 0 Bi X0.1 1 Bi X20 16#2 B
SET 200 X0.0 1 Bi X0.1 0 Bi X20 16#1 B
CHAIN C:\filename.csv
Fig.7.4 (b) Example of display in table

- 395 -
7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

When replaying the file of Fig.7.4 (a), (b), the signals will change as
follows.

Fig.7.4 (c) Signal transition

- About the error

When any error is detected, the whole data in the file is discarded.

- 396 -
 7.SIGNAL OPERATION REPLAY FUNCTION

7.5 CONVERTING TRACED SIGNALS

Select signals from the trace result data created by the trace function of built-in PMC
and FANUC LADDER-III, and convert them to the signal transition record.

7.5.1 Procedure to Convert

1. Select “Open” from the toolbar.

2. Specify the file name and select <Open >.

Fig.7.5.1 (a) Open file

3. When you select a trace result file, it is recognized automatically and the list of
the sampling address of the trace is displayed. Then, check the addresses you
want to extract.

Fig.7.5.1 (b) Sampling address list

4. Select <OK>. The signal transitions of the selected sampling addresses are
converted and stored into the memory as the data of signal operation replay
function.

- 397 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8 MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

- 398 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.1 OUTLINE
Machine signal simulation function is a function to simulate I/O signals of machine
side.
To provide the external input for PMC simulation function to debug ladder, there are
methods to use the signal operation replay function and to use I/O operation panel.
In the debug using I/O operation panel, the input signals for PMC simulation function
should be operated manually. And with the signal operation replay function, the
operations of signals on I/O operation panel are recorded and replayed. In these
conventional methods of debugging, you have to check the response from PMC
simulation function at some input signal transitions, to confirm the behavior of the
ladder program.
Using the machine signal simulation function, the input signals are provided to the
PMC simulation function automatically by programming the response of machine side
according to output signals from the PMC simulation function by ladder and/or
FOCAS2 compatible function. Consequently, you can debug the ladder in the
environment closer to the real environment because the signal transitions by machine
side are simulated.

Fig.8.1 (a) Machine signal simulation function

- 399 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

There are two ways to use this function.

1. Using machine signal simulator.

Use the machine signal simulator which is embedded in the PMC simulation
function. The machine signal simulator is used to make response to the signals
from PMC simulation function by programming ladder. Executing the ladder
on the machine signal simulator, the signals from machine side is provided
automatically to PMC simulation function, in the response of the output signals
from PMC simulation function to machine.

Realized by ladder program

PMC simulation function Machine signal simulator

I/O area

Fig.8.1 (b) Machine simulation by machine signal simulator

2. Using machine API function

The interface is provided to operate the signals by the machine signal API
function. By programming and executing an application which controls the
signals, the response to PMC simulation function can be provided.

Realized by FOCAS2
compatible function

PMC simulation function FOCAS2/ Application

Ethernet (Machine simulator etc.)

I/O area Commu-
pmc_rdpmcrng()
nication
interface
pmc_wrpmcrng()

Read and write the I/O

signals by FOCAS2
compatible function

Fig.8.1 (c) Machine simulation by using machine signal API function

The simulation form “1.” using the machine signal simulator is a function to realize a
simple signal control by making a ladder.

- 400 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

The simulation form “2.” using the machine signal API function may be used to
realize machine simulation that MTB makes an application to control a complicated
signal behavior and to read the machine positions. Using the compatible functions
with FOCAS2/Ethernet function, applications can read and write the PMC signals etc.
This function is available when PMC simulation function is active. Both of the
machine signal simulator “1.” and the machine signal API function “2.” can be used at
the same time.

NOTE
The Machine signal simulation function works without
displaying window when checking the “Hide [PMC] menu” on
the Machine composition setting.

- 401 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.2 MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATOR

This section describes about the machine simulation using the machine signal
simulator.

8.2.1 Outline
The machine signal simulator is used to make response to the signals from PMC
simulation function using ladder. This function is embedded in the PMC simulation
function. The machine signal simulator shares the signal area with the PMC
simulation function. Therefore, the machine signal simulator can refer the signals of
Y address etc. of the PMC simulation function, and write the result of calculation by
ladder into X address etc. of the PMC simulation function, to realize the simulation of
the signals from machine.

About multi-path PMC

In debug at multi-path PMC, you can make ladders of machine signal simulator which
corresponds to each PMC path.

PMC simulation function Machine signal simulator

1st PMC 1st ladder

I/O area

2nd PMC 2nd ladder

I/O area

3rd PMC 3rd ladder

I/O area

Fig.8.2.1 (a) Debugging of multi-path PMC

- 402 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

About DCSPMC
Machine signal simulator does not have DCSPMC.
Instead, you can use 5th ladder to to debug DCSPMC.

PMC simulation function Machine signal simulator

1st PMC 1st ladder
I/O area

2nd PMC 2nd ladder

I/O area
…

…
DCSPMC 5th ladder
I/O area

Fig.8.2.1 (a) Debugging of multi-path PMC

- 403 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Specification of ladder

Basic specification

Table8.2.1 (a) Basic specification of machine signal simulator (1)

Function Machine signal simulator for CNC GUIDE
of FS31i-A, FS0-iD
1st ladder 2nd ladder 3rd ladder
Model 31i -A PMC (PMC 31i -A PMC (PMC 31i -A PMC (PMC
Memory-C) Memory-C) Memory-C)
Program capacity Up to about Up to about 32,000 steps Up to about 32,000 steps
32,000 steps

Table8.2.1 (b) Basic specification of machine signal simulator (2)

Function Machine signal simulator for CNC GUIDE of
FS30i-B, FS30i-B 32AX, FS30i-B 48AX, FS30i-B Plus, FS31i-B, FS31i-B Plus, FS31i-B5,
FS31i-B5 Plus, FS32i-B, FS32i-B Plus, FS35i-B, FS31i-LB, FS31i-PB, FS0i-F, FS0i-F Plus
1st ladder 2nd ladder 3rd ladder 3rd ladder 4th ladder 5th ladder
Model 31i –B PMC 31i –B PMC 31i –B PMC 31i –B PMC 31i –B PMC 31i –B PMC
(PMC (PMC (PMC (PMC (PMC (PMC
Memory-D) Memory-D) Memory-D) Memory-D) Memory-D) Memory-D)
Program Up to about Up to about Up to about Up to about Up to about Up to about
capacity 32,000 steps 32,000 steps 32,000 steps 32,000 steps 32,000 steps 32,000 steps

NOTE
1 Processing may take time according to operating environment
when step number is large. It is recommended to make the
sum of ladder steps about 5000 steps.
2 The model of ladder program used for Machine signal simulator
will be “31i-A PMC”, even in the case of CNC GUIDE of
“FS0i-D/0i Mate-D”.
3 The model of ladder program used for Machine signal simulator
will be “31i-B PMC”, even in the case of CNC GUIDE of
“FS35i-B”.

- 404 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Functional Instructions
Following table shows functional instruction list for the machine signal simulator.

Table8.2.1 (c) Functional instructions for machine signal simulator

(✓: Available. ∆: Executed as NOP instruction. －: Not
available.)

Instruction Instruction SUB Machine signal simulator for

Processing
group name No. CNC GUIDE

Timer 1 TMR 3 Timer processing ✓ (Note 1)

2 TMRB 24 Fixed-timer processing ✓
3 TMRC 54 Timer processing ✓
4 TMRBF 77 Fixed off-delay timer processing ✓
Counter 1 CTR 5 Counter processing ✓ (Note 1)
2 CTRB 56 Counter processing ✓ (Note 1)
3 CTRC 55 Counter processing ✓
Data transfer 1 MOVB 43 1-byte transfer ✓
2 MOVW 44 2-byte transfer ✓
3 MOVD 47 4-byte transfer ✓
4 MOVN 45 Transfer of arbitrary number of bytes ✓
5 MOVE 8 Data transfer after logical product ✓
6 MOVOR 28 Data transfer after logical sum ✓
7 XMOVB 35 Index modification binary data transfer ✓
8 XMOV 18 Index modification data transfer ✓
Comparison 1 EQB 200 1-byte comparison (equal) ✓
2 EQW 201 2-byte comparison (equal) ✓
3 EQD 202 4-byte comparison (equal) ✓
4 NEB 203 1-byte comparison (not equal) ✓
5 NEW 204 2-byte comparison (not equal) ✓
6 NED 205 4-byte comparison (not equal) ✓
7 GTB 206 1-byte comparison (greater than) ✓
8 GTW 207 2-byte comparison (greater than) ✓
9 GTD 208 4-byte comparison (greater than) ✓
10 LTB 209 1-byte comparison (less than) ✓
11 LTW 210 2-byte comparison (less than) ✓
12 LTD 211 4-byte comparison (less than) ✓
13 GEB 212 1-byte comparison (greater or equal) ✓
14 GEW 213 2-byte comparison (greater or equal) ✓
15 GED 214 4-byte comparison (greater or equal) ✓
16 LEB 215 1-byte comparison (less or equal) ✓
17 LEW 216 2-byte comparison (less or equal) ✓
18 LED 217 4-byte comparison (less or equal) ✓
19 RNGB 218 1-byte comparison (range) ✓

- 405 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Instruction Instruction SUB Machine signal simulator for

Processing
group name No. CNC GUIDE

20 RNGW 219 2-byte comparison (range) ✓

21 RNGD 220 4-byte comparison (range) ✓
22 COMPB 32 Binary comparison ✓
23 COMP 15 Comparison ✓
24 COIN 16 Coincidence check ✓
Data search 1 DSCHB 34 Binary data search ✓
2 DSCH 17 Data search ✓
Bit operation 1 DIFU 57 Rising-edge detection ✓
2 DIFD 58 Falling-edge detection ✓
3 EOR 59 Exclusive OR ✓
4 AND 60 Logical AND ✓
5 OR 61 Logical OR ✓
6 NOT 62 Logical NOT ✓
7 PARI 11 Parity check ✓
8 SFT 33 Shift register ✓
Code 1 COD 7 Code conversion ✓
conversion 2 CODB 27 Binary code conversion ✓
3 DCNV 14 Data conversion ✓
4 DCNVB 31 Extended data conversion ✓
5 DEC 4 Decoding ✓
6 DECB 25 Binary decoding ✓
Operation 1 ADDB 36 Binary addition ✓
2 SUBB 37 Binary subtraction ✓
3 MULB 38 Binary multiplication ✓
4 DIVB 39 Binary division ✓
5 ADD 19 BCD addition ✓
6 SUB 20 BCD subtraction ✓
7 MUL 21 BCD multiplication ✓
8 DIV 22 BCD division ✓
9 NUMEB 40 Binary constant definition ✓
10 NUME 23 BCD-constant definition ✓
CNC function 1 DISPB 41 Message display ∆
2 EXIN 42 External data input ∆
3 WINDR 51 CNC window data read ✓ (Note 2)
4 WINDW 52 CNC window data write ∆
5 AXCTL 53 PMC axis control ∆
6 PSGN2 63 Position signal ✓
7 PSGNL 50 Position signal ✓
Program 1 COM 9 Common line control ✓
control 2 COME 29 End of common line control ✓
3 JMP 10 Jump ✓

- 406 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Instruction Instruction SUB Machine signal simulator for

Processing
group name No. CNC GUIDE

4 JMPE 30 End of jump ✓

5 JMPB 68 Label jump 1 ✓
6 JMPC 73 Label jump 2 ✓
7 LBL 69 Label ✓
8 CALL 65 Conditional subprogram call ✓
9 CALLU 66 Unconditional subprogram call ✓
10 SP 71 Subprogram ✓
11 SPE 72 End of subprogram ✓
12 END1 1 End of first-level program ✓
13 END2 2 End of second-level program ✓
14 END3 48 End of third-level program ✓
15 END 64 End of ladder program ✓
16 NOP 70 No operation ✓
17 CS 74 Case call ✓
18 CM 75 Sub program call in case call ✓
19 CE 76 End of case call ✓
Rotation 1 ROT 6 Rotation control ✓
control 2 ROTB 26 Binary rotation control ✓
Invalid 1 SPCNT 46 Spindle control ∆
instruction 2 DISP 49 Message display ∆
3 MMCWR 98 MMC window data read ∆
4 MMCWW 99 MMC window data write ∆
5 FNC90 90 Arbitrary-function instruction 1 ∆
6 FNC91 91 Arbitrary-function instruction 2 ∆
7 FNC92 92 Arbitrary-function instruction 3 ∆
8 FNC93 93 Arbitrary-function instruction 4 ∆
9 FNC94 94 Arbitrary-function instruction 5 ∆
10 FNC95 95 Arbitrary-function instruction 6 ∆
11 FNC96 96 Arbitrary-function instruction 7 ∆
12 FNC97 97 Arbitrary-function instruction 8 ∆

- 407 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

NOTE
1 Memory of PMC parameter is common between PMC simulation
function and machine signal simulator. So, set unique number
not to conflict the number parameter of the functional
instructions in two ladder programs which shares the memory.
2 Only the function “Reading the machine position (machine
coordinates) of controlled axes” is available. Other function
codes do not work.
3 The Machine signal simulator does not support either of
“Extended PMC Ladder Instruction Function” and “Function
Block Function” options.

- 408 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

About a signal address of machine signal simulator

A machine signal simulator shares all PMC addresses with PMC simulation function.
So, it can refer to the signals of the PMC simulation function using the same address.
But, the signal area of Y address of the PMC simulation function is mapped as the
signal area of X address of the machine signal simulator. And the signal area of X
and Y address, vice versa. So, the signal written to Y address by PMC simulation
function can be referred as X address of machine signal simulator. And the signal
written to Y address by machine signal simulator can be referred as X address of PMC
simulation function.
F address and G address are also referred in the same way.

PMC simulation function Machine signal simulator

Y X

X Y

D D

Fig.8.2.1 (b) Relation of address

Address list of machine simulator and corresponding address of PMC simulation

function is shown in the following table

Table8.2.1 (d) Address list and corresponding table of machine signal simulator
Machine signal simulator Corresponding address of
Signal kind Symbol
for CNC GUIDE PMC simulation function

Signal input to the PMC from the X X0 to X127 Y0 to Y127

machine X200 to X327 Y200 to Y327
(Note 1) X400 to X527 Y400 to Y527
X600 to X727 Y600 to Y727
X1000 to X1127 Y1000 to Y1127
Signal output from the PMC to the Y Y0 to Y127 X0 to X127
machine Y200 to Y327 X200 to X327
(Note 1) Y400 to Y527 X400 to X527
Y600 to Y727 X600 to X727
Y1000 to Y1127 X1000 to X1127

- 409 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Machine signal simulator Corresponding address of

Signal kind Symbol
for CNC GUIDE PMC simulation function

Signal input to the PMC from the F F0 to F767 G0 to G767

CNC (Note 2) F1000 to F1767 G1000 to 1767
F2000 to F2767 G2000 to 2767
F3000 to F3767 G3000 to 3767
F4000 to F4767 G4000 to 4767
F5000 to F5767 G5000 to 5767
F6000 to F6767 G6000 to 6767
F7000 to F7767 G7000 to 7767
F8000 to F8767 G8000 to 8767
F9000 to F9767 G9000 to G9767
Signal output from the PMC to the G G0 to G767 F0 to F767
CNC G1000 to 1767 F1000 to F1767
(Note 2) G2000 to 2767 F2000 to F2767
G3000 to 3767 F3000 to F3767
G4000 to 4767 F4000 to F4767
G5000 to 5767 F5000 to F5767
G6000 to 6767 F6000 to F6767
G7000 to 7767 F7000 to F7767
G8000 to 8767 F8000 to F8767
G9000 to G9767 F9000 to F9767
Signal input to other PMC path M M0 to M767 M0 to M767
Signal output from other PMC path N N0 to N767 N0 to N767
Internal relay (Note 3) R* R0 to R15999 R0 to R15999
System relay (Note 4) Z Z0 to Z499 (None)
Extra relay E E0 to E9999 E0 to E9999
Message display A*
(Note 3)
• Display request A0 to A499 A0 to A499
• Status display A9000 to A9499 A9000 to A9499
Timer (Note 3) T*
• Variable timer T0 to T999 T0 to T999
• Variable-timer precision T9000 to T9999 T9000 to T9999
Counter (Note 3) C*
• Variable counter C0 to C799 C0 to C799
• Fixed counter C5000 to C5399 C5000 to C5399
Keep relay (Note 3) K*
• User area K0 to K199 K0 to K199
• System area K900 to K999 (None)
(Note 4)
Data table (Note 3) D* D0 to D19999 D0 to D19999
Label (Note 5) L L1 to L9999 (None)
Subprogram (Note 5) P P1 to P5000 (None)

- 410 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

NOTE
1 When you use M-NET converter in the Function for transfer line,
X address and Y address of Ladder2 are not available.
2 G address of CNC GUIDE can be referred from Machine signal
simulator. But, do not write F address because it is also written
by CNC simulation function and it will be duplicate writing.
3 Address range of the machine signal simulator in CNC GUIDE
corresponds to PMC memory C or D. When PMC simulation
function is configured as smaller PMC memory, the common
part of the addresses marked with “*” can be referred from PMC
simulation function and the machine signal simulator with the
same address. The part of these addresses which exists only
on the machine signal simulator side, can be used for the work
area for the ladder in the machine signal simulator.
4 Signal area of system internal relay R9000 to R9499 or Z0 to
Z499 and system keep relay K900 to K999 exists independently
between PMC simulation function and machine signal simulator.
So, these signals of PMC simulation function are not shared and
cannot be referred from the machine signal simulator.
5 Because address areas of label and sub program are
independent of PMC simulation function, you can use the
number used in the ladder of PMC simulation function.

Supplement of note 2
The example of handling of D address area when PMC simulation function is
configured as PMC memory B is as follows.
The area from D0 to D9999 is shared between machine signal simulator and PMC
simulation function. The other area from D10000 to D19999 is not shared, and can
be used as the work area of the machine signal simulator.

Machine signal simulator PMC simulation function

PMC Memory-C PMC Memory-B

D0
Shared Shared
D9999
D10000
Not shared
D19999

Fig.8.2.1 (c) Supplement of note 2

- 411 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.2.2 Notes from Installation to Starting Application

Installation and uninstallation
The machine signal simulator is installed and uninstalled with the PMC simulation
function.

About setting of using machine signal simulator

You can choose whether to use the machine signal simulator.
Set the option in the option screen or machine composition setting screen at CNC
GUIDE.

Setting in machine composition screen

Set the option in the “Edit Machine Composition” or “New Machine Composition”
screen of the machine composition setting tool. Check “Use Machine Signal
Simulator” to use it. In that case, you need to check “Use PMC Simulator” before it.

Fig.8.2.2 (a) Setting in the “Edit Machine Composition”

screen of the machine composition

NOTE
The Machine signal simulation function works without
displaying window when checking the “Hide [PMC] menu” on
the Machine composition setting.

- 412 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Setting in the option screen

The setting on the option screen is also available for the CNC GUIDE.
Check “Use Machine Signal Simulator” to use it.

Fig.8.2.2 (b) Setting in the option screen

NOTE
It is necessary to restart the PMC simulation function to reflect
the setting.

- 413 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.2.3 Start and Exit of Machine Signal Simulator

Starting machine signal simulator
On the start menu, click [ FANUC CNC GUIDE(Model name) ] – [ CNC GUIDE
(Model name) ], then the PMC simulation function starts and the machine signal
simulator starts at the same time.

Fig.8.2.3 (a) Start menu

Machine signal simulator

PMC simulation function

Fig.8.2.3 (b) Start of PMC simulation function and machine signal simulator

Exiting machine signal simulator

When exiting the PMC simulation function, the machine simulator exits
automatically.

- 414 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.2.4 Machine Signal Simulator Screen

When machine signal simulator is started, the following screen is displayed.
Execution state etc. of the ladder of machine signal simulator is displayed.

Title information

Communication status
Alarm with FANUC LADDER-III

Ladder execution status

Ladder run/stop

Fig.8.2.4 (a) Machine signal simulator screen

- Title information
Displays the information of the title data in each path of multi-path PMC.

- Ladder execution status

Displays run/stop status of the ladder.
: Ladder is running.
: Ladder is stopping.

- Alarm
Displays alarm status. The content of the PMC alarm can be confirmed with
FANUC LADDER-III. Refer to “7.3.6 PMC alarm message list” for details.
: Alarm occurs
: No alarm

- Run/stop Ladder
Button to run or stop ladder.
: Run ladder
: Stop ladder

- 415 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

- Communication with FANUC LADDER-III

Displays the communication status with FANUC LADDER-III.
: Connecting
: Disconnecting

- Port Setting
Button for setting port number.
: Displays the port setting dialog.

It is a setting for connection between FANUC LADDER-III and the machine

signal simulator. Specify the port number of Ethernet that the machine signal
simulator uses.

Fig.8.2.4 (b) Port Setting dialog

- 416 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.2.5 Procedure of Machine Simulation with Machine Signal Simulator

This section describes the procedure of executing the machine signal simulation
function.

Start

(1) Making the ladder of machine signal simulator. Refer to “Making the ladder”.

(2) Starting PMC simulation function and machine

signal simulator.
Refer to “Procedure of machine
(3) Storing the ladder to machine signal simulator.
simulation”.

(4) Running the ladder of PMC simulation function

and machine signal simulator. (Share of signals)

End

Fig.8.2.5 (a) Flow of procedure

FANUC LADDER-III

Ladder data 1 Making ladder with

Y0.0 signals to debug

3 Storing

PMC simulation function Machine signal simulator

4 share of signals
I/O area

2 Start simulation

Fig.8.2.5 (b) Outline of machine signal simulation procedure

- 417 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Procedure of machine simulation

The machine signal simulation using machine signal simulator is executed following
procedure below.

1. Making the ladder of machine signal simulator

1-1 Make the ladder program of machine signal simulator with FANUC
LADDER-III. Pick out the signals of PMC simulation function which shall
be referred or changed by the machine signals simulator. Make the ladder
that handles these signals. For more detail about how to make ladder, refer
to “Making the ladder”.

Ex) Suppose making ladder of machine signal simulator like following. In

this case, one second after Y12.3 of PMC simulation function is turned
on, X45.6 of PMC simulation function will be turned on.

Fig.8.2.5 (c) Example of making the ladder of machine signal simulator

1-2 Compile the created ladder.

2. Starting PMC simulation function and machine signal simulator.

Start the PMC simulation function from the start menu. After PMC simulation
function starts, the machine signal simulator starts also.
About the detail of starting procedure, refer to “7.3.3 Start and exit of machine
signal simulator”.

3. Storing the ladder.

3-1 Change the setting of FANUC LADDER-III so that it can connect to the
machine signal simulator.

- 418 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

(1) Select [Tool] – [Communication]. Select [Network Address] tab and

click the <Add Host> button. The following dialog is displayed.

(2) When you try to make FANUC LADDER-III to connect the machine
signal simulator on the same PC, enter “LOCALHOST” to Host.
When you try to make it connect to one on different PC, enter the IP
address of the PC on which the machine signal simulator works. Set
“8191” to the port number in both case.

Fig.8.2.5 (d) Host setting

NOTE
The port number of machine signal simulator is “8191” in initial
setting. When this port number is not available in your
environment, set a different port number both in machine signal
simulator screen and in the setting of FANUC LADDER-III.
When you change the port number, you need to restart the PMC
simulation function.

(3) Select [Setting] tab, and move “LOCALHOST”, which was created in
3-1-2, to “Use device” box.

- 419 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Fig.8.2.5 (e) Use device setting

3-2 Store the ladder made in “1” to the machine simulator. After connecting
with FANUC LADDER-III, start the storing of ladder.

3-3 Perform backup in FANUC LADDER-III after storing, and the ladder
program is saved. The saved ladder will be read and executed
automatically when it starts next time.

4. Starting debug.

4-1 Start the debug by running the ladder of PMC simulation function and
machine signal simulator. Using the online monitor and online editing in
the connected FANUC LADDER-III, you can confirm the behavior of your
ladder.

Making ladder
Here describes how to make ladder of machine signal simulator.

Procedure of making ladder

Procedure of making ladder is described as follows.

1. Making ladder of machine signal simulator.

Create a new ladder program of PMC type 31i-A PMC memory C or PMC type
31i-B PMC memory D, using FANUC LADDER-III.
If the target PMC simulation function is configured as multi-path PMC, create a
new ladder programs that correspond to each path, as you need.

2. Making ladder logic.

Make ladder logic, keeping the following points in mind.

- 420 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

- The machine signal simulator shares all PMC addresses of PMC simulation
function. So, it can refer to the signals of the PMC simulator in the same
address notation. However, the signal area of Y address of the PMC
simulation function is mapped as the signal area of X address of the machine
signal simulator. And the signal written in Y address by PMC simulation
function can be referred as X address of machine signal simulator. F and G
addresses are also accessed in the same way.

Ex) Emergency stop signal X8.4 of PMC simulation function can be

referred as Y8.4 in the machine signal simulator.

NOTE
Signal areas of system internal relay R9000 to R9499 or Z0 to
Z499 and system keep relay K900 to K999 are not shared.

- If the program which writes the same PMC memory area in PMC simulation
function and machine signal simulator is made, the behavior may not be
stable and simulation may not work as expected. So, the range of PMC
memory used by machine simulator should not overlap with the range used
by PMC simulation function, and avoid writing the same PMC memory
from both of them.

- 421 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

NOTE
1 The memory of PMC Parameter is shared between the PMC simulation function and the machine
signal simulator. Therefore, do not use any duplicated number for the functional instructions
listed below that uses PMC Parameter.
<Functional instructions using PMC Parameter>
- TMR (Timer : SUB 3)
- CTR (Counter : SUB 5)
- CTRB (Fixed Counter : SUB 56)
The same number for the following functional instructions can be used for both of PMC
simulator function and machine signal simulator.
<Functional instructions which can use independent instruction number for each PMC path>
- TMRB (Fixed Timer : SUB 24)
- TMRBF (Off Delay Fixed Timer : SUB 77)
- DIFU (Rising Edge Detection : SUB 57)
- DIFD (Falling Edge Detection : SUB 58)
2 Because the machine signal simulator is used to debug the ladder of the PMC simulation
function, the functional instructions related to CNC do not work, except the instructions that
refer the machine position on the PMC simulation function side.
<Not available instructions>
- DISPB (Message display : SUB 41)
- EXIN (External data input : SUB 42)
- WINDR (CNC window data read : SUB 51)
(Excluding “function code 28 : Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled
axes”)
- WINDW (CNC window data write : SUB 52)
- AXCTL (PMC axis control : SUB 53)
<Available instructions>
- WINDR (CNC window data read : SUB 51)
(Only “function code 28 : Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled
axes”)
- PSGNL (Position signal output : SUB 50)
- PSGN2 (Position signal output 2 : SUB 63)
3 The Machine signal simulator does not support either of “Extended PMC Ladder Instruction
Function” and “Function Block Function” options.

- 422 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

For example, consider the following machine signal simulation.

• - Turn on X45.6 one second after Y12.3 turns on.

Y12.3 of PMC simulation function can be referred as X12.3 of machine signal

simulator. And, X45.6 of PMC simulation function can be referred as Y45.6 of
machine signal simulator. Thus you should create a ladder as follows.

Fig.8.2.5 (f) Example of ladder of machine signal simulator

- 423 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

Making ladder using symbol

Using proper symbol data, ladder program of machine signal simulator can be
programmed using the same name as the symbol defined in the ladder of PMC
simulation function.
And if you use a ladder with the extended symbol feature, it is easy to follow the
modification on the assignment of the addresses of the PMC simulation function.
Here shows the example of making and modifying the ladder of machine signal
simulator using the extended symbol feature.

Make ladder by using extended symbol

Consider the following machine signal simulation. It is an example of making the

example of Figure 26.3.5(g) by using the symbol.
- Turn on SYM_X one second after SYM_Y turns on.

Operation procedure
“1.” and “2.” are the operations of PMC simulation function side.

1. Open the LAD file of the ladder of PMC simulation function by FANUC
LADDER-III.

Fig.8.2.5 (g) Ladder of the PMC simulation function

2. Open the symbol comment editing screen and export the symbols in the PMC
simulation function.

Fig.8.2.5 (h) Export of the symbols

“3.” and after are the operations of machine signal simulator side.

- 424 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

3. Create a new program of the machine signal simulator by FANUC LADDER-III.

Select the PMC memory D and check the extended symbol.

Fig.8.2.5 (i) New Program

4. Open the symbol comment editing screen and import the symbol data exported in
“2.”.

Fig.8.2.5 (j) Import of the symbol

- 425 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

5. Set up multi address replace function with the following settings and exchange
the X and Y addresses.

Fig.8.2.5 (k) Multi address replace

Replace

Fig.8.2.5 (l) Setting of the symbol after executing multi address replace

6. Pick out the signals of PMC simulation function which is referred and changed
from the machine signal simulator. Make the ladder logic using symbols of
these signals.

Fig.8.2.5 (m) Ladder of the machine signal simulator

- 426 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

When address of PMC simulation function's ladder changed

Here shows the example of changing the address of SYM_X to X245.6 and SYM_Y
to Y212.3.

Operation procedure

1. Open the LAD file of the ladder of PMC simulation function by FANUC
LADDER-III.

Fig.8.2.5 (n) Ladder of the PMC simulation function

2. Open the symbol comment editing screen and export the symbols in the PMC
simulation function.

3. Open the LAD file of the ladder of machine signal simulator by FANUC
LADDER-III.

Fig.8.2.5 (o) Ladder of the machine signal simulator

4. Open the symbol comment editing screen and import the symbol data exported in
“2.”.

Fig.8.2.5 (p) Ladder of machine signal simulator just after importing

- 427 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

5. Replace the X, Y address to swap with each other in multi address function.

Fig.8.2.5 (q) Ladder of machine signal simulator

after executing multi address replace

By defining the symbols using the extended symbol function as mentioned above, you
can modify the ladder following this simple procedure; export/import the symbol data
and use multi address replace function.

NOTE
In case of ladder without the extended symbol feature, even if
you program the logic using symbols, you cannot modify the
address in the way described as “When address of PMC
simulation function's ladder changed”. When you changed the
address of the PMC simulation function, you have to modify the
corresponding address in the ladder of machine signal
simulator.

- 428 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.2.6 PMC Alarm Message List

The typical PMC alarms issued by the machine signal simulator are described as
follows. Refer to the PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL for other PMC alarms.

Table8.2.6 (a) PMC alarm message list

Message Description Measure
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR The sequence program exceeds the Reduce the size of the sequence
(OPTION) maximum steps. program.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH PMC type setting of the sequence Convert the PMC type to 31i-A PMC
program is different from 31i-A PMC (PMC memory C) or 31i-B PMC
(PMC memory C) or 31i-B PMC (PMC (PMC memory D) using FANUC
memory D). LADDER-III.
ER22 NO PROGRAM Back up operation is never executed Execute the backup operation of the
after starting the machine signal sequence program
simulator.

8.2.7 Reference of CNC Information

This section describes how to refer the CNC information from machine signal
simulator.

- Reference of machine position

Read the machine position of the CNC simulation function by the window
instruction in the ladder of machine signal simulator. Use function code 28 :
Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled axes.

NOTE
1 Use the address which is not used in the PMC simulation
function as the control data address of the window instruction.
2 Window instruction other than function code 28 does not work.

Moreover, position signal function can check whether the current machine
position of CNC simulation function is in some area or not. Use PSGN2
(SUB63) or PSGNL (SUB50).

- 429 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.3 MACHINE SIGNAL API FUNCTION

This section describes about the machine simulation using the machine signal API
function.

8.3.1 Outline
The interface is provided to operate the signals by the machine signal API function.
By programming and executing an application which controls the signals, the
response to PMC simulation function can be provided.

Realized by FOCAS2
compatible function

PMC simulation function FOCAS2/ Application

Ethernet (Machine simulator etc.)
I/O area Commu-
pmc_rdpmcrng()
nication
interface
pmc_wrpmcrng()

Fig.8.3.1 (a) Machine signal API function

The same CNC/PMC data window library as a real machine is available, and various
data and information can be exchanged with PMC simulation function via
FOCAS2/Ethernet. And the created application may also be connected to a real
machine.
In the machine signal API function of PMC simulation function, several functions are
provided, which is necessary for simulation of machine. User may create original
application using these functions. For instance, you can create an application to
show the screen on which the axis moves according to the read machine position
value and make a specific signal that means the axis reaches to a certain position.
The PMC simulation function can accept the connection either from the same PC or
from other PC. In case of connection from the same PC, specify “127.0.0.1” to the
character string which means the IP address of the target in the argument of the
cnc_allclibhndl3() function described later. Moreover, to connect on the same PC that
is not connected to an effective network, it is necessary to create a virtual network
with using a Loopback Adapter.

NOTE
To use the machine signal API function, the following versions
of “FOCAS1/2 Library disk” (A02B-0207-K737) are required:
 FS31i-A 2.0 or later
 FS0i-D 3.3 or later

- 430 -
 8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.3.2 List of Library Function

The following CNC/PMC Data window library can be used in the same way as with a
real machine and the application that uses only these functions can be connected with
PMC simulation function.

CNC window function

cnc_allclibhndl3() Get a library handle
cnc_freelibhndl() Free library handle
cnc_machine() Read machine axis position (Note1)
cnc_setpath() Set path number(for multi-path)
cnc_getpath() Get path number(for multi-path)

PMC window function

pmc_rdpmcrng() Read PMC data(area specified)
pmc_wrpmcrng() Write PMC data(area specified) (Note2)
pmc_rdpmcinfo() Read PMC data information
pmc_select_pmc_unit() Select the PMC (Note3)
pmc_get_current_pmc_unit() Get the current PMC unit type

NOTE
1 The value is read in the unit system according to parameter
3104#0 in the cnc_machine() function. An error (EW_FUNC) is
returned in the PMC simulation function mode.
2 You can write to X and F addresses by the pmc_wrpmcrng()
function when you connect to the PMC simulation function.

- 431 -
8.MACHINE SIGNAL SIMULATION FUNCTION

8.3.3 CNC/PMC Window Function

Library handle
To use the CNC/PMC window function, it is necessary to get the library handle in
advance. You can obtain a library handle by cnc_allclibhndl3() function and
released by cnc_freelibhndl() function. The character string of the IP address of the
PC on which the PMC simulation function is working should be specified in the
argument of cnc_allclibhndl3() function. (example “192.168.0.1”)
Once a library handle is obtained, it should be held while a function call is made in
the application, because it is necessary to pass the handle number as an argument to
every CNC/PMC window function.
A library handle is owned by the task that obtained it. Even if the task-A which has
already obtained a library handle notifies its library handle to another task-B, the
task-B cannot use the library handle.
One task can obtain multiple library handles by calling the function to get a library
handle repeatedly. For example, on the 2-path control system, a task may obtain two
library handles and use them for each path individually.
When a task terminates, the library handles that belong to the task must be released by
cnc freelibhndl() function.

CAUTION
If a task terminates without releasing its library handles, the memory area assigned for the management of
the handle remains allocated and may be accumulated as unusable memory. If it happens repeatedly, a
large amount of memory may be consumed and may cause shortage of memory or failure to obtain a new
library handle.

8.3.4 Sample Application

The sample of using machine signal API function is provided. It is stored in the
following folder.
(CD-ROM drive name):\Samples\Machine Signal API

- Entire development environment (sample.sln, etc.)

- Sample ladder program (SAMPLE_LADDER_FS0ID.MEM /
SAMPLE_LADDER_FS31IA.MEM)

This sample application is made using Microsoft Visual Basic .NET. As for the
explanation of operation and detail of sample application, refer to “Readme.txt”.

NOTE
You must do build once before modifying it when changing the
sample application.

- 432 -
 9.VARIOUS SETTINGS

9 VARIOUS SETTINGS
This section describes various setting to make the CNC GUIDE suit for customer's
environment of CNC/PMC.

- 433 -
9.VARIOUS SETTINGS

9.1 PMC OPTION SETTINGS

You can choose following PMC options. Select [Tool] – [Option].

Table9.1 (a) Option setting list

Tab
General PMC Memory Type Machine Operator’s Panel

Settings -Ethernet port number -PMC Memory Type -Address Setting

-Use Machine Signal Simulator setting -Use Key Top
-Restore X Signal State Customization Function

NOTE
The PMC option setting is unavailable when checking the “Hide
[PMC] menu” on the Machine composition setting.

Ethernet port number

For details, refer to the section 11.3.

Use Machine Signal Simulator

For details, refer to the section 8.2.2.

Restore X Signal State

In case of checking the [Restore X Signal State], X signal state when exiting at the
last time is restored at the startup of the CNC GUIDE.

NOTE
X1000 to X1127 are not restored.

PMC Memory Type setting

Set PMC memory type.

Address Setting
For details, refer to the section 6.2.

Use Key Top Customization Function

For details, refer to the section 6.2.

- 434 -
 10.INPUT/OUTPUT AND BACKUP OF PMC DATA

10 INPUT/OUTPUT AND BACKUP OF PMC

DATA
Input/output and backup the following PMC data can be operated by the PMC I/O
operation. You can also perform same things by import, export and backup menu on
the PMC simulation function.
- Ladder
- PMC parameter
- PMC multi-language message

You can also save the trace result data.

- 435 -
10.INPUT/OUTPUT AND BACKUP OF PMC DATA

10.1 I/O OPERATION IN PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION

Input/output and backup the PMC data on the I/O screen of built-in PMC screen.

Fig.10.1 (a) I/O screen of built-in PMC

Refer to "I. CNC Simulation Function" for the input/output target folders in selecting
MEMORY CARD.

NOTE
1 The file name including only ASCII code can be used.
2 The difference between upper and lower case of letters is not
distinguished.
3 As for a file with long file name, the file name with short MS-DOS
form is displayed.
4 “FLOPPY” and “OTHERS” in the “DEVICE” is not available.

- 436 -
 11.COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC LADDER-III

11 COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC

LADDER-III

- 437 -
11.COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC LADDER-III

11.1 OUTLINE
PMC simulation function has a network communication function to connect with
FANUC LADDER-III online. You can use the following online functions on
FANUC LADDER-III as well as in case of connecting to an actual PMC.

- Monitor display of ladder

- Online edit of ladder
- Display and change PMC parameter
- Monitor display in state of signal
- I/O operation with PMC (load from PMC and store to PMC)

The PMC simulation function and FANUC LADDER-III can be connected either on
the same PC or between different PCs.

Setting for online connection

The necessary settings for the online connection for the PMC simulation function and
FANUC LADDER-III are as follows.

- Port number setting in the PMC simulation function

- Host setting in the FANUC LADDER-III
- Online monitor setting in the PMC screen of CNC GUIDE

- 438 -
 11.COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC LADDER-III

11.2 ETHERNET SETTING IN PC

Basic Ethernet setting such as IP address etc. depends on the network environment of
the PC on which PMC simulation function runs.

NOTE
Proper IP address should be assigned to the PC and TCP/IP
connection should be effective.
Therefore, in case the PMC simulation function and FANUC
LADDER-III are connected on a single PC, you may need to
connect the PC to an Ethernet router or a hub, or to install the
Loopback Adapter.

- 439 -
11.COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC LADDER-III

11.3 PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION SETTING

- Port number
Specify the port number to connect. Select [Tool] - [Option] – [General], and
set the port number.

- Online monitor setting

You need to set up built-in PMC online monitor. Set “HIGH SPEED” to
“USE”.

Fig.11.3 (a) I/O Online setting monitor of built-in PMC

- 440 -
 11.COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC LADDER-III

11.4 CONNECT TO PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ON SAME PC

To connect the PMC simulation function with FANUC LADDER-III on the same PC,
you need to set up FANUC LADDER-III and the PC.

Fig.11.4 (a) Connected on the same PC

PC Setting up
When connecting the PMC simulation function and the FANUC LADDER-III on a
PC that is not connected to an effective network, install the Loopback Adapter.
The Loopback Adapter is a tool of Microsoft corporation, and it builds virtual
network environment on a PC that is not connected to a network. Refer to the
homepage of Microsoft corporation and so on for the method of the setup.

Operation on FANUC LADDER-III

1. Select [Tool] – [Communication]. Select [Network Address] tab and click the
<Add Host> button. The following dialog is displayed, and then enter
“LOCALHOST” to Host.

Fig.11.4 (b) Host setting

- 441 -
11.COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC LADDER-III

2. Select [Setting] tab, and move “LOCALHOST”, which was created at 1, to “Use
device” box.

Fig.11.4 (c) Use device setting

- 442 -
 11.COMMUNICATION WITH FANUC LADDER-III

11.5 CONNECT TO PMC SIMULATION FUNCTION ON DIFFERENT

PC
To connect the PMC simulation function with FANUC LADDER-III on different PC,
you need to set up the communication setting of FANUC LADDER-III with IP
address of the PC on which the PMC simulation function works.

Fig.11.5 Connect to different PC

- 443 -
Appendix

- 444 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

A LIST OF OPTION

- 445 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

A.1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS OF CNC GUIDE

You can select the CNC Functions about CNC GUIDE as following.

31i-MODEL A
Name Drawing No.
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM J713
CONVERSION
3RD./4TH. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES J887
ADDITION OF TOOL PAIRS FOR TOOL LIFE J936
MANAGEMENT
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J919
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J895
48-PAIRS
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *1
BACKGROUND EDITING J956
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J814
BUILT-IN 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION R541
CANNED CYCLE J890
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH MANUAL S825
MOVE
CHOPPING J707
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER J720
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM J736
CONICAL / SPIRAL INTERPOLATION J780
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893
CUSTOM MACRO J873
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 1MB J738#1M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 256KB J738#256K
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 3MB J738#3M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 5MB J738#5M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL S674
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING J870
DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF DIAMETER/RADIUS S630
SPECIFICATION
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711

- 446 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911
F1-DIGIT FEED J820
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879
FIGURE COPYING J897
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607
G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH J839
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA S643
INVERSE TIME FEED J715
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION J710
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964
MACRO EXECUTOR J888
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC 1 S790
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC 2 S790
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION S789
MANUAL GUIDE i MULTI PATH LATHE S786
MANUAL GUIDE I TILTED WORKING PLANE MACHINING S788
FUNCTION
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET J881
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED S829
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES J877
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II J889
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813

- 447 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 J953
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE J948
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959
PATTERN DATA INPUT J884
PMC AXIS CONTROL ACCELERATION/DECELERATION R640
SPECIFICATION FEED
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815
POSITION SWITCH J846
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882
PROGRAM RESTART J838
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
Real time custom macro S842
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET S728
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971
SCALING J892
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION J803
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840
TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND WITH GUIDANCE R522
TOOL ATTACHMENT/DETACHMENT MANAGEMENT S997
FUNCTION
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION J931
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR OVERSIZE S602
TOOLS
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED DATA S834
EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED DATA S835
EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET S617
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925

- 448 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 1000 S833
PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 240 S831
PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 64 S830
PAIRS
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION J930
WORK PIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

- 449 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

0i MODEL D
The CNC Function which checked "○" at Package 1 or 2 is effective when package 1
or 2 is selected on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be selected.

Drawing Machining Center System Lathe System

Name
No. Package 1 Package 2 Package 1 Package 2
2ND. AUXILIARY FUNCTION ○ ○ ○ ○
3RD./4TH. REFERENCE RETURN ○ ○ ○ ○
ADD. COMMON MACRO VALUE ○ ○ ○ ○
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE
○ ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE ○ ○
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC ○ ○ ○ ○
AXIS CONTROL DETACH ○ ○ ○ ○ *1
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ○ ○ ○ ○ *1
BACKGROUND EDITING ○ ○ ○ ○
BALANCED CUTTING J834 ☆ ☆ *2
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 A02B-0207
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION -J814
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING ○ ○ ○ ○
CHAMFERING/CORNER R ○ ○
CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER ○ ○
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CNTL ○ ○ ○ ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION ○ ○ ○ ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION R689 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO ○ ○ ○ ○ *2
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 1M BYTE J738#1M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2M BYTE J738#2M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 3M BYTE J738#3M ☆ ☆ *2
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4M BYTE J738#4M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512K
J738#512K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
BYTE
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 5M BYTE J738#5M ☆ ☆ *2
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6M BYTE J738#6M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8M BYTE J738#8M ☆ ☆ *2
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ○ ○ ○ ○
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION ○ ○
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY
J973 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND A02B-0207
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
LIBRARIES FUNCTION -J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTERNAL DECELERATION ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTERNAL MESSAGE ○ ○ ○ ○
F1-DIGIT FEED ○ ○
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
G CODE SYSTEM B/C ○ ○
GRAPHIC DISPLAY ○ ○ ○ ○
HANDWHEEL FEED 1ST. ○ ○ ○ ○
HANDWHEEL FEED 2ND./3RD. ○ ○ ○ ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION ○ ○ ○ ○

- 450 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Drawing Machining Center System Lathe System

Name
No. Package 1 Package 2 Package 1 Package 2
INCH/METRIC SELECTION ○ ○ ○ ○
INCREMENTAL SYSTEM C (1/10) ○ ○ ○ ○
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH
J839 ☆ ☆ *2
PATH
INTERRUPTION TYPE MACRO ○ ○ ○ ○
INVERSE TIME FEED ○ ○
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C LANGUAGE
J734 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXECUTOR
MANUAL GUIDE i MULTI PATH
S786 ☆ ☆
LATHE FUNCTIONS
MANUAL GUIDE i-1 S790 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i-2 S790 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE
○ ○
TURRET
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
CHINESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED ○ ○ ○ ○
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
CZECH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
DANISH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
DUTCH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
FRENCH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
GERMAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
HUNGARIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
ITALIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
JAPANESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
KOREAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
POLISH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
PORTUGUESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
RUSSIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
SPANISH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
SWEDISH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
TURKISH
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLE ○ ○
MULTIPLE REPETITVE CYCLES II ○ ○
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL ○ ○

- 451 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Drawing Machining Center System Lathe System

Name
No. Package 1 Package 2 Package 1 Package 2
NUMBER OF REGISTERED
○ ○ ○ ○
PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1
OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMF./COR. R ○ ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE
J947 ○ ○ *2
1MBYTE
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE
J948 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2MBYTE
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE
× ○ × ○ *3
320KBYTE
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE
○ × ○ × *3
512KBYTE
PATTERN DATA INPUT ○ ○ ○ ○
POLAR COODINATE COMMAND ○ ○ ○ ○
POSITION SWITCH ○ ○ ○ ○
PRE-TRAVEL STROKE LIMIT CHECK ○ ○ ○ ○
PROGRAM RESTART ○ ○ ○ ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE ○ ○
PROTECTION OF DATA AT 8
S828 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
LEVELS
REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPAN.
○ ○ ○ ○
1
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT ○ ○ ○ ○
SCALING ○ ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER
○ ○ ○ ○
COMPARISON AND STOP
SERIAL SPINDLE INTERFACE ○ ○ ○ ○
SIMUL. CONTROL. AXES EXPAN. ○ ○ ○ ○
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL ○ ○ ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL
○ ○ ○ ○
GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCH
SPINDLE AXES EXPANSON R604 ☆ ☆
STORED STROKE LIMIT 2ND./3RD. ○ ○ ○ ○
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR OFFSET ○ ○
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ○ ○ ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY 200 PAIRS J927 ☆ ☆ *2
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY 400 PAIRS ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY 64 PAIRS ☆ ☆ *3
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 128- PAIRS ☆ ☆ *2
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆ ☆ *3
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE
○ ○ ○ ○
RADIUS COMPENSATION
TOUCH PANEL C S881 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM ○ ○ ○ ○
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
○ ○ ○ ○
PRESET
Y AXIS OFFSET ○ ○
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : This option can be selected only at 2 paths system (for lathe system).
*3 : This option can not be selected on 2 path systems (for lathe system).

- 452 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

0i MODEL F
NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
J713 ☆ ☆
CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ○ ○
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
○ ○
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
R687 ☆ ☆
VARIABLES 1000
ADDITION OF LOADER CONTROL PATH R418 ☆ ☆
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
○
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆ ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ☆ ☆
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC ○ ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ○ ○ *4
BACKGROUND EDITING ○ ○
BALANCED CUTTING J834 ☆ *1
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J816 ☆ ☆
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
○ ○ *3
AFTER CUTTING FEED
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM J736 ☆ ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM
S827 ☆ ☆
512KB
CANNED CYCLE ○
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ○
CONTROL AXIS DETACH ○ ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION ○ ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION R689 ☆ ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO ○ ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR
S674 ☆ ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ○ ○
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING ○
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760 ☆ ☆
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆ ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆ ☆

- 453 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆ ☆
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900 ☆ ☆
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION ○ ○
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING
○ ○
FUNCTION
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT ○ ○
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653 ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879 ☆ ☆
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆ ☆ *1
FL-net function J692 ☆ ☆
Function block function ○ ○
FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL R417 ☆ ☆
G CODE SYSTEM B/C ○
GRAPHIC DISPLAY ○ ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ☆
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ○ ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM C ○ ○
INDEX TABLE INDEXING ○
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH J839 ☆ *1
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ○ ○
INVERSE TIME FEED ○
JERK CONTROL S678 ☆ *3
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆ ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆ ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637 ☆ ☆
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE 0i S772 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i ADVANCED GUIDANCE
S774 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC S790 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME
S789 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i MULTI PATH FUNCTION S786 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i TILTED WORKING PLANE
S788 ☆
INDEXING FUNCTION
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS ○ ○
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET ○
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE
○ ○
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH ○ ○

- 454 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HINDI ○ ○ *2
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE ○ ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II ○
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆ ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL ○
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS
J953 ☆ ☆
EXPANSION 1
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆ ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE
S675 ☆ ☆ *3
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ○ ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R ○ ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE J948 ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE ○ ○
PATTERN DATA INPUT ○ ○
PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL R725 ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO Controller
R979 ☆ ☆
function
PMC AXIS CONTROL
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION SPECIFICATION R640 ☆
FEED
PMC Ladder function 24,000 steps ○ ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND ○
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION ○
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆ ☆ *3
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
R553 ☆ ☆
WITH FEED RATE
POSITION SWITCH ○ ○
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆ ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 ○ ○
PROGRAM RESTART ○ ○

- 455 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE ○ ○
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆ ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆ ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆ ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆ ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ○ ○
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆ ☆
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP ○ ○
SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION S771 ☆
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES
○ ○
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING ○
SMALL-HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL
○ ○
PURPOSE SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN
○ *3
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE AXES EXPANSION R604 ☆ ☆
SPINDLE ORIENTATION ○ ○
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION ○ ○
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT ○ ○
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 ○ ○
THREAD CUTTING RETRACT ○ *3
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522 ☆
TOOL ATTACHMENT /DETACHMENT MANAGEMENT
S997 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION ○
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED
S834 ☆ ☆
DATA EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED
S835 ☆ ☆
DATA EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET ○
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 128-PAIRS ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS ○
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S833 ☆ ☆
1000 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S831 ☆ ☆
240 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S830 ☆ ☆
64 PAIRS
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS
○ ○
COMPENSATION
TURN MATE i (with touch panel) S792 ☆
TURN MATE i Expansion of Machining Cycle S796 ☆

- 456 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
TURN MATE i MDI key operation function S794 ☆
TURN MATE i NC program conversion function S795 ☆
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM ○ ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET ○ ○
*1 : This option can be seleced only at 2 paths system.
*2 : Only the 8.4 inch is supported.
*3 : CNC functions that are enabled only in Cycle Time Estimate Function.
*4 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

0i-MODEL F Plus
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available
NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION - ○ ○
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 - ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM J713 ☆ ☆
CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆ -
3RD./4TH. REFERENCE POSITION - ○ ○
RETURN
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 - ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON - ○ ○
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON R687 ☆ ☆
VARIABLES 1000
ADDITION OF LOADER CONTROL PATH R418 ☆ ☆
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE J919 ☆ -
SYSTEM 300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE - ○ -
SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I J665 - ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ○ ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE - ○ -
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC - ○ ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL - ○ ○ *1
BACKGROUND EDITING - ○ ○
BALANCED CUTTING J834 - ☆ *3
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J816 ☆ ☆
BELL-SHAPED - ○ ○ *5
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
CUTTING FEED

- 457 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
CANNED CYCLE - ○ ○
CHAMFERING/CORNER R - - ○
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER - - ○
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL J736 ☆ ☆
SRAM 256KB
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL S827 ☆ ☆
SRAM 512KB
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆ ☆ *7
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL - ○ ○
CONTROL AXIS DETACH - ○ ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION R689 ☆ ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION - ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO - ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31 R583 ☆ ☆
CHARACTERS
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB - ○ ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR S674 ☆ ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION - ○ ○
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION - - ○
PROGRAMMING
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760 ○ ☆
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆ ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆ ☆
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES A02B-0207-J900 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION - ○ ○ *2
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING - ○ ○ *2
FUNCTION
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT - ○ ○ *9
EXTERNAL DECELERATION - ○ ○
F1-DIGIT FEED - ○ -
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN R653 ☆ ☆
ENHANCEMENT 1
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR - ○ ○
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆ -
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆ ☆ *3
FL-net function J692 ☆ ☆

- 458 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
FOCAS2/HSSB PORT2 FUNCTION - ○ ○
Function block function - ○ ○
FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL R417 ☆ ☆
G CODE SYSTEM B/C - - ○
GRAPHIC DISPLAY - ○ ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ○ ☆
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 ☆ ☆ *8
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ○ ○
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION - ○ ○ *7
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION - ○ ○
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL S688 ☆ -
INCREMENT SYSTEM C - ○ ○
INDEX TABLE INDEXING - ○ -
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH J839 - ☆ *3
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO - ○ ○
INVERSE TIME FEED - ○ -
JERK CONTROL - ○ - *5
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆ ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆ ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING S637 ○ ☆
FUNCTION
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR - ○ ○
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE - ○ ○
EXECUTOR
MANUAL GUIDE 0i S772 ☆ ☆ *6
MANUAL GUIDE i R948 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i ADVANCED GUIDANCE S774 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME S789 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i MULTI PATH FUNCTION S786 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i TILTED WORKING PLANE S788 ☆ -
INDEXING FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL S779 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT - ○ ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS - ○ ○
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET - - ○
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆ ☆
Multi PMC function (3 systems) R855#3 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE - ○ ○

- 459 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY - ○ ○
HUNGARIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY - ○ ○
PORTUGUESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY - ○ ○
SLOVENIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE - ○ ○
MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION R615 ☆ ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES - - ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES Ⅱ - - ○
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ○ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC data table area expansion S967#40K ☆ ☆
(40KB)
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function S984#10K ☆ ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ○ ☆
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS - ○ ○
EXPANSION 1
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ○ ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE S675 ☆ ☆ *5
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP - ○ ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R - ○ ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE - ○ ○
PATTERN DATA INPUT - ○ ○
PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL R725 ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of R979 ☆ ☆

- 460 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
PROFINET IO Controller function
PMC AXIS CONTROL R640 ☆ ☆
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps H990#100K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 24,000 steps - ○ ○
PMC Ladder function 32,000 steps H990#32K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 64,000 steps H990#64K ☆ ☆
PMC MESSAGE MULTI-LANGUAGE - ○ ○
PMC symbol-comment-message area 1MB R856#1M ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 512KB - ○ ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND - ○ -
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION - - ○
POSITION SWITCH - ○ ○
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM J693 ☆ ☆ *5
ACCELERATION
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE R553 ☆ ☆
SYSTEM WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆ ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES - ○ ○
15
PROGRAM RESTART - ○ ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE - ○ ○
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE R502 ☆ ☆
OVERLAP
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆ ☆
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART R630 ☆ ☆ *4
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆ ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆ ☆
RIGID TAPPING J828 ○ ○
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY - ○ ○
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆ ☆
SCALING - ○ -
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND - ○ ○
STOP
SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION - ○ -
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES - ○ ○
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING - ○ -
SMALL-HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE - ○ -
SMOOTH TOLERANCE CONTROL - ○ -
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL - ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL - ○ ○
GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCH

- 461 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION - ○ - *5
IN CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE AXES EXPANSION R604 ☆ ☆
SPINDLE ORIENTATION - ○ ○ *2
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION - ○ ○ *2
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT - ○ ○
Step sequence function S982 ☆ ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE - ○ ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 - ○ ○
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO R323 ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 1000
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO R324 ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 4000
THREADING CYCLE RETRACT - - ○
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING R522 ☆ ☆
COMMAND
TOOL ATTACHMENT/DETACHMENT S997 ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION - - ○
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT - ○ ○
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: S834 ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: S835 ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET - ○ -
TOOL OFFSET FOR MILLING AND R595 - ☆
TURNING FUNCTION
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C - ○ -
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 128-PAIRS - - ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 - ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS - ○ -
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S833 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 1000 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S831 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 240 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S830 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 64 PAIRS
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS - ○ ○
COMPENSATION
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM - ○ ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM - ○ ○
PRESET

- 462 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
Y-AXIS OFFSET - - ○

*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

*2 : Only the signals are supported.
*3 : This option can be selected only at 2 paths system.
*4 : Program restart memory is cleared when the CNC GUIDE is started.
*5 : CNC functions that are enabled only in Cycle Time Estimate Function.
*6 : This option is available at only Machine composition that do not uses iHMI.
*7 : This option is available at only Machine composition that uses iHMI.
*8 : Reciprocating motion of chopping does not work.
*9 : External machine zero point shift cannot be used.

30i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B5
32i-MODEL B
Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3D INTERFERENCE CHECK WITH
R542 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR
S673 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERPOLATION
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
J713 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION J727 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5-AXIS MACHINING CONDITION SETTING
R721 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
J887 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
R687 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES 1000
ADDITION OF TOOL PAIRS FOR TOOL LIFE
J936 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
J919 ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM 300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
J895 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *1
BACKGROUND EDITING J956 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
BALANCED CUTTING J834 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 463 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
A02B-0207-J
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
816
BELL-SHAPED
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER J829 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
CUTTING FEED
BUILT-IN 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK
R541 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
CANNED CYCLE J890 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH
S825 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL MOVE
CHOPPING J707 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER J720 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL
J736 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SRAM
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL
S827 ☆ ☆
SRAM 512KB
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONICAL/SPIRAL INTERPOLATION J780 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM MACRO J873 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31
R583 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHARACTERS
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR
S674 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION
J870 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMING
DUAL CHECK SAFETY S661 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF
S630 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DIAMETER/RADIUS SPECIFICATION
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter PORT2 function R974 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner PORT2 function R973 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION OF AXIS COMMAND IN TOOL
R592 ☆ ☆ ☆
CENTER POINT CONTROL
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
EXTENDED CONVERSATIONAL MACRO
S798 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES A02B-0207-J
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION 900

- 464 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION J861 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING
J862 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN
R653 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ENHANCEMENT 1
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FL-net function J692 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FL-net PORT2 function R964 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GROOVE CUTTING FUNCTION BY
S854 ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTINUOUS CIRCLE MOVEMENT
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *7
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
J745 ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES A
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
J746 ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES B
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
S640 ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES C
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
R513 ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES D
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING J832 ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING
OPERATION INFORMATION OUTPUT R609 ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING RETRACT
J663 ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING SKIP
S662 ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED PROCESSING S809 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ☆ ☆ ☆
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
iHMI MACHINING CYCLE(FOR 1 PATH
R911 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
SYSTEM)
iHMI MACHINING CYCLE(FOR 2 PATH
R912 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
SYSTEM)
iHMI MACHINING CYCLE(FOR 3 PATH
R913 ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
SYSTEM)
iHMI MACHINING CYCLE(FOR 4 PATH
R914 ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
SYSTEM)
iHMI SET-UP GUIDANCE R910 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 465 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL S688 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH J839 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY
S643 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AREA
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INVERSE TIME FEED J715 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION J710 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
JERK CONTROL S678 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE
R597 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM SWITCHING FUNCTION
LOOK-AHEAD BLOCKS EXPANSION S815 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING
R700 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING
S637 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE
J734 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXECUTOR
MANUAL GUIDE i R948 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i ADVANCED GUIDANCE
S774 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC S790 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME
S789 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i MULTI PATH FUNCTION S786 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i TILTED WORKING PLANE
S788 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INDEXING FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL FUNCTION S779 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10
R600 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MILLION
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE
R550 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXECUTOR
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET J881 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION(3 SYSTEMS) R855#3 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION(5 SYSTEMS) R855#5 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE
S829 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 466 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
R411 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INDONESIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
J678 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PORTUGUESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN R320 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
R410 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VIETNAMESE
MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION R615 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES J877 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II J889 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NANO SMOOTHING 2 R512 ☆ ☆
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 256K J993#256K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 64K J993#64K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA
S967#40K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION(40KB)
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY
S984 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS
J953 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION 1
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS
J954 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION 2
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆ ☆
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE
S675 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 256KBYTE J945 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE J948 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949 ☆ ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959 ☆ ☆ ☆
PATTERN DATA INPUT J884 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL R725 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO
R979 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Controller function
PMC AXIS CONTROL
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION R640 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 300,000 STEPS H990#300K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 467 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA
R856#1M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
1MB
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA
R856#2M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2MB
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA
R856#512K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
512KB
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POSITION SWITCH J846 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM
J693 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
ACCELERATION
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE
R553 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE
R502 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OVERLAP
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART R630 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *4
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
RIGID TAPPING J828 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE
S728 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFFSET
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SCALING J892 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND
J844 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STOP
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES
J803 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆ ☆ ☆
SMOOTH TCP R639 ☆ ☆ ☆
SMOOTH TOLERANCE CONTROL R696 ☆ ☆ ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL J960 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL
J961 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PURPOSE SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN
J809 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE CONTROL SWITCHING FUNCTION
R608 ☆ ☆ ☆
FOR HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING
SPINDLE ORIENTATION J853 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *3
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J854 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO R323 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 468 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
VARIABLE NAME 1000
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO
R324 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 4000
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING
R522 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COMMAND
TOOL ATTACHMENT /DETACHMENT
S997 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION J931 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION IN TOOL
S670 ☆ ☆
AXIS DIRECTION
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR
R681 ☆ ☆
MULTI-EDGE TOOLS
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S834 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S835 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION R691 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET FOR MILLING AND TURNING
R595 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT
S833 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 1000 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT
S831 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 240 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT
S830 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 64 PAIRS
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆ ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS
J930 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COMPENSATION
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J917 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PRESET
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR
S993 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
COMPENSATION
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : Compensation is not applied.
*3 : Only the signals are supported.
*4 : Program restart memory is cleared when the CNC GUIDE is started.
*5 : CNC functions that are enabled only in Cycle Time Estimate Function.

- 469 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

*6 : This option is available at only Machine composition that uses iHMI.

*7 : Reciprocating motion of chopping does not work.

- 470 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Standard function
Name Drawing No.
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN －
ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING －
AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION －
AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING －
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (MEMORY OPERATION) －
AUXILIARY FUNCTION －
AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK －
AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT IN MOVING AXIS －
BELL-TYPE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
－
BEFORE LOOK AHEAD INTERPOLATION
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION －
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY R PROGRAMMING －
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING －
CUTTING FEEDRATE CLAMP －
CUTTING MODE －
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET
－
CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
DIAMETER/RADIUS PROGRAMMING －
DWELL (SECOND DESIGNATION) －
EXACT STOP －
EXACT STOP MODE －
FEED PER MINUTE －
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE －
IN-POSITION CHECK DISABLE REFERENCE
－
POSITION RETURN
INPUT UNIT 10 TIME MULTIPLY －
LEAST INPUT INCREMENTS (IS-A, IS-B) －
LINEAR ACC/DEC AFTER CUTTING FEED
－
INTERPOLATION
LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE
－
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
LINEAR INTERPOLATION －
MAX. PROGRAMMABLE DIMENSION －
MULTIPLE COMMAND OF AUXILIARY FUNCTION －
NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS －
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP －
OVER TRAVEL －
PLANE SELECTION －
POSITIONING －
PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT －
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT －
RAPID TRAVERSE BELL-SHAPED
－
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
RAPID TRAVERSE BLOCK OVERLAP －
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM B) －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM C) －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM D) －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM E) －
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN －
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN CHECK －
ROTARY AXIS DESIGNATION －
ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER －

- 471 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

SKIP －
SPEED COMMAND EXTENSION IN LEAST INPUT
－
INCREMENTS C, D, AND E
STORED STROKE CHECK 1 －
SUB PROGRAM CALL －
TANGENTIAL SPEED CONSTANT CONTROL －
TAPPING MODE －
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND BY
－
TOOL AXIS DIRECTION
TOLERANCE CHANGE IN HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP
－
MODE
TOOL FUNCTION －
TOOL LENGTH OFFSET －
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS －

30i-MODEL B 32AX
30i-MODEL B 48AX
Name Drawing No.
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION S673
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION J713
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679
3-DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION J727
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES J887
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES R687
1000
ADDITION OF TOOL PAIRS FOR TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J936
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J919
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J895
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *1
BACKGROUND EDITING J956
BALANCED CUTTING J834
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J816
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER J829 *6
CUTTING FEED
CANNED CYCLE J890
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH MANUAL MOVE S825
CHOPPING J707
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER J720
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM J736
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 512KB S827
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624
CONICAL/SPIRAL INTERPOLATION J780

- 472 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893
CUSTOM MACRO J873
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31 CHARACTERS R583
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL S674
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING J870
DUAL CHECK SAFETY S661
DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF DIAMETER/RADIUS S630
SPECIFICATION
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967
Ethernet function S707
Ethernet/IP Adapter PORT2 function R974
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966
Ethernet/IP Scanner PORT2 function R973
EXPANSION OF AXIS COMMAND IN TOOL CENTER POINT R592
CONTROL
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION J861 *3
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J862 *3
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911
F1-DIGIT FEED J820
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879
FIGURE COPYING J897
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607
FL-net function J692
FL-net PORT2 function R964
G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972
GROOVE CUTTING FUNCTION BY CONTINUOUS CIRCLE S854
MOVEMENT
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 *7
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987

- 473 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 *5
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL S688
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH J839
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA S643
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874
INVERSE TIME FEED J715
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION J710
LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE SYSTEM R597
SWITCHING FUNCTION
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION R700
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964
MACRO EXECUTOR J888
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 MILLION R600
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET J881
Modbus/TCP Server function R968
MULTI PMC FUNCTION(3 SYSTEMS) R855#3
MULTI PMC FUNCTION(5 SYSTEMS) R855#5
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED S829
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN R411
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN R320
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691

- 474 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE R410
MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION R615
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES J877
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II J889
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849
NANO SMOOTHING S687
NANO SMOOTHING 2 R512
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 256K J993#256K
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 64K J993#64K
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA EXPANSION(40KB) S967#40K
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION S984
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 J953
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 2 J954
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 *6
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 256KBYTE J945
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE J948
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959
PATTERN DATA INPUT J884
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO Controller function R979
PMC AXIS CONTROL ACCELERATION/DECELERATION R640
SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 300,000 STEPS H990#300K
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 1MB R856#1M
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 2MB R856#2M
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 512KB R856#512K
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815
POSITION SWITCH J846
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 *6
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM WITH R553
FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971
PROFINET IO Device function R972
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882
PROGRAM RESTART J838
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629
RIGIT TAPPING J828

- 475 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET S728
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971
Safety function by FL-net S851
SCALING J892
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION J803
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777
SMOOTH TCP R639 *4
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL J960
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE J961
SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN CIRCULAR J809 *6
INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE ORIENTATION J853 *3
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J854 *3
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 1000 R323
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 4000 R324
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522
TOOL ATTACHMENT /DETACHMENT MANAGEMENT S997
FUNCTION
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION J931
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION IN TOOL AXIS DIRECTION S670
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR MULTI-EDGE TOOLS R681
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED DATA S834
EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED DATA S835
EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET S617
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION R691
TOOL OFFSET FOR MILLING AND TURNING FUNCTION R595
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 1000 S833
PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 240 S831
PAIRS

- 476 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 64 S830
PAIRS
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION J930
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993 *2
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : Compensation is not applied.
*3 : Only the signals are supported.
*4 : This option is available at only CNC GUIDE (30iB 32AXversion).
*5 : This option is available at only Machine composition that uses iHMI.
*6 : CNC functions that are enabled only in Cycle Time Estimate Function.
*7 : Reciprocating motion of chopping does not work.

- 477 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

30i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B Plus

The CNC Function which checked "○" is effective when the Package/Kit is selected
on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be effective.

Package/Kit

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
POLAR COORDINATE
INTERPOLATION J815 ○
CYLINDRICAL
INTERPOLATION J816 ○
VARIABLE LEAD THREAD
CUTTING J827 ×
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL J855 ○
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION
Turning PROGRAMMING J870 ○ Not available at Type M
R092
package 1 CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875 ○ Not available at Type M
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE
CYCLES J877 ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE
CYCLES II J889 ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS
200-PAIRS J927 ○
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR
COMPENSATION J931 ○ Not available at Type M
POLYGON MACHINING WITH
TWO SPINDLES J708 ×
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK
BARRIER J720 ○ Not available at Type M
THREAD CUTTING RETRACT J825 ×
ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED
OUTPUT J856 ×
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL J858 ×
Turning
R093 G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871 ○ Not available at Type M
package 2 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE
TURRET J881 ○ Not available at Type M
DIRECT INPUT OF OFFSET
VALUE MEASURED B J933 ×
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934 ○ Not available at Type M
SPINDLE CONTROL WITH
SERVO MOTOR J978 ×
MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE
FOR MULTI PATH R606 ×

Milling Not available at 32i-B

R094 NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ○
package Plus

- 478 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
INVERSE TIME FEED J715 ○
It is required that one of
the following functions
is effective:
-TOOL GEOMETRY
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY SIZE DATA
FUNCTION J760 ○
100-PAIRS(R589)

-TOOL GEOMETRY
SIZE DATA
300-PAIRS(R590)
SINGLE DIRECTION
POSITIONING J812 ○
NORMAL DIRECTION
CONTROL J813 ○
POLAR COORDINATE
COMMAND J818 ○ Not available at Type T
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ○ Not available at Type T
THREAD CUTTING Standard function at
SYNCHRONOUS CUTTING J824 ×
Type T
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR
IMAGE J880 ○
AUTOMATIC CORNER
OVERRIDE J891 ○
SCALING J892 ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM
ROTATION J893 ○
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE
COORDINATE SYSTEM J895 ○
48-PAIRS
SMALL-HOLE PECK DRILLING
CYCLE J896 × Not available at Type T
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS
400-PAIRS J928 ○
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935 ○
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ○ Not available at Type T
MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE J998 ×
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING
CORNER R S615 ○ Not available at Type T
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL
FUNCTION S655 ○
AUXILIARY FUNCTION
OUTPUT IN THE PROGRAM R576 ×
RESTART
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART R630 ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM
MACRO COMMON VARIABLES R687 ○
1000
SMOOTH TOLERANCE
CONTROL R696 ○
AICC⁺ - ○

- 479 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
CONTINUOUS DRESSING J630 × Not available at Type T
IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR
GRINDING MACHINE) J631 × Not available at Type T
CHOPPING J707 ○
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ○
Grinding
R095 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL
package J924 ×
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE
(FOR GRINDING MACHINE) S974 ×
CHOPPING SETTING SCREEN R614 ×
HIGH PRECISION
OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 ○
SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE
CONTROL S816 ×
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL S818 ×
SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE,
Multi path kit R096 AND SUPERIMPOSED
CONTROL BY PROGRAM S890 ×
COMMAND
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS
ASSIGNMENT R607 ○
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE
SYSTEM CONVERSION J713 ○
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL
FEED S679 ○
MANUAL INTERRUPTION OF
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE S949 ×
TWP kit R097 SYSTEM CONVERSION
TILTED WORKING PLANE
INDEXING COMMAND R522 ○
RETRACTION FOR
3-DIMENSIONAL RIGID R575 ×
TAPPING
TWP kit R097 ○
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
ROTARY ERROR R649 ×
COMPENSATION
HIGH-SPEED
SMOOTH TCP(R677)
is effective at FS30i-B
Plus/ FS31i-B Plus/
FS31i-B5 Plus
5-axis kit R098 TCP⁺ R677 ○

TOOL CENTER POINT

CONTROL(S677) is
effective at FS32i-B
Plus
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER
COMPENSATION S667 ○
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR
COMPENSATION S993 ○
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743 ○
Rotary table
R103 CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ○
kit
INDEX TABLE INDEXING J822 × Not available at Type T

- 480 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ○
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ○ *1
iHMI set-up guidance R910 ○ *1
iHMI kit R099
iHMI machining cycle (for 1 path
R911 ○ *1
system)
*1 : This option is available at only Machine composition that uses iHMI.

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3D INTERFERENCE CHECK WITH R542 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR S673 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERPOLATION
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM J713 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION J727 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830 ○ ○ ○ ○
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5-axis kit R098 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5-AXIS MACHINING CONDITION SETTING R721 ☆ - ☆ -
FUNCTION
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON J887 ○ ○ ○ ○
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON R687 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES 1000
ADDITION OF TOOL PAIRS FOR TOOL LIFE J936 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE J919 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM 300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE J895 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 481 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804 ○ ○ ○ ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
BACKGROUND EDITING J956 ○ ○ ○ ○
BALANCED CUTTING J834 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
816
BELL-SHAPED J829 ○ ○ ○ ○
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
BUILT-IN 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK R541 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
CANNED CYCLE J890 ○ ○ ○ ○
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH S825 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL MOVE
CHOPPING J707 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER J720 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL J736 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SRAM 256KB
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL S827 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SRAM 512KB
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONICAL/SPIRAL INTERPOLATION J780 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ○ ○ ○ ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM MACRO J873 ○ ○ ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31 R583 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHARACTERS
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ○ ○ ○ ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR S674 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION J870 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMING
DUAL CHECK SAFETY S661 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 482 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF S630 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DIAMETER/RADIUS SPECIFICATION
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter PORT2 function R974 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner PORT2 function R973 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION OF AXIS COMMAND IN TOOL R592 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
CENTER POINT CONTROL
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTENDED CONVERSATIONAL MACRO S798 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION J861 ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING J862 ○ ○ ○ ○
FUNCTION
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913 ○ ○ ○ ○ *5
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN R653 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ENHANCEMENT 1
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ○ ○ ○ ○
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FL-net function J692 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FL-net PORT2 function R964 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Function block function R852 ○ ○ ○ ○
G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972 ○ ○ ○ ○
Grinding package R095 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GROOVE CUTTING FUNCTION BY S854 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
CONTINUOUS CIRCLE MOVEMENT
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ○ ○ ○ ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆ - - -
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *4

- 483 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL J745 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
VARIABLES A
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL J746 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
VARIABLES B
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL S640 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
VARIABLES C
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL R513 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
VARIABLES D
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING J832 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING R609 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
OPERATION INFORMATION OUTPUT
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING RETRACT J663 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING SKIP S662 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED PROCESSING S809 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ○ ○ ○ ○
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI machining cycle (for 1 path system) R911 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI machining cycle (for 2 path system) R912 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI machining cycle (for 3 path system) R913 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI machining cycle (for 4 path system) R914 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI set-up guidance R910 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876 ○ ○ ○ ○
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL S688 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805 ○ ○ ○ ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH J839 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY S643 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AREA
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ○ ○ ○ ○
INVERSE TIME FEED J715 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION J710 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE R597 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM SWITCHING FUNCTION

- 484 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
Look-ahead blocks expansion S815 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING R700 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING S637 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ○ ○ ○ ○
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE J734 ○ ○ ○ ○
EXECUTOR
MANUAL GUIDE i ADVANCED GUIDANCE S774 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC S790 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME S789 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i MULTI PATH FUNCTION S786 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i TILTED WORKING PLANE S788 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INDEXING FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL FUNCTION S779 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835 ○ ○ ○ ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ○ ○ ○ ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 R600 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MILLION
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE R550 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXECUTOR
Milling package R094 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET J881 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Multi path kit R096 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Multi PMC function (3 systems) R855#3 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Multi PMC function (5 systems) R855#5 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE S829 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 485 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY R411 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INDONESIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY J678 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PORTUGUESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN R320 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY R410 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VIETNAMESE
MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION R615 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES J877 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II J889 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NANO SMOOTHING 2 R512 ☆ - ☆ -
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 256K J993#256K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 64K J993#64K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC data table area expansion S967#40K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(40KB)
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function S984#10K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS J953 ○ ○ ○ ○
EXPANSION 1
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS J954 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION 2
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE
S675 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955 ○ ○ ○ ○

- 486 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949 ○ ○ ○ ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PATTERN DATA INPUT J884 ○ ○ ○ ○
PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL R725 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO
R979 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Controller function
PMC AXIS CONTROL R640 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps H990#100K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 300,000 steps H990#300K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 32,000 steps H990#32K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 64,000 steps H990#64K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 1MB R856#1M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 2MB R856#2M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 512KB R856#512K ○ ○ ○ ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POSITION SWITCH J846 ○ ○ ○ ○
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE R553 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882 ○ ○ ○ ○
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE R502 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OVERLAP
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ○ ○ ○ ○
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART R630 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
RIGID TAPPING J828 ○ ○ ○ ○
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE S728 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFFSET
Rotary table kit R103 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971 ○ ○ ○ ○
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 487 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
SCALING J892 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ○ ○ ○ ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND J844 ○ ○ ○ ○
STOP
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES J803 ○ ○ ○ ○
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
SMOOTH TCP R639 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
SMOOTH TOLERANCE CONTROL R696 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL J960 ○ ○ ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL J961 ○ ○ ○ ○
PURPOSE SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN
J809 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE CONTROL SWITCHING FUNCTION R608 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
FOR HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING
SPINDLE ORIENTATION J853 ○ ○ ○ ○
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J854 ○ ○ ○ ○
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850 ○ ○ ○ ○
Step sequence function S982 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749 ○ ○ ○ ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 J840 ○ ○ ○ ○
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO R323 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 1000
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO R324 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 4000
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING R522 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COMMAND
TOOL ATTACHMENT /DETACHMENT S997 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION J931 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION IN TOOL S670 ☆ - ☆ -
AXIS DIRECTION
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR R681 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 488 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
Plus Plus Plus Plus
MULTI-EDGE TOOLS
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: S834 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: S835 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *1
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION R691 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET FOR MILLING AND TURNING R595 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S833 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 1000 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S831 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 240 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S830 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 64 PAIRS
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆ - ☆ -
TOOL POSTURE TURNING R338 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS J930 ○ ○ ○ ○
COMPENSATION
Turning package 1 R092 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Turning package 2 R093 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TWP kit R097 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ○ ○ ○ ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J917 ○ ○ ○ ○
PRESET
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR S993 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COMPENSATION
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
*1 : Standard function at Type M.
*2 : This option is available at only Machine composition that uses iHMI.
*3 : CNC functions that are enabled only in Cycle Time Estimate Function.

- 489 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

*4 : Reciprocating motion of chopping does not work.

*5 : External machine zero point shift cannot be used.

Standard function
Name Drawing No.
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN －
ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING －
AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION －
AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING －
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (MEMORY OPERATION) －
AUXILIARY FUNCTION －
AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK －
AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT IN MOVING AXIS －
BELL-TYPE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
－
BEFORE LOOK AHEAD INTERPOLATION
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION －
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY R PROGRAMMING －
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING －
CUTTING FEEDRATE CLAMP －
CUTTING MODE －
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET
－
CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
DIAMETER/RADIUS PROGRAMMING －
DWELL (SECOND DESIGNATION) －
EXACT STOP －
EXACT STOP MODE －
FEED PER MINUTE －
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE －
IN-POSITION CHECK DISABLE REFERENCE
－
POSITION RETURN
INPUT UNIT 10 TIME MULTIPLY －
LEAST INPUT INCREMENTS (IS-A, IS-B) －
LINEAR ACC/DEC AFTER CUTTING FEED
－
INTERPOLATION
LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE
－
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
LINEAR INTERPOLATION －
MAX. PROGRAMMABLE DIMENSION －
MULTIPLE COMMAND OF AUXILIARY FUNCTION －
NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS －
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP －
OVER TRAVEL －
PLANE SELECTION －
POSITIONING －
PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT －
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT －
RAPID TRAVERSE BELL-SHAPED
－
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
RAPID TRAVERSE BLOCK OVERLAP －
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM B) －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM C) －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM D) －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM E) －

- 490 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

REFERENCE POSITION RETURN －
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN CHECK －
ROTARY AXIS DESIGNATION －
ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER －
SKIP －
SPEED COMMAND EXTENSION IN LEAST INPUT
－
INCREMENTS C, D, AND E
STORED STROKE CHECK 1 －
SUB PROGRAM CALL －
TANGENTIAL SPEED CONSTANT CONTROL －
TAPPING MODE －
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND BY
－
TOOL AXIS DIRECTION
TOLERANCE CHANGE IN HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP
－
MODE
TOOL FUNCTION －
TOOL LENGTH OFFSET －
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS －

- 491 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

30i-MODEL B Plus 72AX

The CNC Function which checked "○" is effective when the Package/Kit is selected
on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be effective.

Package/Kit

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
POLAR COORDINATE
INTERPOLATION J815 ○
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ○
VARIABLE LEAD THREAD
CUTTING J827 ×
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL J855 ○
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION
PROGRAMMING J870 ○ Not available at Type M
Turning package 1 R092
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875 ○ Not available at Type M
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE
CYCLES J877 ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE
CYCLES II J889 ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS
200-PAIRS J927 ○
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR
COMPENSATION J931 ○ Not available at Type M
POLYGON MACHINING WITH
TWO SPINDLES J708 ×
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK
BARRIER J720 ○ Not available at Type M
THREAD CUTTING RETRACT J825 ×
ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED
OUTPUT J856 ×
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL J858 ×

Turning package 2 R093 G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871 ○ Not available at Type M
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE
TURRET J881 ×
DIRECT INPUT OF OFFSET
VALUE MEASURED B J933 ×
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934 ○ Not available at Type M
SPINDLE CONTROL WITH
SERVO MOTOR J978 ×
MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE
FOR MULTI PATH R606 ×

Not available at 32i-B

NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ○
Plus
INVERSE TIME FEED J715 ○
Milling package R094 DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY
FUNCTION J760 ×
SINGLE DIRECTION
POSITIONING J812 ○
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ○

- 492 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
POLAR COORDINATE
COMMAND J818 ○ Not available at Type T
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ○ Not available at Type T
THREAD CUTTING Standard function at Type
SYNCHRONOUS CUTTING J824 ×
T
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR
IMAGE J880 ○
AUTOMATIC CORNER
OVERRIDE J891 ○
SCALING J892 ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM
ROTATION J893 ○
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE
COORDINATE SYSTEM J895 ○
48-PAIRS
SMALL-HOLE PECK DRILLING
CYCLE J896 × Not available at Type T
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS
400-PAIRS J928 ○
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935 ○
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ○ Not available at Type T
MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE J998 ×
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING
CORNER R S615 ○ Not available at Type T
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL
FUNCTION S655 ○
AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT
IN THE PROGRAM RESTART R576 ×
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART R630 ×
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO
COMMON VARIABLES 1000 R687 ○
SMOOTH TOLERANCE
CONTROL R696 ×
AICC⁺ - ○
CONTINUOUS DRESSING J630 × Not available at Type T
IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR
GRINDING MACHINE) J631 × Not available at Type T
CHOPPING J707 ○
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ○
Grinding package R095 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL J924 ×
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE
(FOR GRINDING MACHINE) S974 ×
CHOPPING SETTING SCREEN R614 ×
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION
FUNCTION R662 ○
SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE
CONTROL S816 ×
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL S818 ×
Multi path kit R096 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE,
AND SUPERIMPOSED
CONTROL BY PROGRAM S890 ×
COMMAND

- 493 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS
ASSIGNMENT R607 ○
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE
SYSTEM CONVERSION J713 ○
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ○
MANUAL INTERRUPTION OF
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE S949 ×
TWP kit R097 SYSTEM CONVERSION
TILTED WORKING PLANE
INDEXING COMMAND R522 ○
RETRACTION FOR
3-DIMENSIONAL RIGID R575 ×
TAPPING
TWP kit R097 ○
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ROTARY
ERROR COMPENSATION R649 ×
TCP⁺ R677 ×
5-axis kit R098
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER
COMPENSATION S667 ○
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR
COMPENSATION S993 ○
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743 ○
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ○
Rotary table kit R103
INDEX TABLE INDEXING J822 × Not available at Type T
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ○

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 ☆
3D INTERFERENCE CHECK WITH PERSONAL R542 ☆
COMPUTER FUNCTION
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION S673 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION J713 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION J727 ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830 ○
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 ☆
5-axis kit R098 ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES J887 ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES R687 ☆
1000
ADDITION OF TOOL PAIRS FOR TOOL LIFE J936 ☆
MANAGEMEN
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J895 ☆
48-PAIRS

- 494 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891 ☆
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804 ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆
BACKGROUND EDITING J956 ○
BALANCED CUTTING J834 ☆
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER J829 ○ *2
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
CANNED CYCLE J890 ○
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875 ☆
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH MANUAL S825 ☆
MOVE
CHOPPING J707 ☆
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER J720 ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 256KB J736 ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 512KB S827 ☆
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆
CONICAL/SPIRAL INTERPOLATION J780 ☆
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855 ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆
CUSTOM MACRO J873 ○
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31 CHARACTERS R583 ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL S674 ☆
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING J870 ☆
DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF DIAMETER/RADIUS S630 ☆
SPECIFICATION
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter PORT2 function R974 ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner PORT2 function R973 ☆
EXPANSION OF AXIS COMMAND IN TOOL CENTER R592 ☆
POINT CONTROL
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION J861 ○
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J862 ○
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913 ○
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ○
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653 ☆
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ○
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆
FL-net function J692 ☆

- 495 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
FL-net PORT2 function R964 ☆
Function block function R852 ○
G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871 ☆
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972 ○
Grinding package R095 ☆
GROOVE CUTTING FUNCTION BY CONTINUOUS S854 ☆
CIRCLE MOVEMENT
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 ☆ *3
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876 ○
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL S688 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805 ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH J839 ☆
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ○
INVERSE TIME FEED J715 ☆
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION J710 ☆
LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE SYSTEM R597 ☆
SWITCHING FUNCTION
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION R700 ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637 ☆
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ○
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734 ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835 ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 MILLION R600 ☆
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550 ☆
Milling package R094 ☆
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆
Multi path kit R096 ☆
Multi PMC function (3 systems) R855#3 ☆
Multi PMC function (5 systems) R855#5 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY S841 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED S829 ☆
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN R411 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆

- 496 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN R320 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE R410 ☆
MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION R615 ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES J877 ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II J889 ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆
NANO SMOOTHING 2 R512 ☆
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 256K J993#256K ☆
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 64K J993#64K ☆
Nonvolatile PMC data table area expansion (40KB) S967#40K ☆
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function S984#10K ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ☆
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 J953 ○
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 2 J954 ☆
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 ☆
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955 ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615 ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949 ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959 ☆
PATTERN DATA INPUT J884 ○
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO Controller
R979 ☆
function
PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps H990#100K ☆
PMC Ladder function 300,000 steps H990#300K ☆
PMC Ladder function 32,000 steps H990#32K ☆
PMC Ladder function 64,000 steps H990#64K ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 1MB R856#1M ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 2MB R856#2M ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 512KB R856#512K ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818 ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆
POSITION SWITCH J846 ○
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM R553 ☆
WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882 ○
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ☆
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880 ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆

- 497 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743 ☆
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET S728 ☆
Rotary table kit R103 ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971 ☆
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆
SCALING J892 ☆
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844 ○
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL J960 ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE J961 ○
SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN CIRCULAR
J809 ☆
INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE ORIENTATION J853 ○
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J854 ○
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850 ○
Step sequence function S982 ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749 ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 J840 ○
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522 ☆
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆z
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION J931 ☆
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION IN TOOL AXIS S670 ☆
DIRECTION
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935 ☆
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆ *1
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION R691 ☆
TOOL OFFSET FOR MILLING AND TURNING FUNCTION R595 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆
TOOL POSTURE TURNING R338 ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION J930 ○
Turning package 1 R092 ☆
Turning package 2 R093 ☆
TWP kit R097 ☆
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917 ○
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993 ☆
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934 ☆

- 498 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

*1 : Standard function at Type M.

*2 : The function cannot be used though option becomes effective.
*3 : Reciprocating motion of chopping does not work.

35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX

The CNC Function which checked "○" is effective when the Set Option is selected
on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be effective.

Set Option

Available on
Set Option Option Function
CNC GUIDE
Remarks
Drawing FS35i-B
Name Name FS35i-B
No. 16AX
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC ○ ○
RS232C INTERFACE 1 × ×
CUSTOM MACRO ○ ○
BASIC OPTION 1 R702
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE ○ ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT × ○
EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL × ×
RS232C INTERFACE 2 × ×
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ○ ○
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP × ○
STROKE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING × ×
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL × ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE
× ○
SWITCH
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE
○ ○
SWITCH EXPANSION
PATTERN DATA INPUT ○ ○
BACKGROUND EDITING ○ ○
FEED STOP × ×
BASIC OPTION 2 R703 PLAYBACK ○ ○
BASIC OPTION 1 ○ ○
POSITION SWITCH ○ ○
RATE FEED ○ ○
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ○ ○
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT ○ ○
EXTERNAL MESSAGE × ×
EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT × ×
EXTERNAL TOOL OFFSET × ×
STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION × ×
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS ○ ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM C ○ ○
HANDLE INTERRUPTION × ×

- 499 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Available on
Set Option Option Function
CNC GUIDE
Remarks
Drawing FS35i-B
Name Name FS35i-B
No. 16AX
CONTROL AXIS DETACH ○ ○
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
× ○ *3
CUTTING FEED
MULTI-STEP SKIP × ○
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ○ ○
REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL
× ×
STOPPER
SYNCHRONOUS CUTTIONG × ×
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE(INCREMENT SYSTEM C) ○ ○
MACRO EXECUTOR ○ ○ *1
MACRO EXECUTOR R705
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB ○ ○ *1
MACRO EXECUTOR MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ○ ○ *2
+ C-LANGUAGE R706 CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MBYTE ○ ○ *2
EXECUTOR C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM ○ ○ *2
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR ○ ○
FANUC PICTURE
R708 CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MBYTE ○ ○
FOR 35I FUNCTION
VIRTUAL MDI KEY ○ ○
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH × ×
HIGH SPEED DIRECTION-DEPENDENT TYPE OF HIGH SPEED
R704 ○ ○
POSITION SWITCH POSITION SWITCH
LINEAR SCALE I/F WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESS
× ×
REFERENCE MARK
*1 : This function cannot be specified at the same time as MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR (R706).
*2 : This function cannot be specified at the same time as MACRO EXECUTOR (R705).
*3 : The function cannot be used though option becomes effective.

List of function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Series
Name Drawing No. FS35i-B
FS35i-B
16AX
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆ ☆
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J895 ☆
48-PAIRS
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891 ☆ *1
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆ ☆
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION 0207-J816 ☆
BASIC OPTION 1 R702 ☆ ☆
BASIC OPTION 2 R703 ☆ ☆
CANNED CYCLE J890 ☆ ☆
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855 ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆ ☆

- 500 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS35i-B
FS35i-B
16AX
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter PORT2 function R974 ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner PORT2 function R973 ☆
A02B-0207-J
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION ☆ ☆
900
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION J861 ☆
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J862 ☆
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653 ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE FOR 35I FUNCTION R708 ☆ ☆
FEED RATE CHANGE FUNCTION R716 ☆ -
FL-net function J692 ☆
FL-net PORT2 function R964 ☆
Function block function R852 ☆ ☆
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH R704 ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED SKIP J848 ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆
iHMI machining cycle (for 1 path system) R911 ☆
iHMI machining cycle (for 2 path system) R912 ☆
iHMI set-up guidance R910 ☆
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ☆ ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR R705 ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R706 ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ☆
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550 ☆ ☆
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆
Multi PMC function (3 systems) R855#3 ☆ ☆
Multi PMC function (5 systems) R855#5 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
S829 ☆ ☆
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN R411 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678 ☆ ☆

- 501 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS35i-B
FS35i-B
16AX
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN R320 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE R410 ☆
Nonvolatile PMC data table area expansion (40KB) S967#40K ☆ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function S984#10K ☆ ☆
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 J953 ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944 ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947 ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 256KBYTE J945 ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946 ☆ ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 64KBYTE J943 ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO Controller
R979 ☆
function
PMC AXIS CONTROL ACCELERATION/
R640 ☆ ☆
DECELERATION SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps H990#100K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 300,000 steps H990#300K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 32,000 steps H990#32K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 64,000 steps H990#64K ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 1MB R856#1M ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 2MB R856#2M ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 512KB R856#512K ☆ ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆ ☆
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆ *2
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆ ☆
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ☆ ☆
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION J803 ☆ ☆
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆ ☆
SPINDLE ORIENTATION J853 ☆
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J854 ☆
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850 ☆ ☆ *1
Step sequence function S982 ☆ ☆
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840 ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS J927 ☆ ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION J930 ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ☆ ☆
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : The function cannot be used though option becomes effective.

- 502 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

0i-LF Plus

The CNC Function which checked "○" is effective when the Package/Kit is selected
on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be effective.
Package/Kit

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
ADDITION OF CUTTING
S912 ○
CONDITION DATA
ENHANCED BUFFER
J611 ○
FUNCTION
LASER MINIMUM INSTRUCTION 1%
S925 ○
MACHINING S932 DUTY OVERRIDE
MULTI PIECE MACHINING
PACKAGE FUNCTION - ○
THE COMMAND FOR END
POSITION OF TAKING - ○
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION - ○
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN - ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES - ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES
R687 ☆
1000
ADDITION OF CUTTING CONDITION DATA S912 ☆
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
- ○
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II - ○
AI FEEDFORWARD R368 ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE - ○
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC - ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL - ○
BACKGROUND EDITING - ○
A02B-0207-J
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION ☆
816
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
- ○
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 256KB J736 ☆
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH - ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION - ○

- 503 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION - ○
CUSTOM MACRO - ○
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31 CHARACTERS R583 ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB - ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆
CUTTING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION - ○
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL
S674 ☆
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION - ○
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION - ○ *2
EDGE CUTTING FUNCTION - ○
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆
ENHANCED BUFFER FUNCTION J611 ☆
Ethenret/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION R967 ☆
Ethernet FUNCTION S707 ☆
Ethernet/IP ADAPTER SAFETY FUNCTION R976 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION R966 ☆
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION - ○ *1
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT - ○
EXTERNAL DECELERATION - ○
F1-DIGIT FEED - ○
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR - ○
FL-net FUNCTION J692 ☆
FUNCTION BLOCK FUNCTION - ○
GAP CONTROL FUNCTION FOR LASER - ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION - ○
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP - ○
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION - ○ *1
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION - ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM C - ○
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO - ○
LASER DATA LOG OUTPUT FUNCTION - ○
LASER MACHINING PACKAGE S932 ☆
LASER OSCILLATOR COMMUNICATION CONTROL
- ○
(FSSB CONNECTION)
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION - ○
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR - ○
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS - ○
MINIMUM INSTRUCTION 1% DUTY OVERRIDE S925 ☆
Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION R968 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
- ○
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH - ○

- 504 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ENGLISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE - ○
MULTI-STEP SKIP - ○
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA EXPANSION
S967#40K ☆
(40KB)
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION S984#10K ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL - ○
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 - ○
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION - ○
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 ☆
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP - ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R - ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE - ○
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 24,000 STEPS - ○
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K ☆
PMC MULTI-LANGUAGE MESSAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION - ○
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 1MB R856#1M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 512KB - ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND - ○
POSITION SWITCH - ○
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
R553 ☆
WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO CONTROLLER FUNCTION R971 ☆
PROFINET IO CONTROLLER FUNCTION R984 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE FUNCTION R972 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE SAFETY FUNCTION R977 ☆
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION - ○
PROGRAM RESTART - ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE - ○
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆

- 505 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY - ○
SAFETY FUNCTION BY FL-net S851 ☆
SCALING - ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP - ○
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION - ○
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING - ○
SMOOTH TOLERANCE CONTROL - ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL - ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE
- ○
SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN CIRCULAR
- ○
INTERPOLATION
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982 ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE - ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 - ○
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME
R323 ☆
1000
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME
R324 ☆
4000
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION J897 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS - ○
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION - ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM - ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET - ○
*1 : This option is available at only Machine composition of type 0.
*2 : This option is available at only Machine composition of type 1.

- 506 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

30i-LB

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
2 LASERS CONTROL FUNCTION S911 ☆
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION S673 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION J713 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830 ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES J887 ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES
R687 ☆
1000
ADDITION OF CUTTING CONDITION DATA S912 ☆
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J895 ☆
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE - ○
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804 ☆
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆
BACKGROUND EDITING J956 ☆
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
J829 ☆
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
C AXIS CONTROL J601 ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 256KB J736 ☆
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆
CUSTOM MACRO J873 ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆
CUTTING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION J886 ☆
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆
DUAL CHECK SAFETY S661 ☆
EDGE CUTTING FUNCTION J833 ☆
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆
ENHANCED BUFFER FUNCTION J611 ☆
Ethenret/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION R967 ☆

- 507 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
Ethernet/IP ADAPTER PORT2 FUNCTION R974 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION R966 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER PORT2 FUNCTION R973 ☆
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913 ☆
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ☆
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911 ☆
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ☆
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ☆
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879 ☆
FL-net FUNCTION J692 ☆
FL-net PORT2 FUNCTION R964 ☆
FUNCTION BLOCK FUNCTION - ○
GAP CONTROL FUNCTION FOR LASER J817 ☆
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972 ☆
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ☆
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ☆
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ☆
JERK CONTROL S678 ☆
LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND J602 ☆
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION R700 ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637 ☆
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734 ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835 ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 MILLION R600 ☆
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550 ☆
MINIMUM INSTRUCTION 1% DUTY OVERRIDE S925 ☆
Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION R968 ☆
MULTI PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION J603 ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION (3 SYSTEMS) R855#3 ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION (5 SYSTEMS) R855#5 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
S829 ☆
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆

- 508 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ENGLISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL J604 ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆
NANO SMOOTHING 2 R512 ☆
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA EXPANSION
S967#40K ☆
(40KB)
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION S984#10K ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ☆
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 J953 ☆
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 2 J954 ☆
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 ☆
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955 ☆
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615 ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944 ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947 ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 256KBYTE J945 ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE J948 ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949 ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946 ☆
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959 ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 300,000 STEPS H990#300K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 1MB R856#1M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 2MB R856#2M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 512KB R856#512K ☆
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818 ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆
POSITION SWITCH J846 ☆
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE FUNCTION R972 ☆
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION S904 ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC Series 15 J882 ☆
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ☆

- 509 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880 ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆
PUNCH PRESS FUNCTION R815 ☆
RAM AXIS CONTROL S919 ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971 ☆
SAFETY FUNCTION BY FL-net S851 ☆
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENTION (EIGHT AREAS) S908 ☆
SAFETY ZONE CHECK FUNCTION J605 ☆
SCALING J892 ☆
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ☆
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844 ☆
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION J803 ☆
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆
SMOOTH TCP R639 ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL J960 ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE
J961 ☆
SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN CIRCULAR
J809 ☆
INTERPOLATION
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982 ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE - ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 1 AREA EXPANSION R552 ☆
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 J840 ☆
T-AXIS AND C-AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL S907 ☆
THE COMMAND FOR END POSITION OF TAKING
S927 ☆
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522 ☆
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆
TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION J621 ☆
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR PUNCH
J614 ☆
PRESS
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION J897 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION - ○
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917 ☆
WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE
J622 ☆
FUNCTION
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993 ☆
Y AXIS CRACK CANCEL J616 ☆

- 510 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

30i-LB Plus

The CNC Function which checked "○" is effective when the Package/Kit is selected
on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be effective.
Package/Kit

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
C AXIS CONTROL J601 ○
PUNCH PRESS FUNCTION R815 ○
RAM AXIS CONTROL S919 ○
SAFETY ZONE AREA
S908 ○
EXTENTION
PUNCHING SAFETY ZONE CHECK
J605 ○
R104 FUNCTION
PACKAGE TOOL DATA SETTING
J621 ○
FUNCTION
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
J614 ○
FUNCTION
WORKPIECE HOLDER
INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE J622 ○
FUNCTION
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE
J713 ○
SYSTEM CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER
S667 ○
COMPENSATION
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL
S679 ○
FEED
LASER HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ○
R105
5-AXIS KIT MANUAL INTERRUPTION OF
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE S949 ×
SYSTEM CONVERSION
TILTED WORKING PLANE
R522 ○
INDEXING COMMAND
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR
S993 ○
COMPENSATION

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
2 LASERS CONTROL FUNCTION S911 ☆
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION S673 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION J713 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION J727 ☆

- 511 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN - ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES - ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES
R687 ☆
1000
ADDITION OF CUTTING CONDITION DATA - ○
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
- ○
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I - ○
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE - ○
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC - ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆
BACKGROUND EDITING - ○
A02B-0207-J
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION ☆
816
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
- ○
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
C AXIS CONTROL J601 ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 256KB J736 ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 512KB S827 ☆
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆
CONTROL IN/OUT - ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION - ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION - ○
CUSTOM MACRO - ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB - ○
CUTTING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION - ○
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL
S674 ☆
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆
DUAL CHECK SAFETY S661 ☆
EDGE CUTTING FUNCTION - ○
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆
ENHANCED BUFFER FUNCTION - ○
Ethenret/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION R967 ☆
Ethernet/IP ADAPTER PORT2 FUNCTION R974 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION R966 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER PORT2 FUNCTION R973 ☆
EXPANSION OF AXIS COMMAND IN TOOL CENTER
R592 ☆
POINT CONTROL
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT - ○
EXTERNAL DECELERATION - ○
F1-DIGIT FEED - ○
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR - ○
FL-net FUNCTION J692 ☆
FL-net PORT2 FUNCTION R964 ☆
FOCAS2/HSSB PORT2 FUNCTION S749 ☆
FUNCTION BLOCK FUNCTION - ○
GAP CONTROL FUNCTION FOR LASER - ○

- 512 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆
GRAPHIC DISPLAY - ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION - ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ☆
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION - ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM C - ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA S643 ☆
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO - ○
A02B-0359-
LASER 5-AXIS KIT ☆
R105
LASER DATA LOG OUTPUT FUNCTION - ○
LASER OSCILLATOR COMMUNICATION CONTROL
S928 ☆
(FSSB CONNECTION)
LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND J602 ☆
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION R700 ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637 ☆
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 MILLION - ☆
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550 ☆
MINIMUM INSTRUCTION 1% DUTY OVERRIDE - ○
Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION R968 ☆
MULTI PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION - ○
MULTI PMC FUNCTION (3 SYSTEMS) R855#3 ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION (5 SYSTEMS) R855#5 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
S829 ☆
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ENGLISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN R411 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆

- 513 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE R410 ☆
MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION R615 ☆
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL J604 ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA EXPANSION
S967#40K ☆
(40KB)
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION S984#10K ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL - ○
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 - ○
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 2 J954 ☆
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION - ○
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 ☆
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP - ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R - ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE - ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959 ☆
PMC ALLOCATION EXPANSION OF PROFINET IO
R979 ☆
CONTROLLER FUNCTION
PMC AXIS CONTROL ACCELERATION/ DECELERATION
R640 ☆
SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 300,000 STEPS H990#300K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 1MB R856#1M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 2MB R856#2M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 512KB - ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND - ○
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆
POSITION SWITCH - ○
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
R553 ☆
WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO CONTROLLER FUNCTION R971 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE FUNCTION R972 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE SAFETY FUNCTION R977 ☆
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION - ○
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC Series 15 J882 ☆
PROGRAM RESTART - ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE - ○
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆
PUNCH PRESS FUNCTION R815 ☆
A02B-0359-
PUNCHING PACKAGE ☆
R104
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART - ○

- 514 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
RAM AXIS CONTROL S919 ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY - ○
SAFETY FUNCTION BY FL-net S851 ☆
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENTION (EIGHT AREAS) S908 ☆
SAFETY ZONE CHECK FUNCTION J605 ☆
SCALING - ○
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE - ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP - ○
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION - ○
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING - ○
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆
SMOOTH TCP R639 ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL - ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE
- ○
SWITCH
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982 ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE - ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 1 AREA EXPANSION R552 ☆
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 - ○
T-AXIS AND C-AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL S907 ☆
THE COMMAND FOR END POSITION OF TAKING
- ○
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522 ☆
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆
TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION J621 ☆
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR PUNCH
J614 ☆
PRESS
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION J897 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS - ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION - ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM - ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET - ○
WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE
J622 ☆
FUNCTION
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993 ☆
Y AXIS CRACK CANCEL J616 ☆

- 515 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

31i-LB
Name Drawing No.
2 LASERS CONTROL FUNCTION S911
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
J713
CONVERSION
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
J887
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUTTING CONDITION DATA S912
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
J919
SYSTEM 300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
J895
SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *2
BACKGROUND EDITING J956
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J814
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
J829
AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
C AXIS CONTROL J601 *1
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM J736
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893
CUSTOM MACRO J873
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MBYTE J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MBYTE J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MBYTE J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MBYTE J738#8M
CUTTING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION J886
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760
EDGE CUTTING FUNCTION J833
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K
ENHANCED BUFFER FUNCTION J611
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911
F1-DIGIT FEED J820
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879
FIGURE COPYING J897
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA S643
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874
JERK CONTROL S678
LASER OSCILLATOR COMMUNICATION
S928
CONTROL (FSSB CONNECTION)
LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND J602
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637

- 516 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

MACHINING TIME STAMP J964
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593
MACRO EXECUTOR J888
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836
MINIMUM INSTRUCTION 1% DUTY OVERRIDE S925
MULTI PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION J603
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE
S829
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL J604
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849
NANO SMOOTHING S689
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS
J953
EXPANSION 1
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS
J954
EXPANSION 2
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655
OPTIMUM TORQUE
S675
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 256KBYTE J945
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE J948
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815
POSITION SWITCH J846
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION S904
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882
PROGRAM RESTART J838
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
PUNCH PRESS FUNCTION R815
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENTION (EIGHT AREAS) S908

- 517 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

SAFETY ZONE CHECK FUNCTION J605
SCALING J892
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES
J803
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777
SMOOTH TCP R639
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN
J809
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840
T-AXIS AND C-AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL S907
THE COMMAND FOR END POSITION OF TAKING
S927
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677
TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION J621
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR
J614
PUNCH PRESS
TOOL OFFSET S617
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926
TOOL RADIUS -TOOL NOSE RADIUS
J930
COMPENSATION
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917
WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE
J622
AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993
Y AXIS CRACK CANCEL J616
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at C–axis simultaneous control.
*2 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

Standard function
Name Drawing No.
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN －
ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING －
ASSIST GAS COMMAND －
AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION －
AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING －
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (MEMORY OPERATION) －
AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING －
AUTOMATIC SAFETY ZONE SETTING －
AUXILIARY FUNCTION －
AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK －
BELL-TYPE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
－
BEFORE LOOK AHEAD INTERPOLATION
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION －
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY R
－
PROGRAMMING

- 518 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

CIRCULAR NIBBLING －
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING －
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (MULTI.PIECE
－
MACHINING)
CUTTING FEEDRATE CLAMP －
CUTTING MODE －
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET
CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT －
PROGRAMMING
DWELL (SECOND DESIGNATION) －
EXACT STOP －
EXACT STOP MODE －
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE －
INPUT UNIT 10 TIME MULTIPLY －
LASER POWER CONTROL －
LEAST INPUT INCREMENTS (IS-A, IS-B) －
LINEAR ACC/DEC AFTER CUTTING FEED
－
INTERPOLATION
LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
－
BEFORE CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
LINEAR INTERPOLATION －
LINEAR NIBBLING －
MAX. PROGRAMMABLE DIMENSION －
MULTI.PIECE MACHINING COMMAND －
MULTI.PIECE MACHINING COMMAND －
MULTIPLE COMMAND OF AUXILIARY FUNCTION －
NIBBLING MODE －
NOZZLE LENGTH COMPENSATION －
NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS －
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP －
OVER TRAVEL －
PATTERN COMMAND －
PIERCING COMMAND －
PLANE SELECTION －
POSITIONING －
POSITIONING & PRESS OFF －
PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT －
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT －
RAPID TRAVERSE BELL-SHAPED
－
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
RAPID TRAVERSE BLOCK OVERLAP －
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM B) －
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM
－
C)
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM
－
D)
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE (INCREMENT SYSTEM E) －
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN －
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN CHECK －
ROTARY AXIS DESIGNATION －
ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER －
SKIP －
SPEED COMMAND EXTENSION IN LEAST INPUT
－
INCREMENTS C, D, AND E
STANDARD POINT COMMAND －
STORED STROKE CHECK 1 －

- 519 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

SUB PROGRAM CALL －
TANGENTIAL SPEED CONSTANT CONTROL －
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND
－
BY TOOL AXIS DIRECTION
TOOL FUNCTION －
TOOL LENGTH OFFSET －
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS －

- 520 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

31i-PB
Name Drawing No.
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON J887
VARIABLES
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *2
BACKGROUND EDITING J956
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J814
C AXIS CONTROL J601 *1
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM J736
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893
CUSTOM MACRO J873
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MBYTE J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MBYTE J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MBYTE J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MBYTE J738#8M
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874
LINEAR/CIRCULAR PUNCHING COMMAND J602
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964
MACRO EXECUTOR J888
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734
MULTI PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION J603
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE S829
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL J604
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS J953
EXPANSION 1

- 521 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS J954
EXPANSION 2
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 256KBYTE J945
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE J948
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959
POSITION SWITCH J846
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION S904
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENTION (EIGHT AREAS) S908
SAFETY ZONE CHECK FUNCTION J605
SCALING J892
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES J803
EXPANSION
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840
T-AXIS AND C-AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL S907
THE COMMAND FOR END POSITION OF TAKING S927
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES
TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION J621
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR J614
PUNCH PRESS
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS J930
COMPENSATION
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917
WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE J622
AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
Y AXIS CRACK CANCEL J616
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at C-axis simultaneous control.
*2 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

- 522 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

31i-WB
Name Drawing No.
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES 1000 R687
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM 300-PAIRS J919
AUXILIARY FUNCTION SIGNAL OUTPUT AT COMMANDED POSITION R812
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804
BACKGROUND EDITING J956
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J814
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM J736
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807
CORNER SHAPE COMPENSATION R407
CUSTOM MACRO J873
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MBYTE J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MBYTE J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MBYTE J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MBYTE J738#8M
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805
LARGE ANGLE TAPER CUTTING COMPENSATION FUNCTION R806
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 MILLION R600
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS) S829
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 J953
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 2 J954
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655
OPTIMUM DIRECTION REVERSE CONTROL R809

- 523 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 256KBYTE J945
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE J948
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE J949
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 8MBYTE J959
POSITION SWITCH J846
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
RESTART BY SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH R813
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET S728
SCRAP REMAINING/CUTTUNG-OFF FUNCTION R808
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844
TAPER CUTTING COMPENSATION R408
WIRE ELECTRODE CONSUMPTION COMPENSATION FUNCTION R804
WIRE OFFSET PAIRS 1024-PAIRS R807
WORKPIECE LEVELING FUNCTION R805

PMi-MODEL A

Name Drawing No.

AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *1
BASIC OPTION 1 R702
BASIC OPTION 2 R703
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M
ELECTRONIC CAM FUNCTION R402
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
FANUC PICTURE FOR POWER MOTION I FUNCTION R708
FEED RATE CHANGE FUNCTION R716
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717
MACRO EXECUTOR R705
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R706
MACRO FOR MULTI-AXIS HIGH RESPONSE R397
FUNCTION
MDI RESET KEY INVALIDATION FUNCTION R549
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550
MULTI-AXES SYNCHRONOUS FUNCTION R403
MULTI-AXIS HIGH RESPONSE FUNCTION R396
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED S829
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968

- 524 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 J953
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 128KBYTE J944
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 1MBYTE J947
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 256KBYTE J945
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE J946
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 64KBYTE J943
PMC AXIS CONTROL R640
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION SPECIFICATION
FEED
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815
POSITION DEFINITION TYPE SYNCHRONOUS R399
FUNCTION
PRESSURE AND POSITION CONTROL FUNCTION R400 *2
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SKIP FUNCTION FOR MULTI-AXIS HIGH RESPONSE R398
FUNCTION
TEACHING SUPPORT SCREEN R388
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : Only the command can be controlled at Pressure and position control function.
(Only the position command can be use.)

When BASIC OPTION 1(R702), BASIC OPTION 2(R703), MACRO EXECUTOR

(R705), MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR (R706) or FANUC
PICTURE FOR POWER MOTION I FUNCTION(R708) is selected, the following
CNC Functions become available at CNC GUIDE.

Function that can be used by BASIC OPTION 1(R702)

When BASIC OPTION 1(R702) is selected, the following CNC Functions become
available at CNC GUIDE.
Name
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES
EXPANSION
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC
CUSTOM MACRO
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
VARIABLES
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE

Function that can be used by BASIC OPTION 2(R703)

When BASIC OPTION 2(R703) is selected, the following CNC Functions become
available at CNC GUIDE.
Name Drawing No.
BASIC OPTION 1 R702
CONTROL AXIS DETACH -

- 525 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

INCREMENTAL SYSTEM C (1/10) -
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION -
POSITION SWITCH -
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN -
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIPP (TOTAL 9) -
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT -
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS -
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY -
SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL -
SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL GENERAL
-
PURPOSE SWITCH
PLAYBACK -
BACKGROUND EDITING -
PATTERN DATA INPUT -
RATE FEED -

Function that can be used by MACRO EXECUTOR (R705)

When MACRO EXECUTOR (R705) is selected, the following CNC Functions
become available at CNC GUIDE.
Name Drawing No.
MACRO EXECUTOR -
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB -

NOTE
This function cannot be specified at the same time as MACRO
EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR (R706)

Function that can be used by MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR (R706)

When MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR (R706) is selected, the
following CNC Functions become available at CNC GUIDE.
Name Drawing No.
C + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR -
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MBYTE J738#2M
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM -

NOTE
This function cannot be specified at the same time as MACRO
EXECUTOR (R705)

- 526 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Function that can be used by FANUC PICTURE FOR POWER MOTION I FUNCTION(R708)
When FANUC PICTURE FOR POWER MOTION I FUNCTION(R708) is selected,
the following CNC Functions become available at CNC GUIDE.

Name Drawing No.

FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR -
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MBYTE J738#6M

- 527 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

A.2 ACADEMIC PACKAGE

You can select the CNC Function about CNC GUIDE Academic package as
following.

31i-MODEL A
Name Drawing No.
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM ONVERSION J713
3RD./4TH. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES J887
ADDITION OF TOOL PAIRS FOR TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J936
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM 300-PAIRS J919
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM 48-PAIRS J895
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *1
BACKGROUND EDITING J956
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J814
BUILT-IN 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION R541
CANNED CYCLE J890
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH MANUAL MOVE S825
CHOPPING J707
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER J720
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM J736
CONICAL / SPIRAL INTERPOLATION J780
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893
CUSTOM MACRO J873
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 1MB J738#1M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 256KB J738#256K
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 3MB J738#3M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 5MB J738#5M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL S674
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING J870
DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF DIAMETER/RADIUS SPECIFICATION S630
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911

- 528 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

F1-DIGIT FEED J820
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879
FIGURE COPYING J897
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607
G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA S643
INVERSE TIME FEED J715
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION J710
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964
MACRO EXECUTOR J888
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC 1 S790
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC 2 S790
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION S789
MANUAL GUIDE I TILTED WORKING PLANE MACHINING S788
FUNCTION
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET J881
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED S829
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES J877
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II J889
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615
PATTERN DATA INPUT J884
PMC AXIS CONTROL ACCELERATION/DECELERATION R640
SPECIFICATION FEED
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815

- 529 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

POSITION SWITCH J846
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882
PROGRAM RESTART J838
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
Real time custom macro S842
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET S728
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971
SCALING J892
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION J803
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840
TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND WITH GUIDANCE R522
TOOL ATTACHMENT/DETACHMENT MANAGEMENT S997
FUNCTION
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION J931
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR OVERSIZE TOOLS S602

TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED DATA S834

EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED DATA S835
EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET S617
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 1000 PAIRS S833
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 240 PAIRS S831
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 64 PAIRS S830
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION J930
WORK PIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

- 530 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

0i MODEL D
The CNC Function which checked "○" at Package 1 or 2 is effective when package 1
or 2 is selected on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be selected.

Drawing Machining Center System Lathe System

Name
No. Package 1 Package 2 Package 1 Package 2
2ND. AUXILIARY FUNCTION ○ ○ ○ ○
3RD./4TH. REFERENCE RETURN ○ ○ ○ ○
ADD. COMMON MACRO VALUE ○ ○ ○ ○
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE
○ ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE ○ ○
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC ○ ○ ○ ○
AXIS CONTROL DETACH ○ ○ ○ ○ *1
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ○ ○ ○ ○ *1
BACKGROUND EDITING ○ ○ ○ ○
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 A02B-0207
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION -J814
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING ○ ○ ○ ○
CHAMFERING/CORNER R ○ ○
CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER ○ ○
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CNTL ○ ○ ○ ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION ○ ○ ○ ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO ○ ○ ○ ○ *2
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 1M BYTE J738#1M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2M BYTE J738#2M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 3M BYTE J738#3M ☆ ☆ *2
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4M BYTE J738#4M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512K
J738#512K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
BYTE
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 5M BYTE J738#5M ☆ ☆ *2
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6M BYTE J738#6M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8M BYTE J738#8M ☆ ☆ *2
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ○ ○ ○ ○
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION ○ ○
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY
J973 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND A02B-0207
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
LIBRARIES FUNCTION -J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTERNAL DECELERATION ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTERNAL MESSAGE ○ ○ ○ ○
F1-DIGIT FEED ○ ○
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
G CODE SYSTEM B/C ○ ○
GRAPHIC DISPLAY ○ ○ ○ ○
HANDWHEEL FEED 1ST. ○ ○ ○ ○
HANDWHEEL FEED 2ND./3RD. ○ ○ ○ ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION ○ ○ ○ ○
INCH/METRIC SELECTION ○ ○ ○ ○

- 531 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Drawing Machining Center System Lathe System

Name
No. Package 1 Package 2 Package 1 Package 2
INCREMENTAL SYSTEM C (1/10) ○ ○ ○ ○
INTERRUPTION TYPE MACRO ○ ○ ○ ○
INVERSE TIME FEED ○ ○
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C LANGUAGE
J734 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXECUTOR
MANUAL GUIDE i-1 S790 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i-2 S790 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TUR. ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
CHINESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED ○ ○ ○ ○
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
CZECH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
DANISH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
DUTCH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
FRENCH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
GERMAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
HUNGARIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
ITALIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
JAPANESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
KOREAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
POLISH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
PORTUGUESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
RUSSIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
SPANISH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
SWEDISH
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
○ ○ ○ ○
TURKISH
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLE ○ ○
MULTIPLE REPETITVE CYCLES II ○ ○
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL ○ ○
OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMF./COR. R ○ ○
PATTERN DATA INPUT ○ ○ ○ ○
POLAR COODINATE COMMAND ○ ○ ○ ○
POSITION SWITCH ○ ○ ○ ○
PRE-TRAVEL STROKE LIMIT CHECK ○ ○ ○ ○
PROGRAM RESTART ○ ○ ○ ○

- 532 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Drawing Machining Center System Lathe System

Name
No. Package 1 Package 2 Package 1 Package 2
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE ○ ○
PROTECTION OF DATA AT 8
S828 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
LEVELS
REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPAN.
○ ○ ○ ○
1
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT ○ ○ ○ ○
SCALING ○ ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER
○ ○ ○ ○
COMPARISON AND STOP
SERIAL SPINDLE INTERFACE ○ ○ ○ ○
SIMUL. CONTROL. AXES EXPAN. ○ ○ ○ ○
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL ○ ○ ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL
○ ○ ○ ○
GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCH
STORED STROKE LIMIT 2ND./3RD. ○ ○ ○ ○
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR OFFSET ○ ○
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ○ ○ ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY 200 PAIRS J927 ☆ ☆ *2
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY 400 PAIRS ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY 64 PAIRS ☆ ☆ *3
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 128- PAIRS ☆ ☆ *2
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆ ☆ *3
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE
○ ○ ○ ○
RADIUS COMPENSATION
TOUCH PANEL C S881 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM ○ ○ ○ ○
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
○ ○ ○ ○
PRESET
Y AXIS OFFSET ○ ○
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : This option can be selected only at 2 paths system (for lathe system).
*3 : This option can not be selected on 2 path systems (for lathe system).

0i MODEL F
NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
J713 ☆ ☆
CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ○ ○
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
○ ○
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
R687 ☆ ☆
VARIABLES 1000
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM ○

- 533 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆ ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ☆ ☆
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC ○ ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ○ ○ *4
BACKGROUND EDITING ○ ○
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J816 ☆ ☆
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
○ ○ *3
AFTER CUTTING FEED
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM J736 ☆ ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM
S827 ☆ ☆
512KB
CANNED CYCLE ○
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ○
CONTROL AXIS DETACH ○ ○
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION ○ ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO ○ ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR
S674 ☆ ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ○ ○
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING ○
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760 ☆ ☆
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆ ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆ ☆
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900 ☆ ☆
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION ○ ○
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING
○ ○
FUNCTION
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT ○ ○
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653 ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879 ☆ ☆
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆ ☆ *1
FL-net function J692 ☆ ☆
Function block function ○ ○
G CODE SYSTEM B/C ○
GRAPHIC DISPLAY ○ ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ☆

- 534 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ○ ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM C ○ ○
INDEX TABLE INDEXING ○
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ○ ○
INVERSE TIME FEED ○
JERK CONTROL S678 ☆ *3
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆ ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆ ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637 ☆ ☆
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE 0i S772 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i ADVANCED GUIDANCE
S774 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC S790 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME
S789 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i TILTED WORKING PLANE
S788 ☆
INDEXING FUNCTION
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS ○ ○
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET ○
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE
○ ○
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HINDI ○ ○ *2
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE ○ ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II ○
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆ ☆

- 535 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL ○
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆ ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE
S675 ☆ ☆ *3
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ○ ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R ○ ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 512KBYTE ○ ○
PATTERN DATA INPUT ○ ○
PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL R725 ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO Controller
R979 ☆ ☆
function
PMC AXIS CONTROL
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION SPECIFICATION R640 ☆
FEED
PMC Ladder function 24,000 steps ○ ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND ○
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION ○
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆ ☆ *3
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
R553 ☆ ☆
WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆ ☆
POSITION SWITCH ○ ○
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 ○ ○
PROGRAM RESTART ○ ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE ○ ○
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆ ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆ ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆ ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆ ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ○ ○
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆ ☆
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP ○ ○
SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION S771 ☆
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES
○ ○
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING ○
SMALL-HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL
○ ○
PURPOSE SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN
○ *3
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE ORIENTATION ○ ○
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION ○ ○
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT ○ ○
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 ○ ○
THREAD CUTTING RETRACT ○ *3
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522 ☆
TOOL ATTACHMENT /DETACHMENT MANAGEMENT S997 ☆ ☆

- 536 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No.
Machining Lathe
FUNCTION
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION ○
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED
S834 ☆ ☆
DATA EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED
S835 ☆ ☆
DATA EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET ○
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 128-PAIRS ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS ○
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S833 ☆ ☆
1000 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S831 ☆ ☆
240 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S830 ☆ ☆
64 PAIRS
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS
○ ○
COMPENSATION
TURN MATE i (with touch panel) S792 ☆
TURN MATE i Expansion of Machining Cycle S796 ☆
TURN MATE i MDI key operation function S794 ☆
TURN MATE i NC program conversion function S795 ☆
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM ○ ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET ○ ○
*1 : This option can be seleced only at 2 paths system.
*2 : Only the 8.4 inch is supported.
*3 : The function cannot be used though option becomes effective.
*4 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

- 537 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

0i-MODEL F Plus
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available
NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION - ○ ○
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 - ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM J713 ☆ ☆
CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆ -
3RD./4TH. REFERENCE POSITION - ○ ○
RETURN
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON - ○ ○
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON R687 ☆ ☆
VARIABLES 1000
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE J919 ☆ -
SYSTEM 300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE - ○ -
SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I J665 - ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ○ ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE - ○ -
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC - ○ ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL - ○ ○ *1
BACKGROUND EDITING - ○ ○
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J816 ☆ ☆
BELL-SHAPED - ○ ○ *4
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
CANNED CYCLE - ○ ○
CHAMFERING/CORNER R - - ○
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER - - ○
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL J736 ☆ ☆
SRAM 256KB
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL S827 ☆ ☆
SRAM 512KB
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆ ☆ *6
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL - ○ ○
CONTROL AXIS DETACH - ○ ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION - ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO - ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31 R583 ☆ ☆
CHARACTERS
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB - ○ ○

- 538 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR S674 ☆ ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION - ○ ○
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION - - ○
PROGRAMMING
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760 ○ ☆
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆ ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆ ☆
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES A02B-0207-J900 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION - ○ ○ *2
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING - ○ ○ *2
FUNCTION
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT - ○ ○ *8
EXTERNAL DECELERATION - ○ ○
F1-DIGIT FEED - ○ -
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN R653 ☆ ☆
ENHANCEMENT 1
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR - ○ ○
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆ -
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆ ☆ Only for 2
paths system
FL-net function J692 ☆ ☆
FOCAS2/HSSB PORT2 FUNCTION - ○ ○
Function block function - ○ ○
G CODE SYSTEM B/C - - ○
GRAPHIC DISPLAY - ○ ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ○ ☆
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 ☆ ☆ *7
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ○ ○
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION - ○ ○ *6
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION - ○ ○
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL S688 ☆ -
INCREMENT SYSTEM C - ○ ○
INDEX TABLE INDEXING - ○ -
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO - ○ ○

- 539 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
INVERSE TIME FEED - ○ -
JERK CONTROL - ○ - *4
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆ ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆ ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING S637 ○ ☆
FUNCTION
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR - ○ ○
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE - ○ ○
EXECUTOR
MANUAL GUIDE 0i S772 ☆ ☆ *5
MANUAL GUIDE i R948 ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i ADVANCED GUIDANCE S774 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME S789 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i TILTED WORKING PLANE S788 ☆ -
INDEXING FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL S779 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT - ○ ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS - ○ ○
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET - - ○
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆ ☆
Multi PMC function (3 systems) R855#3 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE - ○ ○
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY - ○ ○
HUNGARIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY - ○ ○
PORTUGUESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY - ○ ○
SLOVENIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH - ○ ○

- 540 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK - ○ ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE - ○ ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES - - ○
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES Ⅱ - - ○
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ○ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC data table area expansion S967#40K ☆ ☆
(40KB)
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function S984#10K ☆ ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ○ ☆
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS - ○ ○
EXPANSION 1
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ○ ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE S675 ☆ ☆ *4
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP - ○ ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R - ○ ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE - ○ ○
PATTERN DATA INPUT - ○ ○
PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL R725 ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO
R979 ☆ ☆
Controller function
PMC AXIS CONTROL R640 ☆ ☆
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps H990#100K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 24,000 steps - ○ ○
PMC Ladder function 32,000 steps H990#32K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 64,000 steps H990#64K ☆ ☆
PMC MESSAGE MULTI-LANGUAGE - ○ ○
PMC symbol-comment-message area 1MB R856#1M ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 512KB - ○ ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND - ○ -
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION - - ○
POSITION SWITCH - ○ ○
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM J693 ☆ ☆ *4
ACCELERATION
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE R553 ☆ ☆
SYSTEM WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆ ☆

- 541 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆ ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES - ○ ○
15
PROGRAM RESTART - ○ ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE - ○ ○
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE R502 ☆ ☆
OVERLAP
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆ ☆
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART R630 ☆ ☆ *3
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆ ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆ ☆
RIGID TAPPING J828 ○ ○
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY - ○ ○
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆ ☆
SCALING - ○ -
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND - ○ ○
STOP
SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION - ○ -
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES - ○ ○
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING - ○ -
SMALL-HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE - ○ -
SMOOTH TOLERANCE CONTROL - ○ -
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL - ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL - ○ ○
GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION J809 ○ - *4
IN CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE ORIENTATION - ○ ○ *2
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION - ○ ○ *2
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT - ○ ○
Step sequence function S982 ☆ ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE - ○ ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 - ○ ○
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO R323 ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 1000
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO R324 ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 4000
THREADING CYCLE RETRACT - - ○
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING R522 ☆ ☆
COMMAND
TOOL ATTACHMENT/DETACHMENT S997 ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION - - ○

- 542 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

NC Type
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Machining Lathe
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT - ○ ○
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616 ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: S834 ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: S835 ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET - ○ -
TOOL OFFSET FOR MILLING AND R595 - ☆
TURNING FUNCTION
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C - ○ -
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 128-PAIRS - - ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 - ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS - ○ -
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S833 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 1000 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S831 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 240 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT S830 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 64 PAIRS
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS - ○ ○
COMPENSATION
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM - ○ ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM - ○ ○
PRESET
Y-AXIS OFFSET - - ○

*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

*2 : Only the signals are supported.
*3 : Program restart memory is cleared when the CNC GUIDE is started.
*4 : The function cannot be used though option becomes effective.
*5 : This option is available at only Machine composition that do not uses iHMI.
*6 : This option is available at only Machine composition that uses iHMI.
*7 : Reciprocating motion of chopping does not work.
*8 : External machine zero point shift cannot be used.

- 543 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

30i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B
31i-MODEL B5
32i-MODEL B
Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3D INTERFERENCE CHECK WITH
R542 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR
S673 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERPOLATION
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
J713 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION J727 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5-AXIS MACHINING CONDITION SETTING
R721 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
J887 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
R687 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES 1000
ADDITION OF TOOL PAIRS FOR TOOL LIFE
J936 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
J919 ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM 300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
J895 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *1
BACKGROUND EDITING J956 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
A02B-0207-J
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
816
BELL-SHAPED
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER J829 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
CUTTING FEED
BUILT-IN 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK
R541 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
CANNED CYCLE J890 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH
S825 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL MOVE
CHOPPING J707 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER J720 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL
J736 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SRAM
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL
S827 ☆ ☆
SRAM 512KB
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONICAL/SPIRAL INTERPOLATION J780 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 544 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM MACRO J873 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31
R583 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHARACTERS
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆ ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR
S674 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION
J870 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMING
DUAL CHECK SAFETY S661 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF
S630 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DIAMETER/RADIUS SPECIFICATION
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter PORT2 function R974 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner PORT2 function R973 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION OF AXIS COMMAND IN TOOL
R592 ☆ ☆ ☆
CENTER POINT CONTROL
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
EXTENDED CONVERSATIONAL MACRO
S798 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES A02B-0207-J
☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION 900
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION J861 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING
J862 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN
R653 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ENHANCEMENT 1
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FL-net function J692 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FL-net PORT2 function R964 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 545 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GROOVE CUTTING FUNCTION BY
S854 ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTINUOUS CIRCLE MOVEMENT
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *7
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
J745 ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES A
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
J746 ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES B
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
S640 ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES C
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
R513 ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLES D
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING J832 ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING
OPERATION INFORMATION OUTPUT R609 ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING RETRACT
J663 ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING SKIP
S662 ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED PROCESSING S809 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ☆ ☆ ☆
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
iHMI MACHINING CYCLE(FOR 1 PATH
R911 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
SYSTEM)
iHMI MACHINING CYCLE(FOR 2 PATH
R912 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
SYSTEM)
iHMI MACHINING CYCLE(FOR 3 PATH
R913 ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
SYSTEM)
iHMI MACHINING CYCLE(FOR 4 PATH
R914 ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
SYSTEM)
iHMI SET-UP GUIDANCE R910 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *6
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL S688 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY
S643 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AREA
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INVERSE TIME FEED J715 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION J710 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
JERK CONTROL S678 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE
R597 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM SWITCHING FUNCTION
LOOK-AHEAD BLOCKS EXPANSION S815 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING
R700 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING
S637 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION

- 546 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE
J734 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXECUTOR
MANUAL GUIDE i R948 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i ADVANCED GUIDANCE
S774 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC S790 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME
S789 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i TILTED WORKING PLANE
S788 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INDEXING FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL FUNCTION S779 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10
R600 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MILLION
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE
R550 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXECUTOR
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET J881 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION(3 SYSTEMS) R855#3 ☆ ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION(5 SYSTEMS) R855#5 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE
S829 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
R411 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INDONESIAN
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
J678 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PORTUGUESE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN R320 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
R410 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VIETNAMESE
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES J877 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II J889 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 547 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
NANO SMOOTHING 2 R512 ☆ ☆
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 256K J993#256K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 64K J993#64K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA
S967#40K ☆ ☆
EXPANSION(40KB)
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY
S984 ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆ ☆
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE
S675 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PATTERN DATA INPUT J884 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL R725 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO
R979 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Controller function
PMC AXIS CONTROL
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION R640 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K ☆ ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 300,000 STEPS H990#300K ☆ ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K ☆ ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K ☆ ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA
R856#1M ☆ ☆
1MB
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA
R856#2M ☆ ☆
2MB
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA
R856#512K ☆ ☆
512KB
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POSITION SWITCH J846 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM
J693 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
ACCELERATION
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE
R553 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SYSTEM WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE
R502 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OVERLAP
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART R630 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *4
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
RIGID TAPPING J828 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE
S728 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OFFSET
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SCALING J892 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 548 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND
J844 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STOP
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES
J803 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆ ☆ ☆
SMOOTH TCP R639 ☆ ☆ ☆
SMOOTH TOLERANCE CONTROL R696 ☆ ☆ ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL J960 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL
J961 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PURPOSE SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN
J809 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *5
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE CONTROL SWITCHING FUNCTION
R608 ☆ ☆ ☆
FOR HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING
SPINDLE ORIENTATION J853 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *3
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J854 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982 ☆ ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO
R323 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 1000
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO
R324 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VARIABLE NAME 4000
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING
R522 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COMMAND
TOOL ATTACHMENT /DETACHMENT
S997 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION J931 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION IN TOOL
S670 ☆ ☆
AXIS DIRECTION
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR
R681 ☆ ☆
MULTI-EDGE TOOLS
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S834 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S835 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOMIZED DATA EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION R691 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET FOR MILLING AND TURNING
R595 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 549 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No.
FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT
S833 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 1000 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT
S831 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 240 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT
S830 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION: 64 PAIRS
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆ ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS
J930 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COMPENSATION
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J917 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PRESET
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR
S993 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
COMPENSATION
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : Compensation is not applied.
*3 : Only the signals are supported.
*4 : Program restart memory is cleared when the CNC GUIDE is started.
*5 : The function cannot be used though option becomes effective.
*6 : This option is available at only Machine composition that uses iHMI.
*7 : Reciprocating motion of chopping does not work.

30i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B Plus
31i-MODEL B5 Plus
32i-MODEL B Plus

Package/Kit
The same Package/Kit is available as CNC GUIDE Standard package.

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Series
Drawing
Name FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
No.
Plus Plus Plus Plus
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
2ND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET J980 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3D INTERFERENCE CHECK WITH PERSONAL
R542 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
COMPUTER FUNCTION

- 550 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Drawing
Name FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
No.
Plus Plus Plus Plus
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION S673 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
J713 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION J727 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830 ○ ○ ○ ○
4TH/5TH AXIS OFFSET R517 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5-axis kit R098 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5-AXIS MACHINING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION R721 ☆ - ☆ -
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES J887 ○ ○ ○ ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES
R687 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
1000
ADDITION OF TOOL PAIRS FOR TOOL LIFE
J936 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANAGEMENT
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J895 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804 ○ ○ ○ ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
BACKGROUND EDITING J956 ○ ○ ○ ○
A02B-0207-
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
J816
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
J829 ○ ○ ○ ○ *3
AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
BUILT-IN 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION R541 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CANNED CYCLE J890 ○ ○ ○ ○
CHAMFERING/CORNER R J875 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH MANUAL
S825 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MOVE
CHOPPING J707 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER J720 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 256KB J736 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 512KB S827 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONICAL/SPIRAL INTERPOLATION J780 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ○ ○ ○ ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM MACRO J873 ○ ○ ○ ○
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31 CHARACTERS R583 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 551 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Drawing
Name FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
No.
Plus Plus Plus Plus
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ○ ○ ○ ○
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL
S674 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING J870 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF DIAMETER/RADIUS
S630 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SPECIFICATION
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter PORT2 function R974 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner PORT2 function R973 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION OF AXIS COMMAND IN TOOL CENTER
R592 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
POINT CONTROL
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTENDED CONVERSATIONAL MACRO FUNCTION S798 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION J861 ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J862 ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913 ○ ○ ○ ○ *5
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ○ ○ ○ ○
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ○ ○ ○ ○
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FIGURE COPYING J897 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT R607 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FL-net function J692 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FL-net PORT2 function R964 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Function block function R852 ○ ○ ○ ○
G CODE SYSTEM B/C J871 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972 ○ ○ ○ ○
Grinding package R095 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
GROOVE CUTTING FUNCTION BY CONTINUOUS
S854 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
CIRCLE MOVEMENT

- 552 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Drawing
Name FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
No.
Plus Plus Plus Plus
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ○ ○ ○ ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆ - - -
HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION R662 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *4
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
J745 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
VARIABLES A
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
J746 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
VARIABLES B
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
S640 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
VARIABLES C
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CUTTING ADDITIONAL
R513 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
VARIABLES D
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING J832 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING OPERATION
R609 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
INFORMATION OUTPUT FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING RETRACT
J663 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
FUNCTION
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING SKIP FUNCTION S662 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
HIGH-SPEED PROCESSING S809 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ○ ○ ○ ○
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI machining cycle (for 1 path system) R911 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI machining cycle (for 2 path system) R912 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI machining cycle (for 3 path system) R913 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI machining cycle (for 4 path system) R914 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
iHMI set-up guidance R910 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *2
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876 ○ ○ ○ ○
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL S688 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805 ○ ○ ○ ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA S643 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ○ ○ ○ ○
INVERSE TIME FEED J715 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION J710 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE SYSTEM
R597 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SWITCHING FUNCTION
Look-ahead blocks expansion S815 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION R700 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 553 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Drawing
Name FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
No.
Plus Plus Plus Plus
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ○ ○ ○ ○
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734 ○ ○ ○ ○
MANUAL GUIDE i ADVANCED GUIDANCE FUNCTION S774 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i BASIC S790 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION S789 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING
S788 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL FUNCTION S779 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835 ○ ○ ○ ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ○ ○ ○ ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 MILLION R600 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Milling package R094 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET J881 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Multi path kit R096 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Multi PMC function (3 systems) R855#3 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Multi PMC function (5 systems) R855#5 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
S829 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN R411 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN R320 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 554 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Drawing
Name FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
No.
Plus Plus Plus Plus
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE R410 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES J877 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES II J889 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NANO SMOOTHING 2 R512 ☆ - ☆ -
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 256K J993#256K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NONVOLATILE MEMORY EXPANSION 64K J993#64K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC data table area expansion (40KB) S967#40K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function S984#10K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955 ○ ○ ○ ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PATTERN DATA INPUT J884 ○ ○ ○ ○
PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL R725 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO Controller
R979 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
function
PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps H990#100K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 300,000 steps H990#300K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 32,000 steps H990#32K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 64,000 steps H990#64K ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 1MB R856#1M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 2MB R856#2M ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 512KB R856#512K ○ ○ ○ ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
POSITION SWITCH J846 ○ ○ ○ ○
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
R553 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882 ○ ○ ○ ○
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ○ ○ ○ ○

- 555 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Drawing
Name FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
No.
Plus Plus Plus Plus
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART R630 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
RIGID TAPPING J828 ○ ○ ○ ○
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL J743 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET S728 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Rotary table kit R103 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971 ○ ○ ○ ○
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SCALING J892 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ○ ○ ○ ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844 ○ ○ ○ ○
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION J803 ○ ○ ○ ○
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
SMOOTH TCP R639 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
SMOOTH TOLERANCE CONTROL R696 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL J960 ○ ○ ○ ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL
J961 ○ ○ ○ ○
PURPOSE SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN
J809 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
SPINDLE CONTROL SWITCHING FUNCTION FOR
R608 ☆ ☆ ☆ -
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING
SPINDLE ORIENTATION J853 ○ ○ ○ ○
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J854 ○ ○ ○ ○
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850 ○ ○ ○ ○
Step sequence function S982 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749 ○ ○ ○ ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 J840 ○ ○ ○ ○
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME
R323 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
1000
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME
R324 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
4000
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL ATTACHMENT /DETACHMENT MANAGEMENT
S997 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 100-PAIRS R589 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA 300-PAIRS R590 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL GEOMETRY/WEAR COMPENSATION J931 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION IN TOOL AXIS
S670 ☆ - ☆ -
DIRECTION
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT J935 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION S852 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆

- 556 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Drawing
Name FS30i-B FS31i-B FS31i-B5 FS32i-B
No.
Plus Plus Plus Plus
TOOL MANAGEMENT EXPANSION B R616 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR MULTI-EDGE
R681 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOLS
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED DATA
S834 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION (5-20)
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: CUSTOMIZED DATA
S835 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
EXPANSION (5-40)
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ *1
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION R691 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET FOR MILLING AND TURNING
R595 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
FUNCTION
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION:
S833 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
1000 PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 240
S831 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PAIRS
TOOL PAIR FOR TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: 64
S830 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
PAIRS
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆ - ☆ -
TOOL POSTURE TURNING R338 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION J930 ○ ○ ○ ○
Turning package 1 R092 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Turning package 2 R093 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
TWP kit R097 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ○ ○ ○ ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917 ○ ○ ○ ○
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Y-AXIS OFFSET J934 ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
*1 : Standard function at Type M.
*2 : This option is available at only Machine composition that uses iHMI.
*3 : The function cannot be used though option becomes effective.
*4 : Reciprocating motion of chopping does not work.
*5 : External machine zero point shift cannot be used.

- 557 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

35i-MODEL B
35i-MODEL B 16AX

Set Option
The same Set Option is available as CNC GUIDE Standard package.

List of function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Series
Name Drawing No. FS35i-B
FS35i-B
16AX
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆ ☆
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J895 ☆
48-PAIRS
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891 ☆ *1
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆ ☆
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION 0207-J816 ☆
BASIC OPTION 1 R702 ☆ ☆
BASIC OPTION 2 R703 ☆ ☆
CANNED CYCLE J890 ☆ ☆
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL J855 ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆ ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆
Ethenret/IP Adapter function R967 ☆
Ethernet function S707 ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter PORT2 function R974 ☆
Ethernet/IP Adapter Safety function R976 ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner function R966 ☆
Ethernet/IP Scanner PORT2 function R973 ☆
A02B-0207-J
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION ☆ ☆
900
EXTENDED SPINDLE ORIENTATION J861 ☆
EXTENDED SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J862 ☆
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC R572 ☆ ☆
FANUC AUTO HMI-NC SCREEN ENHANCEMENT 1 R653 ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE FOR 35I FUNCTION R708 ☆ ☆
FEED RATE CHANGE FUNCTION R716 ☆ -
FL-net function J692 ☆
FL-net PORT2 function R964 ☆
Function block function R852 ☆ ☆
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ☆ ☆
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH R704 ☆ ☆

- 558 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS35i-B
FS35i-B
16AX
HIGH SPEED SKIP J848 ☆ ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆
iHMI machining cycle (for 1 path system) R911 ☆
iHMI machining cycle (for 2 path system) R912 ☆
iHMI set-up guidance R910 ☆
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ☆ ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR R705 ☆ ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R706 ☆ ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ☆
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550 ☆ ☆
Modbus/TCP Server function R968 ☆
Multi PMC function (3 systems) R855#3 ☆ ☆
Multi PMC function (5 systems) R855#5 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
S829 ☆ ☆
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN R411 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN R320 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆ ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE R410 ☆
Nonvolatile PMC data table area expansion (40KB) S967#40K ☆ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function S984#10K ☆ ☆
PMC allocation expansion of PROFINET IO Controller
R979 ☆
function
PMC AXIS CONTROL ACCELERATION/
R640 ☆ ☆
DECELERATION SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps H990#100K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 300,000 steps H990#300K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 32,000 steps H990#32K ☆ ☆
PMC Ladder function 64,000 steps H990#64K ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 1MB R856#1M ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 2MB R856#2M ☆ ☆
PMC symbol-comment-message area 512KB R856#512K ☆ ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆ ☆
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆ *2

- 559 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Series
Name Drawing No. FS35i-B
FS35i-B
16AX
PROFINET IO Controller function R971 ☆
PROFINET IO Device function R972 ☆
PROFINET IO Device Safety function R977 ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆ ☆
Safety function by FL-net S851 ☆
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ☆ ☆
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION J803 ☆ ☆
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆ ☆
SPINDLE ORIENTATION J853 ☆ ☆
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION J854 ☆
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT J850 ☆ ☆ *1
Step sequence function S982 ☆ ☆
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840 ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆ ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS J927 ☆ ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION J930 ☆ ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ☆ ☆
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : The function cannot be used though option becomes effective.

- 560 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

0i-LF Plus

The CNC Function which checked "○" is effective when the Package/Kit is selected
on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be effective.
Package/Kit

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
ADDITION OF CUTTING
S912 ○
CONDITION DATA
ENHANCED BUFFER
J611 ○
FUNCTION
LASER MINIMUM INSTRUCTION 1%
S925 ○
MACHINING S932 DUTY OVERRIDE
MULTI PIECE MACHINING
PACKAGE FUNCTION - ○
THE COMMAND FOR END
POSITION OF TAKING - ○
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION - ○
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN - ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES - ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES
R687 ☆
1000
ADDITION OF CUTTING CONDITION DATA S912 ☆
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
- ○
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II - ○
AI FEEDFORWARD R368 ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE - ○
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC - ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL - ○
BACKGROUND EDITING - ○
A02B-0207-J
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION ☆
816
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
- ○
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 256KB J736 ☆
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH - ○

- 561 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION - ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION - ○
CUSTOM MACRO - ○
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME 31 CHARACTERS R583 ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB - ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆
CUTTING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION - ○
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL
S674 ☆
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION - ○
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION - ○ *2
EDGE CUTTING FUNCTION - ○
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆
ENHANCED BUFFER FUNCTION J611 ☆
Ethenret/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION R967 ☆
Ethernet FUNCTION S707 ☆
Ethernet/IP ADAPTER SAFETY FUNCTION R976 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION R966 ☆
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION - ○ *1
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT - ○
EXTERNAL DECELERATION - ○
F1-DIGIT FEED - ○
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR - ○
FL-net FUNCTION J692 ☆
FUNCTION BLOCK FUNCTION - ○
GAP CONTROL FUNCTION FOR LASER - ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION - ○
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP - ○
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION - ○ *1
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION - ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM C - ○
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO - ○
LASER DATA LOG OUTPUT FUNCTION - ○
LASER MACHINING PACKAGE S932 ☆
LASER OSCILLATOR COMMUNICATION CONTROL
- ○
(FSSB CONNECTION)
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION - ○
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR - ○
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS - ○
Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION R968 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
- ○
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH - ○

- 562 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ENGLISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVENIAN - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE - ○
MULTI-STEP SKIP - ○
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA EXPANSION
S967#40K ☆
(40KB)
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION S984#10K ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL - ○
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 - ○
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION - ○
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 ☆
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP - ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R - ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 2MBYTE - ○
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 24,000 STEPS - ○
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K ☆
PMC MULTI-LANGUAGE MESSAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION - ○
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 1MB R856#1M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 512KB - ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND - ○
POSITION SWITCH - ○
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
R553 ☆
WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO CONTROLLER FUNCTION R971 ☆
PROFINET IO CONTROLLER FUNCTION R984 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE FUNCTION R972 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE SAFETY FUNCTION R977 ☆
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION - ○
PROGRAM RESTART - ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE - ○
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆

- 563 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY - ○
SAFETY FUNCTION BY FL-net S851 ☆
SCALING - ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP - ○
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION - ○
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING - ○
SMOOTH TOLERANCE CONTROL - ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL - ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE
- ○
SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN CIRCULAR
- ○
INTERPOLATION
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982 ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE - ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 - ○
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME
R323 ☆
1000
THE NUMBER OF CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE NAME
R324 ☆
4000
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION J897 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS - ○
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION - ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM - ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET - ○
*1 : This option is available at only Machine composition of type 0.
*2 : This option is available at only Machine composition of type 1.

- 564 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

30i-LB

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
2 LASERS CONTROL FUNCTION S911 ☆
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION S673 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION J713 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830 ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES J887 ☆
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES
R687 ☆
1000
ADDITION OF CUTTING CONDITION DATA S912 ☆
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J895 ☆
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I S807 ☆
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II S808 ☆
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE - ○
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804 ☆
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆
BACKGROUND EDITING J956 ☆
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
J829 ☆
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
C AXIS CONTROL J601 ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 256KB J736 ☆
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801 ☆
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893 ☆
CUSTOM MACRO J873 ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 512KB J738#512K ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M ☆
CUTTING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION J886 ☆
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆
EDGE CUTTING FUNCTION J833 ☆
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆
ENHANCED BUFFER FUNCTION J611 ☆
Ethenret/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION R967 ☆
Ethernet/IP ADAPTER PORT2 FUNCTION R974 ☆

- 565 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
Ethernet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION R966 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER PORT2 FUNCTION R973 ☆
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913 ☆
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842 ☆
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911 ☆
F1-DIGIT FEED J820 ☆
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644 ☆
FANUC PICTURE FUNCTION S879 ☆
FL-net FUNCTION J692 ☆
FL-net PORT2 FUNCTION R964 ☆
FUNCTION BLOCK FUNCTION - ○
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972 ☆
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819 ☆
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SKIP J848 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ☆
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874 ☆
JERK CONTROL S678 ☆
LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND J602 ☆
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION R700 ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637 ☆
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR J888 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR J734 ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835 ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836 ☆
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 MILLION R600 ☆
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550 ☆
Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION R968 ☆
MULTI PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION J603 ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION (3 SYSTEMS) R855#3 ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION (5 SYSTEMS) R855#5 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
S829 ☆
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ENGLISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆

- 566 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL J604 ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆
NANO SMOOTHING 2 R512 ☆
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA EXPANSION
S967#40K ☆
(40KB)
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION S984#10K ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813 ☆
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655 ☆
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 ☆
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955 ☆
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615 ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 300,000 STEPS H990#300K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 1MB R856#1M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 2MB R856#2M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 512KB R856#512K ☆
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND J818 ☆
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆
POSITION SWITCH J846 ☆
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE FUNCTION R972 ☆
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC Series 15 J882 ☆
PROGRAM RESTART J838 ☆
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880 ☆
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆
PUNCH PRESS FUNCTION R815 ☆
RAM AXIS CONTROL S919 ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971 ☆
SAFETY FUNCTION BY FL-net S851 ☆
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENTION (EIGHT AREAS) S908 ☆
SAFETY ZONE CHECK FUNCTION J605 ☆
SCALING J892 ☆
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521 ☆

- 567 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844 ☆
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION J803 ☆
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812 ☆
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆
SMOOTH TCP R639 ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL J960 ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE
J961 ☆
SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN CIRCULAR
J809 ☆
INTERPOLATION
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982 ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE - ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 1 AREA EXPANSION R552 ☆
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 J840 ☆
T-AXIS AND C-AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL S907 ☆
THE COMMAND FOR END POSITION OF TAKING
S927 ☆
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522 ☆
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆
TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION J621 ☆
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR PUNCH
J614 ☆
PRESS
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION J897 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926 ☆
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION - ○
VIRTUAL MDI KEY S883 ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894 ☆
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917 ☆
WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE
J622 ☆
FUNCTION
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993 ☆
Y AXIS CRACK CANCEL J616 ☆

- 568 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

30i-LB Plus

The CNC Function which checked "○" is effective when the Package/Kit is selected
on CNC GUIDE.
The CNC Function which checked "×" cannot be effective.
Package/Kit

Package/Kit Option Function

Available on
Drawing Drawing Remarks
Name Name CNC GUIDE
No. No.
C AXIS CONTROL J601 ○
PUNCH PRESS FUNCTION R815 ○
RAM AXIS CONTROL S919 ○
SAFETY ZONE AREA
S908 ○
EXTENTION
PUNCHING SAFETY ZONE CHECK
J605 ○
R104 FUNCTION
PACKAGE TOOL DATA SETTING
J621 ○
FUNCTION
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
J614 ○
FUNCTION
WORKPIECE HOLDER
INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE J622 ○
FUNCTION
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE
J713 ○
SYSTEM CONVERSION
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER
S667 ○
COMPENSATION
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL
S679 ○
FEED
LASER HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ○
R105
5-AXIS KIT MANUAL INTERRUPTION OF
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE S949 ×
SYSTEM CONVERSION
TILTED WORKING PLANE
R522 ○
INDEXING COMMAND
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR
S993 ○
COMPENSATION

List of function
○ ：Standard function
☆ ：Option function
- ：Not available

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
2 LASERS CONTROL FUNCTION S911 ☆
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION S673 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION J713 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION S667 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED S679 ☆
3-DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION J727 ☆

- 569 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN - ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES - ○
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES
R687 ☆
1000
ADDITION OF CUTTING CONDITION DATA - ○
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
J919 ☆
300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
- ○
48-PAIRS
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I - ○
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE - ○
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC - ○
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 ☆
BACKGROUND EDITING - ○
A02B-0207-J
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION ☆
816
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER
- ○
CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
C AXIS CONTROL J601 ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 256KB J736 ☆
C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ADDITIONAL SRAM 512KB S827 ☆
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FOR 19"LCD R624 ☆
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807 ☆
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION - ○
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION - ○
CUSTOM MACRO - ○
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 12MB J738#12M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 16MB J738#16M ☆
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB - ○
CUTTING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION - ○
CUTTING POINT COMMAND S996 ☆
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL
S674 ☆
INTERPOLATION
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816 ☆
EDGE CUTTING FUNCTION - ○
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K ☆
ENHANCED BUFFER FUNCTION - ○
Ethenret/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION R967 ☆
Ethernet/IP ADAPTER PORT2 FUNCTION R974 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION R966 ☆
Ethernet/IP SCANNER PORT2 FUNCTION R973 ☆
EXPANSION OF AXIS COMMAND IN TOOL CENTER
R592 ☆
POINT CONTROL
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711 ☆
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT - ○
EXTERNAL DECELERATION - ○
F1-DIGIT FEED - ○
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR - ○
FL-net FUNCTION J692 ☆
FL-net PORT2 FUNCTION R964 ☆
FOCAS2/HSSB PORT2 FUNCTION S749 ☆
FUNCTION BLOCK FUNCTION - ○
GAP CONTROL FUNCTION FOR LASER - ○
GENTLE NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J986 ☆
GRAPHIC DISPLAY - ○

- 570 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
HELICAL INTERPOLATION - ○
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B J655 ☆
HIGH SPEED POSITION SWITCH J987 ☆
HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK S880 ☆
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP R677 ☆
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652 ☆
iHMI BASIC FUNCTION R901 ☆
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION - ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM C - ○
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694 ☆
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805 ☆
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA S643 ☆
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO - ○
A02B-0359-
LASER 5-AXIS KIT ☆
R105
LASER DATA LOG OUTPUT FUNCTION - ○
LASER OSCILLATOR COMMUNICATION CONTROL
S928 ☆
(FSSB CONNECTION)
LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND J602 ☆
M CODE GROUP CHECK J922 ☆
MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION R700 ☆
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717 ☆
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637 ☆
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593 ☆
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964 ☆
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS - ○
MANUAL HANDLE FEED MULTIPLE 10 MILLION - ☆
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550 ☆
MINIMUM INSTRUCTION 1% DUTY OVERRIDE - ○
Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION R968 ☆
MULTI PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION - ○
MULTI PMC FUNCTION (3 SYSTEMS) R855#3 ☆
MULTI PMC FUNCTION (5 SYSTEMS) R855#5 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY BULGARIAN R686 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED
S829 ☆
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ENGLISH - ○
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FINNISH R726 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY INDONESIAN R411 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUMANIAN R694 ☆

- 571 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SLOVAK R693 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587 ☆
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY VIETNAMESE R410 ☆
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL J604 ☆
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849 ☆
NANO SMOOTHING S687 ☆
NONVOLATILE PMC DATA TABLE AREA EXPANSION
S967#40K ☆
(40KB)
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION S984#10K ☆
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL - ○
NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS EXPANSION 1 - ○
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669 ☆
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION - ○
OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION S675 ☆
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP - ○
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R - ○
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE 4MBYTE - ○
PMC ALLOCATION EXPANSION OF PROFINET IO
R979 ☆
CONTROLLER FUNCTION
PMC AXIS CONTROL ACCELERATION/ DECELERATION
R640 ☆
SPECIFICATION FEED
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 100,000 STEPS H990#100K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 300,000 STEPS H990#300K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 32,000 STEPS H990#32K ☆
PMC LADDER FUNCTION 64,000 STEPS H990#64K ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 1MB R856#1M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 2MB R856#2M ☆
PMC SYMBOL-COMMENT-MESSAGE AREA 512KB - ○
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND - ○
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815 ☆
POSITION SWITCH - ○
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693 ☆
POSITIONING IN MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
R553 ☆
WITH FEED RATE
PROFINET IO CONTROLLER FUNCTION R971 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE FUNCTION R972 ☆
PROFINET IO DEVICE SAFETY FUNCTION R977 ☆
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION - ○
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC Series 15 J882 ☆
PROGRAM RESTART - ○
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE - ○
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502 ☆
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828 ☆
PUNCH PRESS FUNCTION R815 ☆
A02B-0359-
PUNCHING PACKAGE ☆
R104
QUICK PROGRAM RESTART - ○
RAM AXIS CONTROL S919 ☆
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842 ☆
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT S629 ☆
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY - ○
SAFETY FUNCTION BY FL-net S851 ☆

- 572 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Specification of
Name Drawing No.
Function
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENTION (EIGHT AREAS) S908 ☆
SAFETY ZONE CHECK FUNCTION J605 ☆
SCALING - ○
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE - ○
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP - ○
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES EXPANSION - ○
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING - ○
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777 ☆
SMOOTH TCP R639 ☆
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL - ○
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE
- ○
SWITCH
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION S982 ☆
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE - ○
STORED STROKE CHECK 1 AREA EXPANSION R552 ☆
STORED STROKE CHECK 2, 3 - ○
T-AXIS AND C-AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL S907 ☆
THE COMMAND FOR END POSITION OF TAKING
- ○
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522 ☆
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677 ☆
TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION J621 ☆
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR PUNCH
J614 ☆
PRESS
TOOL OFFSET S617 ☆
TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION J897 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616 ☆
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS - ○
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614 ☆
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721 ☆
TOOL POSTURE CONTROL S994 ☆
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION - ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM - ○
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET - ○
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993 ☆
Y AXIS CRACK CANCEL J616 ☆

- 573 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

31i-LB
Name Drawing No.
2 LASERS CONTROL FUNCTION S911
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
J713
CONVERSION
3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN J830
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON
J887
VARIABLES
ADDITION OF CUTTING CONDITION DATA S912
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
J919
SYSTEM 300-PAIRS
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
J895
SYSTEM 48-PAIRS
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *2
BACKGROUND EDITING J956
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J814
BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
J829
AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
C AXIS CONTROL J601 *1
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893
CUSTOM MACRO J873
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MBYTE J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MBYTE J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MBYTE J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MBYTE J738#8M
CUTTING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION J886
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION J816
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION J760
EDGE CUTTING FUNCTION J833
EMBEDDED MACRO S652#128K
ENHANCED BUFFER FUNCTION J611
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION J711
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911
F1-DIGIT FEED J820
FANUC PICTURE EXECUTOR R644
FIGURE COPYING J897
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION J652
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA S643
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874
JERK CONTROL S678
LASER OSCILLATOR COMMUNICATION
S928
CONTROL (FSSB CONNECTION)
LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND J602
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION S637
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964

- 574 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT R593
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 1-UNIT J835
MANUAL HANDLE FEED 2/3-UNITS J836
MULTI PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION J603
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE
S829
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL J604
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849
NANO SMOOTHING S689
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813
NURBS INTERPOLATION J669
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655
OPTIMUM TORQUE
S675
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP J955
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING CORNER R S615
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815
POSITION SWITCH J846
POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION J693
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR FANUC SERIES 15 J882
PROGRAM RESTART J838
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE J880
PROGRAMMABLE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAP R502
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
PUNCH PRESS FUNCTION R815
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENTION (EIGHT AREAS) S908
SAFETY ZONE CHECK FUNCTION J605
SCALING J892
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES
J803
EXPANSION
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING J812
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION J777
SMOOTH TCP R639
SPEED CONTROL WITH ACCELERATION IN
J809
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
STORED LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE J749
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840
T-AXIS AND C-AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL S907
THE COMMAND FOR END POSITION OF TAKING
S927
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING COMMAND R522
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL S677

- 575 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION J621
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR
J614
PUNCH PRESS
TOOL OFFSET S617
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B S616
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 2000-PAIRS S622
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 499-PAIRS S614
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 999-PAIRS J721
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926
TOOL RADIUS -TOOL NOSE RADIUS
J930
COMPENSATION
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917
WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION S993
Y AXIS CRACK CANCEL J616
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at C–axis simultaneous control.
*2 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

31i-PB
Name Drawing No.
2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION J920
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON J887
VARIABLES
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE J891
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC J804
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *2
BACKGROUND EDITING J956
BASIC OPERATION PACKAGE 2 FUNCTION A02B-0207-J814
C AXIS CONTROL J601 *1
CONTROL AXIS DETACH J807
CONTROLLABLE AXES EXPANSION J801
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION J893
CUSTOM MACRO J873
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MBYTE J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MBYTE J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MBYTE J738#6M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MBYTE J738#8M
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT J913
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
EXTERNAL MESSAGE J911
GRAPHIC DISPLAY J972
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION J876
INCREMENT SYSTEM C J805
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INCREMENT SYSTEM E S805
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874
LINEAR/CIRCULAR PUNCHING COMMAND J602
MACHINING TIME STAMP J964
MULTI PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION J603
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE S829
(SIMPLIFIED CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689

- 576 -
 A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY JAPANESE J965
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL J604
MULTI-STEP SKIP J849
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL J813
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL FUNCTION S655
POSITION SWITCH J846
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
REAL TIME CUSTOM MACRO S842
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY J971
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENTION (EIGHT AREAS) S908
SAFETY ZONE CHECK FUNCTION J605
SCALING J892
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP J844
SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLLED AXES J803
EXPANSION
STORED STROKE CHECK 2,3 J840
T-AXIS AND C-AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL S907
THE COMMAND FOR END POSITION OF TAKING S927
MULTIPLE WORKPIECES
TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION J621
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR J614
PUNCH PRESS
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C J937
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 400-PAIRS J928
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 64-PAIRS J925
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 99-PAIRS J926
TOOL RADIUS - TOOL NOSE RADIUS J930
COMPENSATION
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM J894
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET J917
Y AXIS CRACK CANCEL J616
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at C-axis simultaneous control.
*2 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.

PMi-MODEL A

Name Drawing No.

AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL J843 *1
BASIC OPTION 1 R702
BASIC OPTION 2 R703
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 2MB J738#2M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 4MB J738#4M
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 6MB J738#6M

- 577 -
A.LIST OF OPTION

Name Drawing No.

CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE 8MB J738#8M
ELECTRONIC CAM FUNCTION R402
EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES FUNCTION A02B-0207-J900
EXTERNAL DECELERATION J842
FANUC PICTURE FOR POWER MOTION I FUNCTION R708
FEED RATE CHANGE FUNCTION R716
HELICAL INTERPOLATION J819
INCREMENT SYSTEM D S694
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO J874
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION R717
MACRO EXECUTOR R705
MACRO EXECUTOR + C-LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R706
MACRO FOR MULTI-AXIS HIGH RESPONSE R397
FUNCTION
MDI RESET KEY INVALIDATION FUNCTION R549
MIDDLE-LEVEL TASK OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR R550
MULTI-AXES SYNCHRONOUS FUNCTION R403
MULTI-AXIS HIGH RESPONSE FUNCTION R396
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE J967
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED S829
CHARACTERS)
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY CZECH S689
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DANISH J650
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY DUTCH J962
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FRENCH S841
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY GERMAN S839
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY HUNGARIAN S690
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ITALIAN J968
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY KOREAN J969
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY POLISH S739
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY PORTUGUESE J678
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY RUSSIAN S849
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SPANISH J970
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY SWEDISH S691
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY TURKISH R587
PMC AXIS CONTROL R640
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION SPECIFICATION
FEED
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION J815
POSITION DEFINITION TYPE SYNCHRONOUS R399
FUNCTION
PRESSURE AND POSITION CONTROL FUNCTION R400 *2
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS S828
SELECTION OF FIVE OPTIONAL LANGUAGE R521
SKIP FUNCTION FOR MULTI-AXIS HIGH RESPONSE R398
FUNCTION
TEACHING SUPPORT SCREEN R388
TOOL OFFSET PAIRS 200-PAIRS J927
*1 : Only the master axis can be controlled at Axis synchronous control.
*2 : Only the command can be controlled at Pressure and position control function.
(Only the position command can be use.)

- 578 -
 Version history

Version history
Ed Date Description
01 2020/10/30 The first edition (Ver 19.2)
02 2020/12/3 Addition of FS30i-B Plus 72AX (Ver 20.0)
03 2021/03/10 Addition of FS35i-B 16AX (Ver 21.0)
04 2021/07/16 Updating list of option and addition of Dual Check Safety to PMC function (Ver 22.0)
05 2022/01/12 Updating list of option (Ver 24.1)
Addition of FS0i-LF Plus, FS30i-LB and FS30i-LB Plus.
06 2022/05/20
Supports 15 and 19 inch display sizes of FS0i-F Plus (Ver 25.0).

- 579 -